2020 Stelvio Owner’s Manuals PDF

2020 OWNER’S MANUAL

2020 STELVIO

20_GU_OM_EN_USC

Second Edition V2

permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage,

knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an

important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store

or Google

Play

Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date documents by visiting these links:

Owner’s Manual and Media:

www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Warranty Booklet:

www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/warranty (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor

vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and

lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine

except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your

hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual

may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any

features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and

specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products

previously manufactured.

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in

substitution therefore.

If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling

1-844-253-2872 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation /

Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by

visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an

accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may

take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other

devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and

should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the

driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo brand vehicle and to provide a convenient

reference source for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (U.S.),

www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously

impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.

Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower

and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

WARNING!

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.

We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary

me to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.

Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical

fea

tures of your Alfa Romeo.

You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of

ur vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.

This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance

your Alfa Romeo over time.

In the provided Warranty information, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited

rranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.

For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact:

Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI

48321–8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA

(1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada):

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English)

Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling

Gas engines:Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage

vital components of the supply system.

Diesel engines:D

not use other products or mixtures as they may cause damage to the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the

warranty. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, refer to "Fuel Requirements" in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then

push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on potential fire hazards such as: grass, dry leaves,

pine needles or other flammable material.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the

environment (if equipped).

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, with the risk of gradually draining the battery, contact an authorized

dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and

safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

Scheduled Servicing

Rollover Warning

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity

than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go

out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely

may

result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Rollover Warning Label

ilure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal

use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a

rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS

Accessories Purchased By The Owner

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any

case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact an authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical

system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.

NOTE:

Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect effi-

ciency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal (mats, etc.).

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed

compliance with the provided instructions.

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices

FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.

NOTE:

Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to

fau

lts caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance

wit

h the provided instructions.

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally.

Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the

ge instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.

WARNING!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

CAUTION!

 The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could

compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

 If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/

Keyless Start system may occur.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Operating Instructions

Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the

driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate.

The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the Index at the end of this manual.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter

ord

er and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page.

Warnings And Cautions

While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the

vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CA

UTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.

Therefore all W

RNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and C

AUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety:

Vehicle Safety:

NOTE:

This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional equipment meant for specific markets or particular models are not identified as such in the

xt: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the

specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.

The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the

vehi

cles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all

warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNER’S MANUAL DO NOT TOUCH WITH HANDS

COMPONENT CAN START

TOMATICALLY ALSO WHEN ENGINE

IS OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYES

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP WHEN THE

GINE IS HOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT A DISTANCE BURSTING

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS OF

YOU

R BODY AND CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH FLAMES CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling.....................................................2

Starting The Engine..

..................................2

Parking On Flammable Material ..

.............2

Respecting The Environment ..

..................2

Electrical Accessories ..

.............................. 2

Scheduled Servicing ..

................................2

Rollover Warning ..

...................................... 3

VEHICLE CHANGES /

ALTERATIONS

Accessories Purchased By The Owner......4

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices ..

..4

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ..

. 4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Operating Instructions ...............................5

Warnings And Cautions..

............................ 5

Symbols ...................................................... 6

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

VEHICLE

KEYS..........................................................14

Key Fob...................................................14

Operation................................................ 14

eplacing The Electronic Key Fob

Battery .

.................................................. 15

equest For Additional Keys..

...............16

General Information ..

............................16

IGNITION SYSTEM.................................... 16

Operation ............................................... 16

Starting With A Discharged Key Fob

Battery.

................................................... 17

teering Wheel Lock — If Equipped..

.... 17

General Information ..

............................ 18

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER............................. 18

Engine Immobilizer Operation .............. 18

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED..

........................................... 19

Alarm Activation..................................... 19

To Arm The Alarm ..

................................ 19

To Disarm The Alarm..

........................... 20

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection —

If Equipped.

........................................... 20

To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive

Entry .

...................................................... 20

DOORS...................................................... 20

Locking And Unlocking Doors From

The Inside .............................................. 20

ocking/Unlocking Doors From The

Outside.

.................................................. 21

assive Entry ..

...................................... 21

General Information ..

............................ 24

Power Lock..

........................................... 25

Child Safety Locks ..

............................... 25

Locking The Doors With A Discharged

Battery.

................................................... 25

SEATS ...................................................... 26

Power Front Seats ................................. 26

Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio

Vehicles) — If Equipped.

....................... 27

Heated Seats — If Equipped ..

............... 28

Split Folding Rear Seat ..

....................... 29

Easy Entry Function..

............................. 30

HEAD RESTRAINTS...................................30

Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) ...30

Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)..

..31

Head Restraints (Removal) ..

.................31

STEERING WHEEL ....................................32

Steering Wheel Adjustments.................32

Heated Steering Wheel —

If Equipped .

..........................................32

MIRRORS .................................................33

Electrochromic Mirror ...........................33

Exterior Power Mirrors ..

.........................33

Heated Mirrors ..

.....................................34

EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................................34

Headlight Switch ....................................34

Automatic Headlights..

...........................34

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ..

..........34

Rear Fog Lights ..

....................................35

Parking Lights ..

......................................35

Headlight Off Delay ..

..............................35

Adaptive Headlight System (AFS) —

If Equipped .

...........................................35

High Beam Headlights ..

........................35

Turn Signals..

..........................................36

INTERIOR LIGHTS ....................................36

Front Map Reading Lights .....................36

Glove Compartment Light..

....................37

Interior Ambient Lighting ..

....................37

Door Lights ..

...........................................38

Rear Overhead Light ..

...........................38

Luggage Compartment Courtesy

Lights .

.....................................................38

nstrument Panel Dimmer Control..

......39

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ..............................39

Windshield Wiper Stalk ......................... 39

Windshield Wiper/Washers ..

................ 39

Rain Sensor..

..........................................40

Rear Window Wiper/Washer..

...............41

HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED ...41

CLIMATE CONTROL ..

...............................42

Passenger Compartment Air Vents ..... 42

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control

System.

................................................... 43

escription ..

...........................................45

Operating Mode ..

...................................45

Climate Control Display Settings ..

........45

Air Temperature Adjustment..

...............46

Air Distribution Selection..

.....................46

Fan Speed Adjustment..

........................ 46

AUTO Button..

.........................................46

SYNC Button..

.........................................46

Air Recirculation And Air Quality

System (AQS).

........................................47

A/C Compressor..

...................................47

Front Defroster And MAX-DEF

Function.

................................................. 47

ear Defroster ..

..................................... 48

Humidity Sensor..

...................................48

Switching Off/On The Climate Control

System.

................................................... 48

top/Start .............................................. 48

ystem Maintenance..

...........................48

POWER WINDOWS ...................................48

Power Window Switches........................48

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........49

Power Sunroof........................................ 49

Opening ..................................................50

losing....................................................50

ent Opening..

........................................50

Power Sun Shade..

.................................50

Pinch Protect Feature ..

..........................50

Re-Initialization Procedure ..

..................50

HOOD ...................................................... 51

Opening The Hood .................................51

Closing The Hood ..

.................................51

POWER LIFTGATE ................................... 52

Opening...................................................52

Closing ....................................................53

iftgate Initialization ..

............................54

Cargo Area Features ..

............................54

GARAGE DOOR OPENER ......................... 56

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink® ..

..........................................56

Canadian/Gate Operator

Programming.

........................................58

Using HomeLink® ..

................................58

Security ...................................................58

roubleshooting Tips..

............................58

General Information..

.............................59

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........................... 60

Glove Compartment...............................60

Sun Visors...............................................60

ont Armrest ..

.......................................60

Cupholders ..

..........................................60

Rear Armrest ..

........................................61

Power Outlets ..

.......................................61

Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray —

If Equipped .

...........................................62

Wireless Charging Pad —

If Equipped .

...........................................62

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ........... 63

Instrument Cluster ............................... 63

Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..

........ 64

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........... 65

Instrument Cluster Display

Description..

........................................... 65

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster

Display.

................................................... 65

econfigurable Display Items..

............. 65

Customer Programmable Settings ..

..... 68

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL ..

............... 69

Red Warning Lights ............................... 70

Amber Warning Lights..

......................... 72

Green Telltale Indicator Lights ..

........... 75

Blue Telltale Indicator Light..

................ 76

Red Symbols..

........................................ 77

Amber Symbols..

.................................... 81

Green Symbols ..

.................................... 87

Blue Symbols ..

....................................... 87

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM............ 88

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity ..

....................................... 88

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS..

.................. 88

SAFETY

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ........................90

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) .......... 90

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

System — If Equipped .

..........................90

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System.

................................................... 91

rive Train Control (DTC) System ..

.......91

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System.

................................................... 91

ill Descent Control (HDC)

System — If Equipped .

..........................92

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System ..

.............93

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System..

........93

Traction Control System (TCS) ..

............94

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.................94

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

System — If Equipped ..

..........................94

Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA)

System — If Equipped .

.........................96

Forward Collision Warning Plus

(FCW+) System — If Equipped .

............99

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) .

.................................................104

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....... 107

Occupant Restraint Systems

Features ..............................................107

mportant Safety Precautions ..

...........107

Seat Belt Systems ..

.............................108

Supplemental Restraint Systems

(SRS).

....................................................112

hild Restraints....................................12

Transporting Pets..

...............................128

SAFETY TIPS ...........................................129

Transporting Passengers .................... 129

Exhaust Gas ..

...................................... 129

Safety Checks You Should Make

Inside The Vehicle .

............................ 129

Periodic Safety Checks You Should

Make Outside The Vehicle .

................ 130

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE .........................131

Starting Procedure ..............................131

Remote Starting System ..

................... 131

Cold Weather Operation...................... 13

Extended Park Starting ..

..................... 132

If Engine Fails To Start ..

...................... 132

After Starting — Warming Up The

Engine .

................................................. 133

topping The Engine ..

......................... 133

Turbocharger Cool Down ..

.................. 133

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —

IF EQUIPPED ..

........................................133

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS ..

..........................134

Engine Break-In ...................................134

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE.........................134

Electric Park Brake Operating

Modes ..................................................135

afe Hold ............................................. 136

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION................. 136

Display ................................................. 137

Gear Selector..

..................................... 137

Transmission Operating Modes ..

....... 138

Automatic Transmission Limp

Home Mode.

....................................... 140

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System .

................................................ 140

mportant Notes ..

................................ 140

ALFA DNA SELECTOR ............................ 141

Alfa DNA System ................................. 141

Driving Modes ..

................................... 142

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) —

IF EQUIPPED ..

........................................ 144

STOP/START SYSTEM ..

......................... 144

Operating Mode .................................. 144

System Manual Activation/

Deactivation .

...................................... 145

Possible Reasons The Engine Does

Not Autostop.

...................................... 145

Engine Restarting Conditions..

........... 145

Safety Functions ..

............................... 145

Energy Saving Function ..

.................... 145

Irregular Operation..

............................ 146

Vehicle Inactivity ..

............................... 146

SPEED LIMITER ..................................... 146

Description .......................................... 146

Activation ............................................. 146

peed Limit Programming..

................ 146

Exceeding The Programmed Speed..

. 147

Programmed Speed Icon Flashing..

... 147

Deactivation ..

...................................... 147

SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE

CONTROL) .............................................. 147

Speed Control Description ..................147

To Activate............................................147

etting The Desired Speed ..

...............148

To Vary The Speed Setting ..

................148

To Resume The Speed ..

......................149

To Deactivate ..

.....................................149

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED ..

....................................... 149

System Description..............................149

Activation/Deactivation..

.....................150

Setting The Desired Speed ..

...............151

To Vary The Speed Setting ..

................151

Accelerating When Overtaking..

..........152

Resuming The Speed ..

........................152

Setting The Distance Between

Vehicles .

...............................................152

top And Go Function..

........................153

Deactivation ..

.......................................153

Limited Operation Warning ..

...............153

Precautions While Driving ..

.................154

General Information ..

..........................155

HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM (HAS) —

IF EQUIPPED ..

........................................ 156

Activation/Deactivation.......................156

Operation..............................................157

ndications On The Display..

................157

System Status..

....................................158

Limited System Availability/

Operation.

.............................................158

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED ..

........................................ 159

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 159

Operation............................................. 160

ndications On The Display..

............... 160

System Status ..

................................... 160

Limited System Availability/

Operation.

............................................ 161

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..

...................... 162

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 162

Indications On The Display ..

............... 162

INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..

...................... 163

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 163

Indications On The Display ..

............... 164

Acceptance/Rejection Of The

Suggested Speed .

.............................. 164

DRIVER ATTENTION ASSIST (DAA)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..

...................... 165

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 165

System Intervention..

.......................... 165

PARKSENSE SYSTEM ........................... 166

Vehicles With Rear Parking Sensors

Only ...................................................... 166

ehicles With Front And Rear

Parking Sensors — If Equipped .

........ 168

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM ................................................. 170

Description .......................................... 170

System Activation/Deactivation..

....... 171

Symbols And Messages On The

Display .

................................................ 171

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..

......................172

Activation/Deactivation ......................172

Symbols And Messages On The

Display.

................................................. 173

REAR BACK UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC

GRIDLINES ..

..........................................175

Description...........................................175

Symbols And Messages On The

Display.

................................................. 176

mportant Notes ..

................................176

REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................... 176

Refueling The Vehicle.......................... 176

Refueling Capacity..

............................. 176

Refueling Procedure ..

.........................177

VEHICLE LOADING ................................. 178

Certification Label ............................... 178

TRAILER TOWING................................... 179

Common Towing Definitions...............180

Trailer Hitch Classification ..

................ 181

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings).

...................... 181

Trailer And Tongue Weight ..

............... 182

Towing Requirements ..

....................... 182

Towing Tips ..

.......................................184

Installing The Receiver..

...................... 184

Connecting The Electrical System..

.... 185

Removing The Receiver ..

....................185

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING................ 185

Saving Fuel .......................................... 185

Driving Style ..

.......................................185

Conditions Of Use..

.............................. 186

Performance — Quadrifoglio ..

............. 186

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE ....................... 188

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..

.......... 188

SOS - EMERGENCY CALL ..

.................... 188

BULB REPLACEMENT..

.......................... 191

General Instructions ............................191

Types Of Bulbs ..

...................................191

Replacement Bulbs ..

...........................192

Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..

...................192

Replacing Interior Bulbs..

....................193

FUSES .................................................... 194

General Information ............................194

Fuse Location..

.....................................196

Control Unit Under Passenger Side

Footboard .

............................................196

uggage Compartment Fuse Box ..

.....196

Control Unit Under Passenger Side

Footboard .

............................................197

uggage Compartment Fuse Box ..

.....198

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING............. 199

General Instructions ............................199

Jack Information And Usage

Precautions .

........................................199

Changing Procedure ..

..........................199

TIRE SERVICE KIT —

IF EQUIPPED ..

....................................... 201

Description ...........................................201

Inflation Procedure ..

............................202

Checking And Restoring Tire

Pressure .

..............................................204

JUMP STARTING ....................................204

Remote Battery Connection Posts ..... 205

Jump Starting Procedure ..

.................. 206

Bump Starting ..

................................... 207

ENGINE OVERHEATING .........................207

MANUAL PARK RELEASE..

.....................208

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..

..........208

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ........209

TOW EYES ..............................................209

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM (EARS) ..

...................................210

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..

..........210

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING .......................211

Periodic Checks ................................... 211

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle ..

............. 211

Maintenance Plan (2.0L T4 MAir

Engine) .

................................................ 212

aintenance Plan (2.9L V6 Engine) ..

214

ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......................216

Checking Levels — 2.0L T4 MAir

Engine .................................................. 216

hecking Levels — 2.9L V6 Engine ..

.. 217

Engine Oil ............................................. 217

ngine Coolant Fluid ..

......................... 218

Washer Fluid For Windshield/

Headlights.

........................................... 218

rake Fluid..

......................................... 219

Automatic Transmission Activation

System Oil............................................ 219

seful Advice For Extending The Life

Of Your Battery .

.................................. 219

Battery ................................................. 219

ressure Washing ..

............................. 220

BATTERY RECHARGING......................... 220

Important Notes .................................. 220

DEALER SERVICE .................................. 221

Engine Oil............................................. 221

Engine Oil Filter ..

................................. 221

Air Filter................................................ 221

r Conditioning System

Maintenance .

..................................... 222

Lubricating Moving Parts Of The

Bodywork .

............................................ 222

indshield Wiper ..

.............................. 222

Exhaust System..

................................. 224

Cooling System..

.................................. 224

Braking System ..

................................. 225

Automatic Transmission ..

................... 226

Replacing The Battery..

....................... 226

RAISING THE VEHICLE .......................... 226

TIRES ..................................................... 227

Tire Safety Information ....................... 227

Tires — General Information ..

............ 233

Spare Tires — If Equipped ..

................ 237

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care..

............. 238

Tire Types............................................. 238

ire Chains and Traction Devices ..

.... 239

Tire Rotation Recommendations ..

..... 240

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....... 240

Treadwear ............................................240

Traction Grades ..

.................................240

Temperature Grades ..

.........................241

STORING THE VEHICLE ........................ 241

BODYWORK ..

......................................... 242

Protection Against Atmospheric

Agents...................................................242

orrosion Warranty..

............................242

Preserving The Bodywork ..

.................242

INTERIORS ............................................. 243

Seats And Fabric Parts ........................243

Leather Seats..

.....................................243

Plastic And Coated Parts..

...................243

Genuine Leather Parts ..

......................243

Carbon Fiber Parts..

.............................243

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ........................... 244

Vehicle Identification Number............ 244

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Plate.

.................................................... 244

ENGINE .................................................. 244

POWER SUPPLY..

................................... 245

TRANSMISSION ..

................................... 245

BRAKES.................................................. 246

USPENSION ..

....................................... 246

STEERING .............................................. 246

IMENSIONS ..

....................................... 247

Luggage Compartment Volume ......... 248

WEIGHTS................................................ 249

FUEL REQUIREMENTS..

......................... 250

Reformulated Gasoline....................... 250

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..

............. 250

CNG And LP Fuel System

Modifications.

..................................... 250

MMT In Gasoline ..

............................... 250

Materials Added To Fuel..

................... 250

Fuel System Cautions ..

....................... 251

FLUID CAPACITIES ................................. 251

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..

................... 253

Engine Lubrication .............................. 253

Chassis Lubrication..

........................... 253

PERFORMANCE ..................................... 254

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING

SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..

............ 255

Prepare For The Appointment ............ 255

Prepare A List ..

.................................... 255

Be Reasonable With Requests..

......... 255

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................... 255

Alfa Romeo Customer Center ............. 255

Alfa Romeo Customer Care

(Canada).

.............................................. 255

ustomer Assistance For The

Hearing Or Speech Impaired

(TDD/TTY).

............................................ 255

ervice Contract ..

...............................256

WARRANTY INFORMATION ................... 256

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS..

............ 256

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C. ..

...............................256

In Canada............................................. 256

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............. 257

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important information

to help you become familiar with the features

needed to operate your vehicle, and how they

function.

KEYS

KEY FOB

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This

system includes a key fob and a keyless push

button ignition.

The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows you to

loc

k or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate

the panic alarm from a distance. The key fob does

not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate

the system.

Key Fob

PANIC Function

The key fob contains a PANIC button. Should you

ever

feel threatened, push this button and the

vehicle security alarm will sound.

To activate the PANIC function, push and hold the

PAN

IC button for at least one second. When the

panic alarm is active, the headlights turn on, the

turn signals flash, the horn honks intermittently,

and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The

panic alarm will remain active for three minutes,

and can be deactivated:

 By pushing the PANIC button again.

 Automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds

5 mph (8 km/h).

In both cases, the panic alarm is immediately

ctivated.

OPERATION

Unlocking The Doors And The Liftgate

Push and release the unlock button on the key

once to unlock the driver side front door or

twice within one second to unlock all doors and

the liftgate.

The current unlock setting can be changed

throu

gh the radio system menu, so that the

system unlocks:

 All doors on the first push of the key fob unlock

button.

 The driver door on the first push of the key fob

unlock button.

 The liftgate "independently" or "with doors".

Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/

unl

ocking the doors, and activation of the

courtesy light upon unlocking the doors, can be

activated or deactivated through the radio

system. For further information, refer to the

Information and Entertainment System Owner’s

Manual Supplement.

The doors can also be unlocked by using the

eme

rgency key, located inside the key fob.

Door And Liftgate Locking

Briefly pushing the lock button on the key fob will

loc

k the doors and liftgate, switch off the internal

lights, and flash the turn signals (if activated in

the radio system).

If one or more doors are open, these doors will

als

o lock, and this is indicated by a rapid flashing

of the turn signals. The doors will unlock again

only if the key fob is detected inside the

passenger compartment.

The doors can be locked by using the emergency

key

in the driver’s side door lock.

WARNING!

 Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK, apply the

parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

 Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

 Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

buildup may cause serious injury or death.

Opening The Liftgate

Rapidly push the button on the key fob twice to

open the liftgate. The turn signals will flash to

indicate that the liftgate has been opened.

Remote Start

The remote start button on the key fob

enables engine starting (push the

ote start button on the key fob

twice to enable engine starting).

Car Finder

The Car Finder feature will temporarily activate

turn signals and headlights to assist with

locating the vehicle in a crowded area.

To activate, push the lock or unlock button to

rem

otely and temporarily activate the turn signals

and headlights.

Pushing the lock or unlock button again will

rea

ctivate the lights switch on timer (if the

parking lights function was already active, it will

remain active).

This function is available only if the doors are

osed.

Key Fob

REPLACING THE ELECTRONIC KEY FOB

ATTERY

To replace the battery, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and

xtract the cover pulling downwards.

Key Fob Cove

r Removal

2. Remove the emergency key from its housing.

emoving Emergency Key

. Remove the battery plug by rotating it coun-

erclockwise.

Removing Battery Plug

. Remove the battery from its slot and replace

t with a new one of the same type.

Battery Location

roceed in reverse order to reassemble the key.

CAUTION!

The battery replacement operation must be

done with care, in order not to damage the

electronic key.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS

The system can recognize up to eight key fobs

with remote control.

To guarantee that the engine starts and the

vehi

cle operates correctly, use only electronic key

fobs specifically coded for the vehicle’s

electronics.

If an electronic key fob is coded for a vehicle, it

nnot be used on any other vehicle.

NOTE:

For Quadrifoglio models, if you need a replace-

ment key fob, contact an authorized dealer.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

les and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

nce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

Innovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

rouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

guientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

ause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

uier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

usar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

req

uirements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’

exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

s été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

IGNITION SYSTEM

OPERATION

To activate the keyless ignition, the key fob must

be inside the vehicle.

Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button

The keyless ignition has the following modes:

 OFF: engine off, steering locked. Some

electrical devices (e.g. central door locking

system, alarm, etc.) are still available.

 ACC: all electrical devices are available. This

state can be entered by pushing the ignition

button once, without pressing the brake pedal.

 ON/RUN: engine starting. This state can be

entered by pushing the ignition button once

while pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

NOTE:

 With the keyless ignition in the ACC position: if

30 minutes pass with the gear selector in

RK and the engine stopped, the keyless

ignition will automatically reset to the OFF

position.

 With the engine started, it is possible to

remove the key fob from the vehicle. The

engine will remain running and the instrument

cluster will indicate the absence of the key fob

when the door is closed.

For more information on engine start up, refer to

tarting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating."

STARTING WITH A DISCHARGED KEY FOB

ATTERY

If the key fob battery is discharged, proceed as

follows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

. L

ay the key fob on the indicated spot in the

ottom of the center console, positioning the

key fob as shown in the following image, while

pushing the START/STOP ignition button to

start the ignition.

Key Fob Placement Location

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive

electronic steering wheel lock. The steering wheel

lock is engaged when the driver door is opened

with the ignition OFF. The steering wheel lock

releases when the ignition is placed in the ON

position.

WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute

for the parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible

injury or damage.

 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure

the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the

key fob from the vehicle, and lock your

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in the

ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to

brake failure and a collision.

 Always fully apply the parking brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause

damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the

transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may

allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or

injury.

 Driving the vehicle with the parking brake

engaged, or repeated use of the parking

brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious

damage to the brake system.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on

with the parking brake released, a brake

system malfunction is indicated. Have the

brake system serviced by an authorized dealer

immediately.

WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

les and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

nce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

Innovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

rouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

guientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

ause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

uier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

usar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

req

uirements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’

exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

s été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER OPERATION

The Engine Immobilizer system prevents

unauthorized use of the vehicle by disabling

engine starting.

The system does not need to be enabled or

tivated. Operation of the immobilizer is

automatic whether the vehicle's doors are locked

or unlocked.

When the ignition is placed in the ACC position,

the

Engine Immobilizer system identifies the

code transmitted by the key. If the code is

recognized as valid, the Engine Immobilizer

system enables engine starting.

When the ignition is brought back to the OFF

sition, the Engine Immobilizer system

deactivates the engine control unit, disabling

engine starting.

For the correct engine starting procedures, refer

“Starting The Engine” in “Starting And

Operating.”

Irregular Operation

If the key code is not recognized during starting,

Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-in Attempt

icon is displayed on the instrument panel

(refer to "Warning Lights And Messages" in

etting To Know Your Instrument Panel"). This

condition leads to the engine turning off after two

seconds. In this case, place the ignition in the

OFF position and then in the ACC position; if it is

still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it

is still not possible to start the engine, contact an

authorized dealer.

If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-in

Attempt

icon is displayed while driving, this

means that the system is running a self-diagnosis

.g. due to a voltage drop). If the display persists,

contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

 Do not tamper with the Engine Immobilizer

system. Any modifications or alterations could

cause the protection function to be

deactivated.

 The Engine Immobilizer system is not

compatible with certain aftermarket remote

starting systems. The use of these devices

could cause problems when starting, as well as

the deactivation of the protection function.

 All keys provided with the vehicle have been

programmed in accordance with the

electronics on the vehicle itself.

 Each key has its own code which must be

stored by the system's control unit. Contact an

authorized dealer to have new keys (up to

eight) stored with a code.

SECURITY ALARM

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

ALARM ACTIVATION

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle

doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.

When the vehicle security alarm is activated,

interior switches for door locks are disabled. The

system provides both audible and visible signals.

While armed, the alarm will sound in the following

enarios:

 Opening of doors/hood/liftgate (perimeter

protection)

 Operation of ignition with a key which is not

validated

 Cutting of the battery cables

 Movement inside the passenger compartment

(volumetric protection — if equipped)

 Unexpected lifting/tilting of the vehicle (anti-lift

protection — if equipped)

Activation of the alarm triggers the acoustic

rning and the turn signals.

NOTE:

The alarm system is activated by the Engine

mobilizer system, which is automatically acti-

vated when you get out of the vehicle with the key

and lock the doors.

TO ARM THE ALARM

With the doors, hood, and liftgate closed and the

keyless ignition system placed in the OFF

position, push and release the lock button on the

key fob. The alarm can also be armed by pushing

the Passive Entry door handle button, located on

the exterior door handle. Refer to "Doors" in this

chapter for further information.

When the alarm is armed, the warning lights on

the

door handle trim remain on.

Lock/Unlock Switche

The activation of the alarm is preceded by a

self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the

system emits a further acoustic signal.

If a second acoustic signal is emitted after the

arm is already armed, wait about four seconds

and disarm the alarm by pushing the unlock

switch. Verify that the doors, hood, and liftgate

are closed correctly. Then, reactivate the system

by pushing the lock switch.

If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even when

the

doors, hood, and liftgate are correctly closed,

a fault has occurred in system operation. In this

case, contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

TO DISARM THE ALARM

Push the unlock button on the key fob to disarm

the alarm. While disarming, the following

operations are performed:

 Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if

programmed).

 Two brief acoustic signals (if programmed).

 Doors are unlocked.

The alarm can also be disarmed using the

ssive Entry system, by grasping one of the

Passive Entry front door handles with a valid key

fob in hand to unlock. For further information

refer to "Doors” in this chapter.

NOTE:

The alarm does not disarm when the doors are

locked by inserting the blade of the emergency

key into the door handle lock cylinder.

VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFT PROTECTION —

F EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm system monitors the

doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the

ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

To ensure the correct operation of the protection,

mpletely close the side windows. If a perimeter

violation triggers the security system, the alarm

will sound and the exterior lights will flash.

To ensure the correct operation of the

lumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,

completely close the side windows.

To disable the function, push the Volumetric/

ti-Lift Protection button before activating the

alarm.

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button

hen the function is disabled, this is indicated by

the

light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection

button flashing for several seconds.

Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift

Pro

tection must be repeated each time the

ignition is placed in the OFF position.

TO DISARM THE ALARM USING PASSIVE

NTRY

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. during a

long period of vehicle inactivity), insert the blade

of the emergency key, found inside the key fob,

into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the

emergency key to the right (clockwise) to lock the

door(s).

DOORS

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING DOORS FROM

HE INSIDE

If all doors are closed properly, they will automat-

ically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approx-

imately 12 mph (20 km/h) (Auto Relock function

tive).

Push the interior lock button on the driver or

ssenger side door panel trim to lock the doors.

Push the interior lock button on the rear door

nel trim to lock the rear doors only.

With doors locked, push the unlock button on the

terior trim panel to unlock the doors.

Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

LOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS FROM THE

UTSIDE

When locking the doors from the outside with the

doors closed, push the lock button on the key fob.

The door lock can be activated with all doors

cked and the liftgate open. When the lock

button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are

activated, including the liftgate if it is open. The

liftgate will be locked when it is closed.

When unlocking the doors from the outside, push

the

unlock button on the key fob.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside In An

ergency

If the battery is discharged or the key fob is

operable, you can lock or unlock the doors from

the outside by inserting the blade of the

emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the

door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency

key as follows.

 Lock — Turn the emergency key to the right

(clockwise)

 Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left

(counterclockwise)

PASSIVE ENTRY

The Passive Entry system can identify the

presence of a key fob near the doors and liftgate.

The system enables the doors and liftgate to be

cked or unlocked without pushing any buttons

on the key fob.

The key fob is detected only after the system

rec

ognizes the presence of a hand on one of the

front door handles. If the detected key fob is valid,

the doors and the liftgate are unlocked (refer to

the Information and Entertainment System

Owner’s Manual Supplement for Passive Entry

Settings).

NOTE:

The key fob may not be able to be detected by the

mote Keyless Entry system if it is located next

to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic

device; these devices may block the key fob’s

wireless signal and prevent the Remote Keyless

Entry system from starting the vehicle.

Grasping the handle of the driver's door unlocks

the

driver's side door, or all doors depending on

the mode set using the Information and

Entertainment System (refer to the Information

and Entertainment System Owner’s Manual

Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).

NOTE:

If wearing gloves, or if it has rained and the door

han

dle is wet, the activation sensitivity of the

Passive Entry function may be reduced, resulting

in a longer reaction time.

WARNING!

 Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

buildup may cause serious injury or death.

 For personal security and safety in the event

of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you

drive as well as when you park and leave the

vehicle.

 Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK, apply the

parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

 Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always

remove the key from the ignition and lock all of

the doors when leaving the vehicle

unattended.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Door Locking

To lock the doors, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that you have the key fob and are

lose to the driver’s or passenger’s side door

handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or

he Passive Entry liftgate button, which is

located as part of the external liftgate release

button switch. This will lock all doors and the

liftgate. Door locking will activate the alarm

as well.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

xternal Liftgate Release Button

(

Vehicles With Passive Entry)

NOTE:

After pushing the Passive Entry door handle

tton, you must wait two seconds before the

doors can be unlocked again using the passive

entry door handle button. This feature makes it

possible to check whether the vehicle has been

locked correctly by pulling the door handle within

two seconds. The doors will not be unlocked

again.

The vehicle doors and liftgate can be locked by

shing the lock button on the key fob or on the

interior door lock.

Driver Side Door Emergency Opening

If the key fob does not work, e.g. because its

ttery is discharged or the vehicle battery is

discharged, the emergency key can be used to

unlock the driver side door.

To remove the emergency key from the key fob,

pro

ceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and

xtract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob

using.

3. Insert the emergency key in the driver side

oor lock cylinder and turn it to the left (coun-

terclockwise) to unlock the door.

Emer

gency Key Release

mergency Key

NOTE:

 The emergency key blade is not directional and

can be inserted in each direction into the lock.

 To avoid leaving the key fob inside the vehicle

accidentally, the Passive Entry function

features an automatic door unlocking function.

 Once all of the vehicle doors are closed and

locked, the vehicle will attempt to locate the

key fob inside or outside of the vehicle.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

nterior Lock Switch Panel

hile pulling the handle, do not push the door

ck/unlock button on the handle.

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

f the key fob is detected inside the vehicle, the

Passive Entry function automatically unlocks all

the vehicle doors and flashes the turn signals.

If one or more key fobs are inside the passenger

mpartment, the lock button on the key fob

inside the passenger compartment is temporarily

disabled.

The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an

authorized key fob has been detected close to

the outside of the vehicle.

If the Passive Entry function is disabled using the

rad

io system, the Remote Keyless Entry system to

avoid accidentally leaving the key fob inside the

vehicle is deactivated.

Liftgate Access

Approaching the liftgate with a valid key fob, push

opening button to open the liftgate.

External Liftgate Release Button

NOTE:

 If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside

of the cargo area, and an attempt is made to

close it from outside, the liftgate will not lock.

With the doors locked, the liftgate unlocked,

and the key fob detected inside the vehicle, the

liftgate will unlock again and the lights flash

twice.

 Before driving, make sure the liftgate is closed

correctly.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Liftgate Locking

The liftgate may be locked by pushing the lock

button on the key fob, pushing the door lock

button on the door handles, or pushing the lock

button on the interior door panel of the vehicle.

The liftgate and the doors can be locked by

shing the passive entry button located as part

of the liftgate release button switch.

External Liftgate Release Switch

(

Vehicles With Passive Entry)

System Activation/Deactivation

The Passive Entry system can be activated or

activated using the radio system.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

les and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

nce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

Innovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

rouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

guientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

ause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

uier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

usar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

uirements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’

exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

s été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

POWER LOCK

The power lock is a safety device that prevents

the operation of the interior door handles and the

door lock and unlock buttons. The power lock also

prevents opening of the doors from inside the

passenger compartment.

It is recommended to lock the vehicle doors each

me the vehicle is parked.

Activating The Power Lock

The power lock is enabled on all the doors by

ickly pushing the lock button on the key fob

twice.

The turn signals will flash to let you know that the

wer lock is active.

If one or more of the doors are not closed

rrectly, the power lock will not activate,

preventing a person from getting stuck inside the

passenger compartment by entering the vehicle,

and then closing the open door.

Deactivating The Power Lock

The power lock disengages automatically:

 When the doors are unlocked by pushing the

unlock button on the key fob.

 When the keyless ignition is placed in the ON

position.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

To provide a safer environment for small children

riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are

equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock

system.

This device can only be engaged with the doors

en.

Child Safety Lock Positions

 Lock position: device locked (door opened

from exterior only)

 Unlock position: device unlocked (door may be

opened from the inside)

The Child Safety Locks remain locked even if the

ors are unlocked.

NOTE:

The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside

whe

n the Child Safety Lock is engaged.

LOCKING THE DOORS WITH A

ISCHARGED BATTERY

Proceed as follows to lock the doors if the vehicle

battery is discharged:

1. With the doors unlocked insert the emer-

ency key from the key fob or a screwdriver

to the door lock manual release lock

cylinder.

Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder

. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clock-

ise for the right door locks or counterclock-

wise for the left door locks.

3. R

emove the key/screwdriver from the

anual release lock.

Proceed in one of the following ways to realign the

or lock device (only when the battery charge

has been restored):

 Push the lock button on the key fob

 Push the unlock button on the door panel

 Unlock the driver’s door lock with the

emergency key

 Operate the internal door handle

NOTE:

For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are

gaged, and the previously described locking

procedure is carried out, operating the internal

handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only

realign the lock release device. To open the door,

the outside handle must be used. The door

central locking/unlocking buttons are not deacti

vated when the emergency lock is engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted to ensure

maximum comfort for the occupants. When

adjusting the driver’s seat, keep the shoulders

resting firmly against the backrest, the wrists

within reach of the top of the steering wheel, and

the seat close enough to allow the driver to fully

depress the brake pedal.

POWER FRONT SEATS

NOTE:

The seat layout may vary according to the vehicle

tions.

The power seat switch is located on the outboard

de of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to

move the driver's seat up, down, forward, and

rearward, or to recline the seatback.

Power Seat Adjustment

orward/Rearward Adjustment

Push the seat switch forward or rearward to

just to your desired position.

Seatback Recline

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted

forw

ard or rearward. Push the seatback switch

forward or rearward, and the seat will move in the

direction of the switch. Release the switch when

the desired position is reached.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or

ssenger seats may also be equipped with

power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is

located on the outboard side of the power seat.

Push the switch forward or rearward to increase

or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch

upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar

support.

Height Adjustment

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or

wn. Pull upward or push downward on the seat

switch, and the seat will move in the direction of

the switch. Release the switch when the desired

position is reached.

Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If Equipped

The seat angle can be adjusted in four directions.

ft or push the front part of seat switch to move

the front part of the seat in the corresponding

direction. Release the seat switch when the seat

has reached the desired position.

Power Bolster Adjustment — If Equipped

Push the power bolster adjustment buttons to

ulate the width of the backrest through the

lateral padding.

WARNING!

 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside

or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

 Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a seat belt properly.

1 — Seat Switch (For/Rear/Height Adjustment)

2 — Seatback Switch

3 — Lumbar Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons

(If Equipped)

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause

damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may

become limited if movement is stopped by an

obstruction in the seat's path.

Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped

Lift the adjustment lever and push the front of the

cushion forward or rearward to extend the

cushion by a few inches (centimeters).

Seat Cushion Extension

river Memory Seat

The driver memory seat buttons can store and

rec

all three different driver’s seat positions, as

well as outside power mirror positions. Storing

and recalling can be done with the ignition in the

ACC position, vehicle speed at 0

mph (0 km/h),

d the driver’s side door closed, or for three

minutes after having opened the driver's side

door. An audible chime is heard to confirm a

memory profile is set or recalled. To set a memory

profile, first adjust your seat (and power mirror

position if desired) until you are in the desired

position. Then, push the memory button you want

to assign the set position to for 1.5 seconds.

When a new seat position is memorized, the

previously memorized position on the same

button is automatically overwritten. Recalling a

memorized position can also be done for approx

imately three minutes after the doors are opened

d for approximately one minute after the

engine is stopped. To recall a memorized

position, push the assigned button briefly.

Driver Memory Seat Buttons Location

SPARCO RACING SEATS (QUADRIFOGLIO

EHICLES) — IF EQUIPPED

Forward/Rearward Adjustment

The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat,

ar the floor. Pull the lever upward to move the

seat forward or rearward. Release the lever once

the seat is in the desired position. Using body

pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat

to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Manual Seat Adjustment

Height Adjustment

Push upward on the height adjustment button to

rai

se the seat height, or push downward on the

button to lower the seat height.

6 — Adjustment Lever

5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons

WARNING!

 Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could

result in loss of control which could cause a

collision and serious injury or death.

 Seats should be adjusted before fastening

the seat belts and while the vehicle is

parked. Serious injury or death could result

from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so

that the shoulder belt is no longer resting

against your chest. In a collision you could

slide under the seat belt, which could result

in serious injury or death.

1 — Adjustment Lever

2 — Height Adjustment Button

3 — Recline Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the recline lever

located on the outboard side of the seat, lean

back to the desired position and release the

lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean

forward and release the lever.

HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED

Front Heated Seats

NOTE:

Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco

cing Seats will not be equipped with the

heated seat feature.

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, push

the

driver or passenger heated seat button

located on the instrument panel.

NOTE:

The heated seat function can also be activated

thro

ugh the Information and Entertainment

System. Refer to the Information and Entertain

ment System Owner’s Manual Supplement for

furt

her information.

Heated Seat Buttons

You can select three heating levels:

 Maximum — Three LED indicators illuminated

on the buttons

 Average — Two LED indicators illuminated on

the buttons

 Minimum — One LED indicator illuminated on

the buttons

After selecting a heating level, heat will be felt

thin a few minutes.

A quick push of the heated seat button will select

e heat levels in order of highest to lowest. A fourth

push of the button will turn the heated seat off.

The Minimum setting is automatically deactivated

ce a certain period of time has elapsed. This

varies on a case-by-case basis, in accordance with

the specific operating conditions.

NOTE:

The heated seat function can only be activated

th the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with Remote Start,

the

front heated seats can be programmed to

come on during Remote Start. The feature can be

activated through the radio system. Refer to the

Information and Entertainment System Owner’s

Manual Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

The heated seat function can only be activated

th Remote Start in temperatures below 39°F

(4°C).

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

If equipped with rear heated seats, the controls

n be found on the rear of the center console

and will function the same as the front heated

seat controls.

Rear Heated Seat Buttons

NOTE:

To preserve the battery charge, these functions

nnot be activated when the engine is off.

WARNING!

 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the

skin because of advanced age, chronic

illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,

medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other

physical condition must exercise care when

using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used

for long periods of time.

 Do not place anything on the seat or

seatback that insulates against heat, such

as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that

has been overheated could cause serious

burns due to the increased surface

temperature of the seat.

SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT

The rear seat allows the luggage compartment to

be partially (40/20/40) or totally extended.

Split Folding Rear

Seat

Partial Extension Of The Luggage Compartment

(40/20/40)

Extending the right side of the luggage

mpartment allows you to carry two passengers

on the left part of the rear seat, while extending

the left side allows you to carry one passenger.

Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat head restraints.

. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede

he movement of the backrest while tilting it.

3. Pull the left-hand seat back release lever

(

inside the luggage compartment or the

release at the base of the rear seat acces

sible from the rear doors) to fold down the left

de, or the right-hand seat back release lever

to fold down the right side of the backrest. It

will fold forwards automatically. If necessary,

assist the backrest during the initial stage of

tilting.

Seat Back Release Leve

r In Luggage

Compartment

Full Expansion Of The Luggage Compartment

Tilting the rear seat completely forward allows for

ximum loading volume.

Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat head

straints.

2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede

he movement of the backrest while tilting it.

3. Pull both seat back release levers to fold

own the backrests. They will fold forward

automatically. If necessary, assist the back

rests during the initial stage of tilting.

NOTE:

You may need to move the front seats forward in

ord

er for the rear seats to fold forward

completely.

It is also possible to disengage the sections of the

rea

r seat from inside the luggage compartment or

by using one of the two levers located below the

rear seat. Each lever folds down the section of the

backrest on the same side.

Seat Back Release Leve

r Below Rear Seat

Repositioning The Backrests

Move the seat belts to the side, making sure that

the

y are correctly extended and not twisted. Also

make sure that they are not caught on anything

behind the backrests of the seats. Then, lift the

backrests by pushing them rearward until you

hear the lock click into place on both attachment

mechanisms.

1 — Seat Back Release Lever

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely

locked into position. If the seatback is not

securely locked into position the seat will not

provide the proper stability for child seats

and/or passengers. An improperly latched

seat could cause serious injury.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Central Backrest Section Tilting

Before tilting the backrest, make sure that the

rear center seat belt is not fastened and that

there aren't any objects on the seat itself (if there

are any, remove them).

Pull the release strap upward to release the

ntral part of the backrest from its housing and

tilt it forward using the head restraint.

Center Backrest Section Tilting

entral Backrest Section Repositioning

Using the head restraint, lift the central portion

wards, manually guiding it back into place.

Lightly push to make sure that it is properly

latched. Make sure that the armrest is properly

latched by gently trying to move it. If it is not

latched, repeat the operation.

EASY ENTRY FUNCTION

The Easy Entry function is designed to move the

driver side seat forward automatically by

2.36

inches (60 mm) to make it easier for the

dri

ver to get in and out of the car.

The movement is activated only if the seat is set

a driving position which is in front of the B-pillar

of the vehicle.

The function is associated with power driver

ats for each of the three stored positions.

The Easy Entry function can be activated/

activated through the radio system.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of

injury by restricting head movement in the event

of a rear impact. Head restraints should be

adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is

located above the top of your ear.

FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS

DJUSTMENTS)

NOTE:

For Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco

cing Seats, the head restraints are not adjust

able or removable.

The front head restraints may be

hei

ght-adjustable. To adjust them, operate as

follows:

 Upward adjustment: Pull upward on the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

 Downward adjustment: Push the adjustment

button and lower the head restraint at the

same time.

Front Head Restraint

WARNING!

 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could cause serious

injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head

restraints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled

in the vehicle to properly protect the

occupants. Follow the preceding reinstal

lation instructions prior to operating the

vehi

cle or occupying a seat.

 Do not place items over the top of the

Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat

covers or portable DVD players. These items

may interfere with the operation of the

Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a

collision and could result in serious injury or

death.

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

NOTE:

To allow for maximum visibility for the driver, if a

at is not occupied by a passenger, the head

restraint can be lowered to the fully lowered posi

tion.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS (ADJUSTMENTS)

The height of the outboard head restraints can be

adjusted. The head restraint of the center seat, if

equipped, cannot be adjusted, only removed.

For upward adjustment, pull upward on the head

res

traint until it clicks into place.

For downward adjustment, push in the

justment button and lower the head restraint

at the same time to the desired height.

Rear Head Restraint

NOTE:

To allow for maximum visibility for the driver, if a

at is not occupied by a passenger, the head

restraint should be lowered to the fully lowered

position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (REMOVAL)

To remove the head restraints, proceed as

follows:

1. Recline the seat back to allow clearance of

he head restraint from the vehicle’s roof.

2. Raise the head restraints to their maximum

ight.

3. Push the adjustment button and the release

utton at the side of the two supports at the

same time.

4. Pull upward on the head restraint to fully

move it.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as

fol

lows:

1. Hold down both the adjustment button and

lease button while placing the head

restraint posts into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the

ppropriate height for the passengers.

3. Replace the seat back to the appropriate

osition for passengers.

WARNING!

 All occupants, including the driver, should

not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat

until the head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to minimize the risk

of neck injury in the event of a crash.

 Head restraints should never be adjusted

while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious

injury or death in the event of a collision.

WARNING!

 All occupants, including the driver, should

not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat

until the head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to minimize the risk

of neck injury in the event of a crash.

 Head restraints should never be adjusted

while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious

injury or death in the event of a collision.

1 — Adjustment Button

2 — Release Button

WARNING!

 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could cause serious

injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head

restraints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled

in the vehicle to properly protect the

occupants. Follow the preceding reinstal-

lation instructions prior to operating the

cle or occupying a seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

STEERING WHEEL

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

The steering column is able to be tilted upward or

downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping

lever is located below the steering wheel at the

end of the steering column.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

o Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

own to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-

ion.

3. L

ock the desired position by pushing the Tilt/

elescoping Control Handle to the closed

position.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL —

F EQUIPPED

With the ignition in the ON position, push the

heated steering wheel button on the

instrument panel.

Heated Steer

ng Wheel Button

The indicator on the button will illuminate when

thi

s feature is enabled.

1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

2 — Closed

3 — Open

4 — Tilt Movement

5 — Telescoping Movement

WARNING!

 Do not adjust the steering column while

driving. Adjusting the steering column while

driving or driving with the steering column

unlocked, could cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this

warning may result in serious injury or death.

 Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel (e.g. permanently fixed covers) which

could interfere with the hand detection

sensor on the steering wheel of the Active

Blind Spot Assist (ABSA), Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA), Traffic Jam Assist (TJA), or

Highway Assist systems (HAS) (if equipped).

WARNING!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any

after-market operation involving steering

system or steering column modifications (e.g.

installation of anti-theft device) that could

adversely affect performance. Doing so could

void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, cause

SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING

INJURY, and also result in the vehicle not

meeting type-approval requirements.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with Remote Start,

the heated steering wheel can be programmed to

come on during Remote Start. The feature can be

activated through the radio system. Refer to the

Information and Entertainment System Owner’s

Manual Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

The heated steering wheel function can only be

tivated with Remote Start in temperatures

below 39°F (4°C).

MIRRORS

ELECTROCHROMIC MIRROR

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight

glare from vehicles behind you.

The electrochromic mirror has a power button to

tivate/deactivate the automatic dimming/

anti-glare function.

Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

EXTERIOR POWER MIRRORS

Power Adjustment

The power mirrors can be adjusted with the

nition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

To adjust the power mirrors, first select the

sired mirror by rotating the power mirror

control knob to the left (L) or right (R) position.

To adjust the selected mirror, push the knob in

the

direction desired.

Power Mirror Control

NOTE:

Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to

the

neutral position to prevent accidental move-

ments.

Power Folding

To fold the door mirrors in using the Power

lding Mirror function, make sure the power

mirror control knob is in the neutral position, and

move the knob to the power folding position.

Move the knob again to return the mirrors to the

driving position.

If the power mirror control knob is moved again

ring door mirror folding (from closed to open

position and vice versa), the movement direction

is reversed.

Folding Mirror

WARNING!

 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the

skin because of advanced age, chronic

illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,

medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other

physical conditions must exercise care when

using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures,

especially if used for long periods.

 Do not place anything on the steering wheel

that insulates against heat, such as a

blanket or steering wheel covers of any type

and material. This may cause the steering

wheel heater to overheat.

1 — Power Mirror Control Knob

A — Left

B — Right

C — Power Folding Position

D — Neutral

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Activation

Activating the central door locking system from

outside the vehicle automatically folds the

mirrors. The mirrors return to the driving position

when the vehicle is then unlocked.

If the door mirrors were folded using the power

rror control knob, they can only be returned to

the driving position by moving the knob to the

power folding position again.

NOTE:

The power folding operation can be enabled only

whe

n the vehicle speed is lower than 31

mph

(

0 km/h).

Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped

Like the inside electrochromic mirror, an

tomatic dimming feature is also available on

the outside rear view mirrors to prevent glare. The

automatic dimming button for these mirrors is

the same as the electrochromic mirror.

HEATED MIRRORS

Push the rear defrost button, located within

the climate controls, to activate the heated

rrors.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

The headlight switch is located to the left of the

steering wheel on the instrument panel. This

switch controls the operation of the headlights,

parking lights, instrument panel lights,

instrument panel light dimming, interior lights

and rear fog lights.

In addition, there are buttons for parking sensors

activation and Engine Stop/Start. Refer to

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

Headlight Switch

he instrument panel and the various controls on

the

dashboard will be illuminated when the

exterior lights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS

This system automatically turns the headlights on

or off according to ambient light levels.

Function Activation

Rotate the light switch to the (auto) position.

NOTE:

The function can only operate with the ignition

/RUN.

Function Deactivation

To deactivate the function, rotate the light switch

a position other than the

(auto) position, or

rotate the light switch to the off position and hold

for

a few seconds.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)

With the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position,

and the light switch turned to the

position, if

the dusk sensor detects sufficient external light,

the

Daytime Running Lights will turn on automat

ically while the other lights remain off.

If the turn signals are operated, the brightness of

the

corresponding Daytime Running Lights will be

decreased for as long as the turn signals are on.

If equipped, the DRLs can be activated/

activated from the radio system, by selecting

the following functions in sequence on the main

MENU:

1. Settings

. Lights

. D

aytime Running Lights

NOTE:

The Daytime Running Lights ca

nnot be deacti-

vated in Canadian markets.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside

convex mirror will look smaller and farther

away than they really are. Relying too much on

side convex mirrors could cause you to collide

with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance

of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.

1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation Button

2 — Parking Lights, Daytime Running Lights,

Headlight Switch

3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

4 — Rear Fog Lights Button

5 — Engine Stop/Start Button

REAR FOG LIGHTS

The rear fog light switch is located within the

headlight switch.

Push the button, located in the center of the

headlight switch, to turn the rear fog lights on/off.

The rear fog lights turn on only when the

dlights or parking lights are also turned on.

The lights can be turned off by pushing the

button again or by turning the headlight switch to

the

O (off) position.

When the engine is stopped with the rear fog

ghts on, they will be off the next time the engine

is started.

PARKING LIGHTS

With the ignition in OFF position, rotate the

headlight switch to the

position to turn the

parking lights on. All of the parking lights will turn

for eight minutes, and opening the door

activates an audible warning.

To leave only the lights on one side (right/left)

luminated, you must move the multifunction

lever (located on the left side of the steering

wheel) to the side that you want to remain on.

With the parking lights on, the

indicator light

on the instrument panel will illuminate.

HEADLIGHT OFF DELAY

The Headlight Off Delay function delays the

turning off of the headlights after the vehicle’s

engine has been stopped.

The function can be activated from the radio

stem by selecting the following functions in

sequence on the main menu:

1. Settings

. L

ights

. Headlight Off Delay

he side lights and the headlights stay on for a

me that can be set between 0, 30, 60, and

90 seconds.

Function Activation

With the headlights on, place the ignition in OFF

sition and the timer will start.

NOTE:

To activate this function, the headlights must be

activated within two minutes after the ignition

has been placed in the OFF position.

Function Deactivation

This function is deactivated by turning on the

dlights, the side lights, or by placing the

ignition in the ON/RUN mode.

ADAPTIVE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM (AFS) —

F EQUIPPED

This is a system combined with Xenon headlights

(Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp, if equipped) which

directs the headlights horizontally, and contin

uously and automatically adapts them to the

dri

ving conditions around bends or when

cornering.

The system directs the headlights to light up the

roa

d in the best way, taking into account the

speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner

angle, as well as the speed at which the steering

wheel is turned.

The adaptive lights are automatically activated

whe

n the vehicle is started.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS

To activate the fixed high beam headlights, push

the multifunction lever, located on the left side of

the steering wheel, towards the instrument panel.

The headlight switch must first be turned to the

(auto) or (on) position.

With high beam headlights on, the High Beam

Indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate.

Multif

unction Lever

he high beam headlights are turned off by

pulling the multifunction lever rearward to its

original position. The indicator light/icon

will

turn off in the instrument panel when the high

ams are turned off.

Flashing The Headlights

Pulling the multifunction lever toward the

eering wheel will activate the high beam

headlights manually. The lights will remain on as

long as the lever is held. Once the lever is

released, the lights will resume the previous

setting.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic High Beam Headlights — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlights system

provides increased forward lighting at night by

automating high beam control through the use of

a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This

camera detects vehicle specific light and automat

ically turns from high beams to low beams until the

proaching vehicle is out of view.

This function can be enabled in the radio system

selecting “Settings”, “Lights”, and then turning

“Automatic High Beam” to ON. It is then activated

by rotating the headlight switch to the

(auto)

position and pushing the multifunction lever

ward the instrument panel.

While the high beam headlights are on, the blue

on/indicator light will illuminate in the

instrument panel.

NOTE:

The “On” selection within the radio system is

ved if the ignition is placed in the OFF position,

and then back into ON.

When the speed is higher than 25 mph (40 km/h)

d the function is active, the lights will turn off if

the multifunction lever is pushed again.

When the speed is lower than 15 mph (25 km/h)

d the function is active, the feature will turn the

high beam headlights off.

If the high beam headlights are operated again

ushing the multifunction lever towards the

instrument panel), the indicator light/icon

will

illuminate in the instrument panel, and the main

am headlights only will be on until the speed

exceeds 25

mph (40 km/h).

When the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) is

ceeded again, the automatic functioning is

reactivated.

If the multifunction lever is pushed again with the

tomatic High Beam Headlights activated, the

function deactivates.

This feature can also be deactivated by rotating

the

headlight switch to the

position.

NOTE:

 If the system recognizes heavy traffic areas,

the automatic functions remain disabled

independently of the vehicle’s speed.

 The Automatic High Beam functionality may

also be influenced by:

• Reflections on road signs

• D

im headlights from oncoming traffic

• P

oor

weather conditions

• P

resence of dirt or other obstructions on

he sensor

• Damage to the

windshield

TURN SIGNALS

To activate the turn signals, move the

multifunction lever, located on the left side of the

steering wheel, up or down until it reaches the

detent. Moving the lever upward flashes the right

turn signal and moving the lever downward will

flash the left turn signal.

The or turn signal will blink on the

instrument panel.

The turn signals turn off automatically when the

cle is brought back onto a straight course.

Lane Change Function

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving

yond the detent, and the turn signal (right or

left) will flash five times. Then, the turn signal

(right or left) will automatically turn off.

To turn off the flashing before the end of the

cle, move the lever in the opposite direction

until the first click (about half way).

INTERIOR LIGHTS

FRONT MAP READING LIGHTS

The front map/reading and overhead lights are

mounted in the overhead console. Each light can

be turned on by pushing the corresponding

switch on the console. These switches are backlit

for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push

the switch a second time.

Overhead Console

1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch

2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch

3 — Overhead Lights Switch

4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When Doors Open

5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light Switch

6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light

7 — Center Reading/Map Light

8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light

NOTE:

Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that the over-

head lights are off. This will prevent the battery

fro

discharging once the doors are closed. If a

light is left on accidentally, the overhead lights

will turn off automatically approximately

minutes after the ignition has been placed in

the

OFF position.

Overhead Light Timing

On certain models, to assist getting in and out of

the

vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, two

timed modes have been provided.

Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle —

The

overhead lights turn on according to the following

modes:

 Will illuminate for a few seconds when the

doors are unlocked.

 Will illuminate for approximately three minutes

when one of the doors is opened.

 Will illuminate for a few seconds when the

doors are locked.

Timing is interrupted when the ignition is placed

the ON/RUN position.

Three Modes Are Available For Turning Off

Ove

rhead Lighting:

 When all doors are closed after entering the

vehicle, the three-minute timer will stop and a

seconds timer will start for the interior lights.

This timing will stop when the ignition is placed

in the ON/RUN position.

 When doors are locked (either with key fob or

with key inserted on driver side door), the

overhead light turns off.

 The interior lights will turn off after 15 minutes

to preserve the battery.

Timing While Getting Out Of The Vehicle —

After

placing the ignition in the OFF position, the

overhead lights will turn on as follows:

 For a few seconds after the engine stops.

 For approximately three minutes when one of

the doors is opened.

 For a few seconds when the last door is closed.

The timing stops automatically when the doors

are

locked.

Vanity Mirror Lights — If Equipped

On the driver and passenger sun visor, there is a

ght that illuminates the sun visor mirror when

the sun visor is folded down and the mirror cover

is lifted.

Lift For Sun Visor Mirror

he courtesy light turns on automatically by lifting

the

cover.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

This light turns on automatically when the glove

compartment is opened and turns off when it is

closed.

The light turns on and off regardless of the

nition status.

Glove Compartment Light

INTERIOR AMBIENT LIGHTING

The brightness of the interior passenger

compartment lights can be adjusted through the

radio system.

To access the adjustment function, on the main

nu select the following items in sequence:

1. Settings

. Lights

. Interior Ambient Lighting

he lights can be adjusted to seven different

vels of brightness.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LIGHTS

This vehicle is equipped with courtesy door lights

that illuminate the entry for the driver or

passenger when the door is opened, and turns off

when it is closed.

The light turns on and off regardless of the

nition status.

Courtesy Door Light

n vehicles equipped with a Passive Entry

stem, another light can be found under each

exterior door handle.

Exterior Door Handle Light

REAR OVERHEAD LIGHT

The rear overhead lights are activated or

deactivated by on/off switches located on the

front overhead console or within the rear

overhead lights themselves.

Rear Overhead Light

he light turns on when a door is opened.

NOTE:

The light will turn off automatically after a few

nutes if a door is left open. To turn it on again,

open another door or close and reopen the same

door.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COURTESY

IGHTS

The luggage compartment features two courtesy

lights.

These courtesy lights turn on automatically when

the

liftgate is opened and turn off when it is

closed.

Luggage Compart

ment Courtesy Lights

The courtesy lights will turn on and off regardless

the ignition position.

NOTE:

If the liftgate is left open, the lights will automati-

cally turn off after 15 minutes to prevent

scharging of the battery.

1 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light

2 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light

3 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light Switch

4 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light Switch

INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

With the daytime running lights or headlights on,

push and hold the dimmer control upward to

increase the instrument panel brightness and the

control button icons. Push and hold the dimmer

control downward to decrease brightness.

Release the dimmer control when the desired

brightness is reached.

Dimmer Control

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

WINDSHIELD WIPER STALK

The windshield wiper stalk is located on the right

side of the steering wheel.

The windshield wipers will only operate with the

nition is placed in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHERS

Windshield Wiper Stalk

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotating the switch to the Low Continuous Wiper

eed position (2) activates the first (low) level

continuous speed of the windshield wipers in

manual mode.

Rotating the switch to the High Continuous Wiper

eed position (1) activates the second (high)

level continuous speed of the windshield wipers

in manual mode.

CAUTION!

 Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to

the windshield wipers may result if the wiper

control is left in any position other than off.

 In cold weather, always turn off the wiper

switch and allow the wipers to return to the

“park” position before turning off the engine.

If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers

freeze to the windshield, damage to the

wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is

restarted.

 Always remove any buildup of snow that

prevents the windshield wiper blades from

returning to the off position. If the windshield

wiper control is turned off and the blades

cannot return to the off position, damage to

the wiper motor may occur.

1 — High Continuous Wiper Speed

2 — Low Continuous Wiper Speed

3 — High Sensitivity Rain Sensing

4 — Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing

5 — Windshield Wiper Off

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rain Sensors

Rotating the switch to the Low Sensitivity Rain

Sensing position (4), activates the first, less

sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function.

Rotating the switch to the High Sensitivity Rain

nsing position (3), activates the second, more

sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer

to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more

information on how this system functions.

Windshield Washer Operation

Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel to

erate the windshield washer.

Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the

ndshield washer jet and the windshield wiper

with a single movement. The wipers and washers

will continue to operate until stalk is released.

The windshield wiper stops working three strokes

aft

er the stalk is released, followed by a final

stroke six seconds later to complete the cycle.

Mist

Use this feature when weather conditions make

casional usage of the wipers necessary. Push

the stalk upward to the MIST position and release

for a single wiping cycle. This function is useful to

remove small deposits of dust from the

windshield or morning dew.

NOTE:

This function does not activate the windshield

sher. To spray windshield washer fluid onto

the windshield, the washing function must be

used.

RAIN SENSOR

The Rain Sensor is located behind the interior

rear view mirror. This feature senses moisture on

the windshield and automatically activates the

wipers for the driver.

Rain Sensor

The feature is especially useful for road splash or

ove

r spray from the windshield washers of the

vehicle ahead.

The sensor has an adjustment range that varies

pro

gressively from wiper still (no stroke) when the

windshield is dry, to wiper at continuous speed

(fast operation) with intense rain.

Activation

Rotating the wiper switch to the Low Sensitivity

in Sensing position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain

Sensing position (3) activates the rain sensor.

The activation of the rain sensor system is done

tapping the wiper stalk upwards while the

switch is in the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing

position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing

position (3).

The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor

eration is also signaled by a stroke of the wiper

(command acquired and implemented). This

stroke is also executed with the windshield dry.

If the windshield washer is used with the rain

nsor activated, the normal washing cycle is

performed, after which the rain sensor resumes

its normal automatic operation.

NOTE:

Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the

windshield could lead to a collision. You might

not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To

avoid sudden icing of the windshield during

freezing weather, warm the windshield with

the defroster before and during windshield

washer use.

Deactivation

Use the wiper switch or place the ignition in the

OFF position.

In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor

whi

le it is active, the windshield wiper operates

intermittently at a speed consistent with the

sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, whether or

not there is rain on the glass for as long as the

sensor failure is indicated on the display.

The sensor continues to operate and it is possible

set the windshield wiper to continuous mode (1

or 2). The failure indication remains on for as long

as the sensor is active.

The rain sensor is able to recognize and automat-

ically adjust itself in the presence of the following

nditions:

 Presence of dirt on the controlled surface (e.g.

salt, dirt, etc.).

 Presence of streaks of water caused by the

worn window wiper blades.

 Difference between day and night.

REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with the

windshield wiper operating, activates a single

cycle of the rear window wiper.

Activation of the rear window wiper/washer can

done by moving the stalk to one of the

following positions:

 Pushing the stalk towards the instrument

panel activates the rear window washer (a

brief push activates one washing cycle,

keeping the stalk pushed washes continuously

until the stalk is released).

 Pushing the stalk downward activates/

deactivates continuous rear wiper operation.

HEADLAMP WASHERS —

IF EQUIPPED

The windshield wiper stalk operates the headlight

washers when the ignition is in the ON position

and the headlights are turned on. The windshield

wiper stalk is located on the right side of the

steering column. To use the headlight washers,

pull the stalk toward you and release it. The

headlight washers will spray a timed

high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each

headlight lens. In addition, the windshield

washers will spray the windshield and the

windshield wipers will cycle.

NOTE:

The headlight washers work on every tenth wash

cycle request.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CLIMATE CONTROL

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR VENTS

Side Air Vents

 To adjust the position of the Side Air Vents,

move the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) in any

direction.

 Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) to adjust

the air flow. Rotating the Side Air Vent Adjuster

(2) clockwise will close the vent. Rotating it

counterclockwise will open the vent.

Side Air Vents

entral Air Vents

 To adjust the position of the Central Air Vents,

move the Central Air Vent Adjuster (2) up or

down.

 Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster (4)

to adjust the air flow. Rotating Central Air Vent

Air Flow Adjuster (4) up will open the vents,

allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it down

will close the vents.

Central Air Vents

ear Air Vents

 To adjust the position of the Rear Air Vents,

move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) in any

direction.

 Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) to adjust

the air flow. Rotating the Rear Air Vent Adjuster

(2) clockwise will close the vent. Rotating it

counterclockwise will open the vent.

Rear Air Vents

— Fixed Side Air Vents

2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents

2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster

3 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

4 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster

1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents

2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster

AUTOMATIC DUAL-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

Controls

Automatic Climate Control System

1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob

2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation) 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selection Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — If Equipped

4 — Max Defrost Button 12 — Air Conditioning Button

5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — If Equipped

6 — Rear Defrost Button 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button — If Equipped

7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Selection Button 15 — Air Recirculation Button

8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Control System (Touchscreen Controls)

1 — Driver Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 8 — Heated Rear Window On/Off Button

2 — Driver Side Air Distribution Buttons 9 — MAX-DEF Activation/Deactivation Button (Rapid Defrosting/Demisting)

3 — Fan Speed Adjustment Button 10 — Air Recirculation On/Off Button

4 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Buttons 11 — Climate Control System Compressor On/Off Button

5 — Passenger Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 12 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

6 — SYNC Button 13 — Climate Control System On/Off Button

7 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

DESCRIPTION

The Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control system

adjusts the temperature and air distribution

independently between the driver and passenger.

The system maintains the set temperature inside

the

passenger compartment and compensates

for outside temperature change.

NOTE:

The reference temperature is 72°F (22°C) for

timal comfort management.

The automatic setting will adjust the following to

intain comfort within the passenger

compartment:

 Air temperature from the driver/front

passenger side vents

 Air distribution from the driver/front passenger

side vents

 Fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow)

 Compressor variations (for cooling/dehumid-

ifying the air)

 Air recirculation

The Climate Control system can also be operated

nually by using the buttons and knobs on the

faceplate.

Manual selections will override the automatic

ttings, which are stored until the AUTO button is

pushed. If the system intervenes for safety

reasons, the automatic setting will take control of

the system.

The following operations will not deactivate the

tomatic (AUTO) function:

 Air Recirculation activation/deactivation

 A/C activation/deactivation

 SYNC function activation

 Rear Window Defrost activation/deactivation

When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s internal

mperature is controlled according to the set

temperature.

The following can be manually set or adjusted:

 Driver/passenger air temperature

 Blower speed (continuous variation)

 Air distribution (seven positions for driver and

passenger)

 A/C activation

 Front Defroster

 Air recirculation

 Rear Defroster

 System deactivation

OPERATING MODE

The Climate Control system can be activated in

different ways. It is recommended to use the

automatic function. Push the AUTO button and

set the desired temperatures.

The automatic system adjusts the temperature,

antity, and distribution of air introduced into

the passenger compartment. It also controls air

recirculation and the activation of the air

conditioner.

At any time during automatic operation, you can

cha

nge the temperature, activate or deactivate

the Rear Defroster, activate SYNC, activate or

deactivate the air conditioner, and activate or

deactivate air recirculation. The system will

automatically adjust to the new settings.

CLIMATE CONTROL DISPLAY SETTINGS

The Climate Control settings are visible on the

radio system radio screen.

The display on the radio system is a pop up

ndow, which is activated by pushing the

buttons or turning the knobs on the Climate

Control system. The indicator lights located on

the buttons and knobs indicate that the selected

feature is on/off. If no operation is performed for

a predetermined time, the pop-up will close on

the display.

CAUTION!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which

does not pollute the environment in the event

of accidental leakage. Under no

circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids,

which are incompatible with the components

of this system.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

AIR TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

Rotate the driver or passenger Temperature

Adjustment Knob clockwise for warmer

temperatures or counterclockwise for cooler

temperatures. The set temperatures are shown

on the radio system.

Push the SYNC button to sync the driver and

ssenger air temperatures.

Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjustment

ob to cancel the SYNC function. This will set a

new passenger side temperature.

Rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob fully

ockwise to engage the HI (maximum heating)

setting or fully counterclockwise to engage the LO

(maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate these

functions, rotate the Temperature Adjustment

Knob to the desired temperature.

Rear passengers’ temperature is linked to driver

de selection.

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION

Push the Air Distribution Selection button on the

faceplate to change the mode of air distribution.

Air flow to the windshield and front side

window vents to demist/defrost them.

Air flow at the central and side

dashboard vents to ventilate the chest

d face.

Air flow to the front and rear floor vents.

This setting heats the passenger

mpartment the quickest.

Air flow distributed between floor vents

(hotter air) and the central and side

shboard vents (cooler air). This air

distribution setting is useful on sunny days during

spring and autumn.

Air flow distributed between floor

vents, windshield, and front side

ndow defrosting/demisting vents.

This distribution setting allows the

passenger compartment to warm up without

fogging up the windows.

Air flow distribution between

windshield demisting/defrosting vents

d side/central dashboard vents.

This setting allows air to flow to the

windshield on sunny days.

Air flow distribution to all vents.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls

tomatically manage the air distri-

bution. When set manually, the

pective symbols on the radio system indicate

the air distribution setting.

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase or

decrease the blower speed. The speed is

displayed with lighted indicators in the radio

system display.

 Maximum fan speed = all indicators

illuminated on the radio system display

 Minimum fan speed = one indicator

illuminated on the radio system display

The fan can be turned off by rotating the Blower

eed Knob clockwise to position O (all segments

on the radio system display are turned off).

NOTE:

To restore automatic control of the fan speed,

sh the AUTO button.

AUTO BUTTON

When the AUTO button is pushed (indicator

illuminated), the Climate Control system

automatically adjusts the following settings:

 Quantity and distribution of air flow in the

passenger compartment

 The air conditioner

 Air recirculation

 Cancels any manual settings

Selecting the AUTO function illuminates the

dicator on the A/C button.

If air distribution or the fan speed is manually

justed, the AUTO button indicator will turn off to

indicate that the Climate Control system is no

longer in AUTO mode.

After a manual adjustment, push the AUTO

tton to resume the automatic system.

SYNC BUTTON

Push the SYNC button (indicator illuminated) to

sync the passenger side air temperature with the

driver side air temperature.

This function makes temperature regulation

sier when the driver is traveling alone.

Turn the passenger Temperature Adjustment

ob or push the passenger side Air Distribution

Selection Button to change the passenger side

air temperature and return to separate air

temperature management.

AIR RECIRCULATION AND AIR QUALITY

YSTEM (AQS)

Air Recirculation is managed according to the

following operating mode:

 Automatic engagement: indicator is

illuminated above the “A” on the Air Recircu

lation Button

 Forced activation (air circulation always

activated): indicator illuminated above the

icon on the Air Recirculation Button

 Forced deactivation (air recirculation always

off with intake of outside air): both indicators

not illuminated on the Air Recirculation Button

The three operating conditions are obtained by

pus

hing the Air Recirculation Button

sequence.

Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function —

If E

quipped

When the automatic recirculation function is

sel

ected, the AQS function automatically activates

internal air recirculation when the outside air is

polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).

At low external temperatures or in high humidity,

the

automatic function turns off to avoid fogging

up the windows. The user can select the function

again by pushing the Air Recirculation Button.

In automatic operation, air recirculation will be

con

trolled by the system according to outside

environmental conditions.

NOTE:

 With the AQS function active and after the

internal air recirculation system has been

functioning for a set amount of time, the

Climate Control System enables air intake to

cycle the air in the passenger compartment for

a set time. The AQS function is disabled during

the air changes.

 The engagement of the recirculation system

makes it possible to reach the required heating

or cooling conditions faster. It is, however,

inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it

can increase the possibility of the windows

fogging. When the outside temperature is low,

recirculation is forced off to prevent the

windows from fogging up.

A/C COMPRESSOR

Push the A/C button or the icon to activate or

deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator

illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor

will remain off even after the engine has stopped.

When the A/C compressor is turned off, the

sys

tem deactivates air recirculation to prevent

the windows from fogging up. If the climate

control system can maintain the temperature,

with the A/C turned off, the AUTO feature will

remain on and the AUTO button indicator light will

not switch off.

To restore automatic control of the A/C compressor,

pus

h the A/C button or the icon or the AUTO button.

With the A/C compressor off, the air speed can be

set manually using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob.

When the A/C compressor is on, and the engine

running, air speed cannot be lower than the

minimum speed (only one indicator light is lit).

NOTE:

When the A/C is off, the Climate Control system

can

not produce air that is colder than the current

outside temperature. Under certain environ

mental conditions, windows could fog up rapidly

sin

ce the air is not dehumidified.

FRONT DEFROSTER AND MAX-DEF

UNCTION

Push the MAX-DEF button (indicator

illuminated) to defrost the windshield and side

win

dows.

While in MAX-DEF function, the air conditioner

wil

 Activate the air conditioner compressor when

the weather allows

 Turn air recirculation off

 Set the maximum air temperature (HI) on both

the driver and passenger side

 Activate a blower speed based on the

temperature of the engine coolant

 Adjust the air flow towards the windshield and

front side windows

 Activate the Rear Window Defroster

 Display the fan speed (indicators illuminated)

and current air distribution setting

NOTE:

The MAX-DEF function remains active for approx-

imately three minutes once the engine coolant

hes the proper temperature.

When the function is on, AUTO mode will

dea

ctivate. The only manual operations possible

are adjusting blower speed and turning off the

Rear Window Defroster.

Pushing the button switches off the MAX-DEF

function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

REAR DEFROSTER

Push the Rear Defroster button to activate

(indicators illuminated) the Rear Defroster.

The Rear Defroster will turn off after 20 minutes

once the engine is turned off. To reactive the

Rear Defroster, push the Rear Defroster

button.

NOTE:

To avoid damage, do not apply stickers over the

terior heating filaments of the Rear Defroster.

HUMIDITY SENSOR

The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the

windows from fogging up. The AUTO function

(indicator illuminated) must be on for the

Humidity Sensor to function.

When outside temperature is low, the system

y turn the compressor on and turn air recircu-

lation off for safer driving.

SWITCHING OFF/ON THE CLIMATE

ONTROL SYSTEM

Switching Off The Climate Control System

Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob

mpletely counterclockwise to turn off the

Climate Control system.

With the air conditioner off:

 Air recirculation is on

 The A/C compressor is off

 The fan is off

 The heated rear window can be activated/

deactivated

NOTE:

The Climate Control system stores the previously

t temperatures and resumes operation when

any button on the system is pushed.

Switching On The Climate Control System

To switch the Climate Control system on in

tomatic mode, push the AUTO button.

STOP/START

The Stop/Start system shuts off the engine when

the vehicle speed is 0

mph (0 km/h), as a fuel

nservation measure.

In order to maintain comfort in the cabin, the

op/Start feature will not activate if any of the

following conditions exist:

 The Climate Control system is in AUTO mode

(indicator illuminated), and the vehicle has yet

to reach the set temperature

 The Climate Control system is in LO maximum

cooling

 The Climate Control system is in HI maximum

heating

 The Climate Control system is in the MAX-DEF

status

When the Stop/Start system is active, the engine

ll restart if the inside temperature changes

significantly, or if the LO setting, or MAX-DEF

setting, is activated.

With Stop/Start system on (engine is OFF), air

flo

w is reduced to keep the compartment comfort

conditions for longer.

Until the temperature drastically changes within

the

cabin, the climate control system will

continue to maintain the temperature while the

engine is off. By deactivating the Stop/Start

system with the

button (located by the

headlight switch), the climate control system

erates normally according to the settings.

NOTE:

 In harsh climate conditions, limit the use of the

Stop/Start system to prevent the compressor

from continuously switching on and off. This

will cause rapid misting of the windows and the

accumulation of humidity in the passenger

compartment.

 When the Stop/Start system is on, the climate

control system will always take air in from

outside, reducing the probability of the

windows fogging up.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

In winter, the Climate Control system must be

turned on at least once a month for approxi-

mately ten minutes.

Have the system inspected at an authorized

aler before the summer.

POWER WINDOWS

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

The power window switches work with the ignition

in the ACC or ON/RUN position and for three

minutes after the ignition has been placed in the

OFF position. When one of the front doors is

opened, this operation is disabled.

Driver Side Front Door Controls

The switches are located on the door panel trim.

All windows can be controlled from the driver side

door panel.

Power Window Switches

ndow Opening

Push the buttons to open the desired window.

Each button has two position steps. Push gently

(

thout going past the detent) for manual

window operation, while pushing the same button

harder (past the detent) activates Continuous

Automatic operation.

If the button is pushed again, the window will stop

the desired position.

Window Closing

Pull the window switch to the first detent to move

window upward. Pull the window switch to the

second detent, and the window will go up automat

ically.

To stop the window during auto-up operation,

pus

h the window switch.

Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door Controls

There are single window controls on the

pas

senger and rear door trim panels which

operate the door windows.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection -

If Equipped

The vehicle may be equipped with an anti-pinch

afe

ty device for closing the windows.

If the safety system senses any obstacle while the

win

dow is closing, it will stop the window’s

movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

This device is also useful if the windows are

act

ivated accidentally by children on board the

vehicle.

The anti-pinch safety function is activated both

duri

ng the manual and the automatic operation

of the window.

When the anti-pinch system is activated, the

win

dow closing is immediately interrupted. Then

the window closing is automatically reversed and

the window lowers by about 8

inches (20 cm) in

rela

tion to the first stop position. The window

cannot be operated during this time.

NOTE:

In the event of an error, or if the anti-pinch protec-

tion is activated three consecutive times, the

aut

omatic closing operation of the window will be

deactivated. In order to restore the correct opera

tion of the system, the window must be lowered.

Power Window System Initialization

If power supply is interrupted, the electric window

aut

omatic operation must be re-initialized.

To perform the initialization procedure, which

mus

t be done on each door with the doors closed,

manually fully close the window to be initialized.

POWER SUNROOF —

IF EQUIPPED

POWER SUNROOF

The power sunroof consists of a single glass

panel and is fitted with a power sunshade the full

length of the panel.

Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the

ign

ition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Refer to

“Ignition System” in this chapter for further

information.

The sunroof has three preset positions:

 Fully closed.

 Comfort (intermediate opening).

 Fully open.

1 — Front Left Window Switch

2 — Front Right Window Switch

3 — Rear Right Window Switch

4 — Window Lockout Switch

5 — Rear Left Window Switch

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,

and do not let children play with power windows.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children. Occupants,

particularly unattended children, can become

entrapped by the windows while operating the

power window switches. Such entrapment may

result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

You cannot have the sunshade closed when the

nroof is open.

OPENING

To open the sunroof’s front panel, push the

open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle

to open to the comfort position (half way).

Pushing the button a second time will open to the

fully open position.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any

sition by pushing the open/close button again.

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

CLOSING

From the complete open position, push the open/

close button toward the front of the vehicle. The

sunroof will close completely.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any

sition by pushing the open/close button again.

VENT OPENING

To bring the roof into vent position, push and

release the vent button.

This type of vent opening can be activated

reg

ardless of the position of the sunroof. When

starting with the roof in the closed position,

pushing the vent button automatically causes the

sunroof to open to the vent position. If the roof is

already open, the button must be held until the

roof reaches the vent-opening position.

Pushing the vent button again during automatic

vement of the roof will stop it.

POWER SUN SHADE

The sunshade is power operated.

Push the Power Shade open/close button toward

rear of the vehicle to open the sun shade.

Push the Power Shade open/close button toward

the

front of the vehicle to close the sun shade.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any

sition by pushing the Power Shade on/off

button again.

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system

capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle

during the closing movement. If an obstacle is

detected, the system intervenes and the

movement of the sunroof is immediately

reversed.

RE-INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

Automatic operation of the sunroof must be

re-initialized in case of faulty sunroof operation. It

may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof

after the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected

and then reconnected.

NOTE:

The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during

the

re-initialization procedure.

WARNING!

 Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never

leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in

a location accessible to children. Do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Occupants, particularly unattended children,

can become entrapped by the power sunroof

while operating the power sunroof switch.

Such entrapment may result in serious injury

or death.

 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.

You could also be seriously injured or killed.

Always fasten your seat belt properly and

make sure all passengers are also properly

secured.

 Do not allow small children to operate the

sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body

parts, or any object, to project through the

sunroof opening. Injury may result.

1 — Power Shade Open/Close

2 — Sunroof Open/Close Button

3 — Vent Open/Close

CAUTION!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or

crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun roof

if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it.

Proceed as follows:

1. With the ignition in the ON/RUN position,

make sure the sunroof glass is fully closed

(sunshade open).

2. Open the driver’s side door, and place the

gnition in the OFF position.

3. Within five seconds, place the ignition in the

CC or ON/RUN position.

4. Within 10 seconds, push and hold the

unroof close switch (forward). After

8 - 10 seconds of holding the switch, the

re-

initialization process will begin. Continue

to hold the switch while the sunroof motor

cycles, and the sunshade will fully close.

5. Once the sunroof glass and the power

unshade have stopped motion, release the

sunroof close switch, then push and hold it

again within five seconds. Continue to hold

the switch while the sunshade fully opens,

the sunroof glass fully opens, followed by the

glass fully closing then the sunshade fully

closing.

6. Release the switch once all of the operations

tops. Re-initialization of the sunroof motors

is now complete.

NOTE:

If the switch is released prior to full completion of

the

operations described, the entire re-initializa-

tion procedure must be repeated from step 1.

7. C

onfirm express operations for the sunroof

lass and sunshade is functional for opening

and closing operations.

HOOD

OPENING THE HOOD

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on the driver’s

ide kick panel.

Hood Release Leve

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and posi-

ion yourself in front of the grille.

3. L

ift the hood slightly.

. Move the under-hood latch from right to left

o release the hood.

Hood Latch Location

. Raise the hood completely. The operation is

ssisted by the addition of two gas props

which hold it in the open position.

NOTE:

 Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting,

check that the windshield wiper arms are not

raised from the windshield or in operation.

Also, ensure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the electric park brake is engaged.

 Do not tamper with the props.

 Assist the hood while lifting it.

CLOSING THE HOOD

To close, lower the hood to approximately

inches (40 cm) from the engine compartment

n let it drop. Make sure that the hood is

completely closed and fully latched. Do this by

trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not

try to push the hood lid down, but open it and

repeat the procedure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Always check that the hood is closed correctly to

preve

nt it from opening while the vehicle is trav-

eling. Since the hood is equipped with a double

king system, one for each side, you must

check that it is closed on each side.

POWER LIFTGATE

Unlocking of the liftgate is electrically operated

and is deactivated when the vehicle is in motion.

If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is

clo

sing or opening, the liftgate will automatically

reverse to the closed or open position, provided it

meets sufficient resistance.

The liftgate height is adjustable to avoid

diffi

culties in tight spaces. To customize the

liftgate opening position, proceed as follows:

1. Open the liftgate.

nually move the liftgate to the desired

sition.

3. Push one of the closing buttons for at least

five

seconds (successful programming is indi

cated by the turn signals flashing three

tim

es).

The liftgate is now programmed to open to the set

pos

ition.

This function can be selected on the radio

sys

tem.

To set the liftgate opening height, refer to the

Info

rmation and Entertainment System Owner’s

Manual Supplement for further information.

OPENING

Opening From The Outside

When unlocked, the liftgate can be opened from

out

side the vehicle by pushing the external

liftgate release switch. Push the switch until you

hear a “click.”

The liftgate can also be opened by quickly

pus

hing the liftgate release button on the key fob

twice.

External Liftgate Release Switch

The

turn signal indicators will blink and the

int

erior lights will turn on when the liftgate is

opened. They turn off automatically when the

liftgate is closed.

The lights turn off automatically after a few

min

utes if the liftgate is left open.

Opening From The Inside

When the liftgate is locked, it can be opened from

ins

ide the vehicle by lifting the interior liftgate

release button on the driver’s door panel trim.

NOTE:

A signal will chime while the liftgate is opening or

clo

sing.

You can stop the liftgate from moving by pushing

the

interior liftgate release button again.

Interior Liftgate Release

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving

your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it

could open when the vehicle is in motion and

block your vision. Failure to follow this warning

could result in serious injury or death.

1 — Interior Liftgate Release Switch

Liftgate Emergency Opening

There is a panel on the luggage compartment

interior trim, next to the liftgate lock, accessible

by folding down the rear seat backrest, which

allows access to the manual lock release.

Manual Lock Release Location

Pull to release the lock.

Manual Lock Release Cord

The

liftgate can now be opened manually.

CLOSING

Closing From Outside

It is possible to close the liftgate by pushing:

 The power liftgate switch.

 The power lock switch located on the liftgate

(all the doors, including the liftgate, will be

locked).

 The liftgate button on the key fob twice.

 The Passive Entry liftgate switch on the liftgate.

Power Liftgate/Lock Switches

NOTE:

It is possible to stop the liftgate from moving with

any

of the Power Liftgate switches.

Closing From Inside

Push the power liftgate switch on the driver’s door

el trim and hold until the operation is

complete.

NOTE:

It is possible to stop the liftgate from moving by

rele

asing the switch.

Customizing The Liftgate Opening Height

To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you can set

the height at which the liftgate opens to.

To customize the liftgate opening position, refer

the following steps:

1. Open the liftgate manually and move it to the

sition that you want the liftgate to open to.

2. Press and hold one of the closing buttons for

least five seconds (successful acquisition

is indicated by the turn signals flashing three

times).

The liftgate is now programmed to open to the set

pos

ition.

Hands Free Liftgate — If Equipped

To operate the Hands Free Liftgate System:

1. If the doors are locked, the system must

tect the electronic key near the liftgate.

2. If the doors are unlocked, the system does

t have to detect the electronic key near the

liftgate.

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle, in the center and

out 3 feet (1

m) from the liftgate.

1 — Power Liftgate Switch

2 — Power Door Lock Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Move your foot under the bumper, simulating

a kick. When you have completed this move

ment, withdraw your leg. To activate the lift-

gate, both sensors must detect your leg.

Hands Fr

ee Liftgate Activation Zone

it is closed, the Hands Free Liftgate unlocks and

opens completely, and with another movement of

the foot, it stops. A further movement of the foot

reverses the direction and closes the liftgate

completely, if you do not stop it again.

If it is open, with a movement of the foot, the

Han

ds Free Liftgate closes completely, and with

another movement of the foot, it stops. If the

liftgate is stopped, another movement of the foot

will reverse the direction and open it completely.

NOTE:

To conserve the battery charge, avoid performing

this

operation repeatedly with the engine off.

You can activate/deactivate the Hands Free

Lift

gate on the radio system by pushing the MENU

button to select the Main menu, and selecting the

following items:

1. Settings

oors And Locks

Automatic Liftgate Opening

LIFTGATE INITIALIZATION

NOTE:

Automatic operation of the liftgate must be initial-

ized again in case of faulty liftgate operation.

roc

eed as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the liftgate.

ush the lock button on the key fob.

Push the unlock button on the key fob.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

The Retractable Cargo Area Cover can be rolled

and removed.

To Use The Cargo Area Cover:

1. From the rolled up (retracted) position, hold

the

handle and pull the cover outward toward

the rear of the vehicle.

2. Then assist the cover pins into the slots

cated just inside the liftgate opening.

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

WARNING!

 Driving with the liftgate open can allow

poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.

You and your passengers could be injured by

these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when

you are operating the vehicle.

 If you are required to drive with the liftgate

open, make sure that all windows are closed,

and the climate control blower switch is set

at high speed. Do not use the recirculation

mode.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or

cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate

travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is

closed and latched before driving away.

CAUTION!

The Hands-Free Liftgate can be turned off

manually in the radio system to avoid uninten

tional activation. For further information refer

the Information and Entertainment System

Owner’s Manual Supplement.

1 — Handle

2 — Cover Pins

Removing The Cover:

1. Retract the cover by pulling the handle

slightly rearward to release the cover pins.

2. Guide the cover forward until it is fully

ret

racted.

3. Pull the two cover hooks (one on each side)

wards the inside of the cargo area. Then lift

the cover up and remove it.

Cover Attached

Access The Tire Service Kit — If Equipped

To access the Tire Service Kit (refer to “Tire

ervi

ce Kit — If Equipped” in "In Case Of

Emergency"), proceed as follows:

 Lift up the load floor by the handle.

Load Floor

Cargo Area Anchors

The cargo area floor may be equipped with fixed

or m

obile anchoring loops that allow you to

anchor and secure luggage safely.

The fixed anchor loops are located in the four

corn

ers of the cargo floor.

Anchor Loops

Gro

cery Hooks

Two hooks (one on the left side and one on the

right

side) are also available on the side panels to

fix loads that are not excessively heavy (e.g.

bags).

Grocery Hook

NOTE:

Do not apply a load greater than 22 lb (10 kg) on

a s

ingle hook.

3 — Cover Hook

WARNING!

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the

vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around

in a sudden stop and strike someone in the

vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the

cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.

Remove the cover from the vehicle when

taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the

vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Cargo Area Adjustable Rail — If Equipped

The mobile loops (if equipped), slide on two

guides secured to the cargo area floor.

To position a loop, push down the center button

whil

e sliding the loop along the guide to the

desired position. Release the button and move

the loop slightly to the next fixed position in the

notches on the guide.

Adjustable Anchor Loop — If Equipped

Lift the loop to fasten the load.

Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop To Use

rgo Net — If Equipped

Cargo nets can be used to contain lightweight

erials during transport.

The cargo net is included in the optional

Con

venience Package and also available from

your authorized dealer.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held

transmitters that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home

security systems. The HomeLink® unit is

The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sun visor

or t

he overhead console, designate the three

different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink®

indicator is located above the center button.

HomeLink Buttons

NOTE:

HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security

Ala

rm is active.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING

OMELINK®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the

garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate

tran

smission of the radio-frequency signal it is

recommended that a new battery be placed in

the hand-held transmitter of the device that is

being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

To erase the channels, place the ignition in the

ON/

RUN position, and push and hold the two

outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to

20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes.

NOTE:

 Erasing all channels should only be performed

when programming HomeLink® for the first

time. Do not erase channels when

programming additional buttons.

 If you have any problems, or require

assistance, please call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com

for information or assistance.

1 — HomeLink® Button 1

2 — HomeLink® Button 2

3 — HomeLink® Button 3

4 — HomeLink® Indicator

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were

manufactured after 1995. These garage door

openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or

“TRAIN” button located where the hanging

antenna is attached to the garage door opener.

NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open

and

close the door. The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener

Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 i

nches

(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button

you wish to program while keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you

nt to program while you push and hold the

hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe

the

indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator

will flash slowly and then rapidly after

HomeLink® has received the frequency

signal from the hand-held transmitter.

Release both buttons after the indicator light

changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the

rage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”

button. This can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to the

garage door opener/device motor. Firmly

push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”

button. On some garage door openers/

devices there may be a light that blinks when

the garage door opener/device is in the

LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

ste

p after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the

pro

grammed HomeLink® button twice

(holding the button for two seconds each

time). If the garage door opener/device acti

vates, programming is complete.

NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two

onds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink®

but

tons, repeat each step for each remaining

button. DO NOT erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Ro

lling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously

trai

ned, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Push and hold the desired HomeLink®

tton until the indicator light begins to flash

after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“P

rogramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and

follow all remaining steps.”

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers

manufactured before 1995.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 i

nches

(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button

you wish to program while keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you

nt to program while you press and hold the

hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe

the

indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator

will flash slowly and then rapidly after

HomeLink® has received the frequency

signal from the hand-held transmitter.

Release both buttons after the indicator light

changes from slow to rapid.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®

tton and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly,

pro

gramming is complete and the garage

door/device should activate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink®

ttons, repeat each step for each

remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

— Door Opener

2 — Training Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Non-Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously

trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

tton until the indicator light begins to flash

after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with

“P

rogramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2

and follow all remaining steps.

CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR

ROGRAMMING

For programming transmitters in Canada/United

States that require the transmitter signals to

“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require

tran

smitter signals to time-out (or quit) after

several seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the

cyc

ling process to prevent possible overheating

of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches

to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button

you wish to program while keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®

tton, while you press and release (cycle)

your hand-held transmitter every two

seconds until HomeLink® has successfully

accepted the frequency signal. The indicator

light will flash slowly and then rapidly when

fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to

cha

nge flash rates. When it changes, it is

programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or

longer in rare cases. The garage door may

open and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®

tton and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and the garage

door/device should activate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink®

ttons, repeat each step for each

remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan

nels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device

r p

rogramming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Ca

nadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously

trai

ned, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

tton until the indicator light begins to flash

after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with

“C

anadian/Gate Operator Programming”

step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

USING HOMELINK®

To operate, push and release the programmed

HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for

the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener,

gate operator, security system, entry door lock,

home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held

transmitter of the device may also be used at any

time.

SECURITY

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell

or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons

for 2

0 seconds until the orange indicator flashes.

Note that all channels will be erased. Individual

channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is

dis

abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is

active.

NOTE:

The universal garage door opener only operates

when

the engine is running for security reasons

associated with removable tops and doors.

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

If you are having trouble programming

HomeLink®, here are some of the most common

solutions:

 Replace the battery in the garage door opener

hand-held transmitter.

 Push the LEARN button on the garage door

opener to complete the training for a Rolling

Code.

 Did you unplug the device for programming

and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance,

please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the

Internet at

HomeLink.com

for information or

assistance.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rul

es and with Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada license-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

rec

eived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d`I

nnovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

bro

uillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

sar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

irements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’e

xposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

pas

été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

WARNING!

 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,

a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in

the garage while programming the

transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious

injury or death.

 Your motorized door or gate will open and

close while you are programming the

universal transceiver. Do not program the

transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener

that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This

includes most garage door opener models

manufactured after 1982. Do not use a

garage door opener without these safety

features.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

To open the glove compartment proceed as

follows:

1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the glove

mpartment by placing the emergency key

into the lock on the handle.

2. Pull the handle to open the glove compart-

nt.

Opening Th

e Glove Compartment

Whe

n the glove compartment is opened, a light

turn

s on to illuminate the inside of the

compartment.

NOTE:

Do not insert large objects that prevent the glove

com

partment from closing completely. Always

make sure that the glove compartment is

completely closed when driving.

SUN VISORS

The sun visors are located at the sides of the

interior rear view mirror. They can be adjusted

forward and sideways.

To direct the visor toward the passenger side

win

dow, detach the visor from the interior rear

view mirror side hook and turn it towards the side

window.

From this position, the sun visor can also be

ext

ended toward the rear of the vehicle for

additional blockage of sunlight.

Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back

of t

he sun visors and can be used even in poor

light conditions.

Rotate Sun Visor T

oward Passenger Window

NOTE:

A rear facing child restraint system should never

fitted in the front passenger seat. Always

comply with the instructions on the sun visor.

Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more

information.

FRONT ARMREST

The center console storage compartment is

located between the front seats.

To access the center console storage, lift the

upp

er part of the center console as shown in the

following image.

Center Console

CUPHOLDERS

Two cupholders are available in the center

console.

1 — Storage

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console

compartment lid in the open position. Driving

with the console compartment lid open may

result in injury in a collision.

REAR ARMREST

The rear armrest is foldable and can be stored in

the backrest.

 To lower the armrest, pull on the tab located at

the top of the seatback and fold it downward.

 To re-close the armrest, lift it until it is inserted

into the backrest.

There are two cupholders and a phone

mpartment inside the armrest.

Rear Cupholder

NOTE:

The armrest was not designed to support the

ight of an adult passenger or a child. Only use

it to hold drinks or small objects.

POWER OUTLETS

The instrument panel power outlet is located

under the air conditioning control panel. It will

only operate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.

Instrument Panel Power Outlet

NOTE:

Do not connect devices, with a power rating

hig

her than 180 W, to the outlet. Do not use

power adapters that do not fit the outlet as this

may damage it.

Luggage Compartment Power Outlet

The luggage compartment power outlet is located

the left side of the luggage compartment and

only works with the ignition device in the ON/RUN

position.

NOTE:

Do not connect devices with powers higher than

0 W to the socket. Do not damage the outlet by

using unsuitable adapters.

Luggage Compart

ment Power Outlet

115 Volt Power Inverter — If Equipped

The power inverter is located inside of the center

nsole. It can be used for small battery powered

electrical appliances with powers up to 150 W

(e.g. cameras, video camera, tablets, razors,

etc.).

NOTE:

Do not connect devices with powers higher than

0 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket

by using unsuitable adapters.

Power Inverter

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH TRAY —

F EQUIPPED

If equipped, the cigar lighter is located on the

bottom of the center stack, in front of the

cupholders.

To activate the cigar lighter, push in and wait a

few

seconds. Once the cigar lighter has returned

to its original position, it is ready for use.

NOTE:

Always ensure the cigar lighter is turned off when

not

in use.

1 — Cigar Lighter

If equipped, the ash tray is a removable plastic

con

tainer located inside the cupholder.

WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —

F EQUIPPED

Wireless Charging Pad

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 W (3 A)

wireless charging pad located inside of the

center console. This charging pad is designed to

wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone.

Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to

transfer power to your mobile device.

Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi

wire

less charging.

NOTE:

 Do not place the key fob or any other type of

metal/magnetized object inside the mobile

phone housing or near the wireless charging

pad.

 Be sure to place the mobile device correctly

(display facing upward) on the wireless

charging pad.

 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in

order for the phone to charge.

 To avoid interference with the key fob search,

the wireless charging pad will stop charging

when any door is opened.

The following messages will display in the radio

sys

tem:

 “Your phone is being charged” — The phone

has begun to charge.

 “Phone Fully Charged” — The phone has

completed charging its battery.

 “Foreign Object Detected” — The phone is not

enabled for wireless charging or an object that

is not permitted has been placed on the

wireless charging pad.

 “Unavailable System” — There is a malfunction

with the wireless charging pad.

The driver can deactivate these messages

throu

gh the radio system. Refer to the

Information and Entertainment System Owner’s

Manual Supplement for further information.

CAUTION!

The key fob should not be placed on the

charging pad or within 6

inches (15 cm) of it.

Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup

and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in

close proximity of the charging pad blocks the

fob from being detected by the vehicle and

prevents the vehicle from starting.

This section gives you all the information you need to understand and use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the

engine speed in revolutions

per minute (RPM x 1000).

• Inside the tachometer there is a light

nsor capable of detecting ambient light

conditions and adjusting the operating

mode (night/day) and the brightness of

the instrument panel and the Information

and Entertainment System display.

2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

• The

digital bar indicator monitors the

mperature of the engine oil and starts

supplying indications when the fluid

temperature reaches approximately

122°F (50°C).

• Under normal usage, the digital scale

sho

uld hover around the middle of the

scale according to the working conditions.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You

or others could be badly burned by steam or

boiling coolant. You may want to call an

authorized dealer for service if your vehicle

overheats. Refer to “Engine” in “Technical

Specifications” for further information.

3. Instrument Cluster Display

• The instrument cluster display features a

driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-

ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know

Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

4. F

uel Gauge

• The

digital bar gauge shows the amount of

fue

l in the tank.

• The warning light turns on, a message

displayed and there

is an acoustic signal

when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel are

left in the tank.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the

de of

the vehicle where the fuel door is

cated.

• Proceeding further, the second white

tch will go off and the last one will

become red, together with the indication

"E" present at the bottom of the tank.

Fuel Level Gauge

NOTE:

If the low fuel warning light switches on, refuel at

the

earliest opportunity.

5. Speedometer

• In

dicates vehi

cle speed.

NOTE:

The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check

when

the ignition is first cycled.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

ESCRIPTION

This vehicle is equipped with a driver interactive

display that is located in the instrument cluster.

When one or more of the doors have been

opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF

position, the instrument cluster will display the

vehicle mileage for a few seconds.

RECONFIGURABLE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

ISPLAY

During operation, the instrument cluster display

is divided into multiple sections which show

driving data, warnings, and failure indications.

Instrument Cluster Display

RECONFIGURABLE DISPLAY ITEMS

1. External Lights (Low Beam/High Beam)

Display

2. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems, Cruise

ntrol Change Information

3. Speed Limiter Display

riving Assistance Systems (FCW, LDW, HAS)

formation Display

5. Active Cruise Control (ACC) / Cruise Control

C) Information Display

6. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) / Speed

miter Information Display

7. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Information

splay

8. Time

External Temperature

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge

reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle

the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off

until the pointer drops back into the normal

range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn

the engine off immediately and call an

authorized dealer for service.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

10. Main Display: Vehicle Speed Display, Trip

Computer Information, etc...

The screens can be selected, on rotation, by

pushing the MENU selection button on the

windshield wiper stalk.

MENU Selection Button

Depending on the driving mode chosen using

the

Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, and Ad-

vanced Efficiency) the screens can be graph-

ically different. Navigation instructions and

l information can be set and displayed in

the Information and Entertainment System.

Home

The parameters shown on the display, for the

mod

es: Dynamic, Normal and Advanced Effi

ciency are:

• Time

• Outside Temper

ure

• Current speed (shown only if the repeat

de of the “Navigation” and “Phone”

functions have not been previously acti

vated).

• Range

In RACE mode (if equipped) the consumption

ication index is not active and a sports

gearshift indicator is displayed.

Instrument Cluster Display

strument Cluster Display

Tri

p A And B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, and

Adva

nced Efficiency) and with the ignition de-

vice ON, the “Trip computer” can be used to

play the measurements regarding the op

erating state of the vehicle. This function is

chara

cterized by two separate records, called

“Trip A” and “Trip B” (the latter can be deacti

vated by Information and Entertainment Sys-

tem), where the “complete missions”

(

urneys) are recorded in a reciprocally inde-

pendent manner.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the

es relating to:

• Distance trave

led

• Average fuel consumption

• Av

rage speed

• A

tive trip

• Fu

el consumption indicator

Instr

ument Cluster Display

1 — Time

2 — Temperature

3 — Distance To Empty

4 — Speed

To reset the values, press and hold down the

button on the windshield wiper stalk.

Reset Button

Performance

The displayed parameters differ according to

the

active mode. The modes which can be se

lected using the Alfa DNA system are:

Natural

Efficiency Consumption Graph

The

screen graphically reproduces some pa-

rameters closely linked to the efficiency of

driving style, with a view to limiting con-

sumption.

Advanced Efficiency

Dynamic Dr

iving Style

The

three central icons on the screen indicate

the

effectiveness of the driving style linked to

the parameters of: acceleration, deceleration

and gearshift with a view to reducing fuel con

sumption.

The graphic bar below the icons shows cur-

rent consumption and the green line rep-

resents the optimal area. The globe lights up

rad

ually according to lower consumption.

Alternative Performance

The displayed parameters vary depending on

the

active mode. The modes can be selected

through the “Alfa DNA™” system and are as

follows:

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

The display graphically shows the values of:

• instantaneous consumption

• av

erage fuel consumption (based on

“T

rip A”);

Below a certain speed value, when the accel-

erator pedal is not pressed or in the event of

ure, dashes are displayed in place of the

consumption value ("– –. –").

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

namic

The display graphically shows the values of:

• accelerator pedal position (expressed in

rcentage);

• brake pedal position (expressed in

rcentage);

• engine coolant temperat

ure (H = hot/

C = cold).

1 — Acceleration

2 — Deceleration

3 — Gear Shifts

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Dynamic

Race (If Equipped)

The display graphically shows the values of:

• engine torqu

• turbocharger pressure;

• en

gine oil pres

sure (L = low pressure/

H = h

igh pressure).

NOTE:

The engine torque and turbocharger pressure

valu

es vary according to the engine type.

Race

Dynamic

Acceleration Gauge

The

displayed parameters are related to vehi-

cle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of

the

longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-me

ter information), considering gravity accelera-

tion as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicat-

ed.

11. D

riving Mode Display (Alfa DNA System)

. Distance Traveled (miles/km) display

. Fuel Consumption

. W

arning Indications Display (e.g. danger of

e, open doors, ABS operation, etc.)

15. Range

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS

Multiple settings can be programmed by the user

using the radio. This section describes only the

basic settings:

 Units & Language

 Clock & Date

 Cluster

To access the settings list in the radio, proceed as

foll

ows:

 Press the Home button to access the main

menu.

 Select Settings from the main menu using the

Rotary Knob or by pressing Settings on the

touchscreen.

Rotary Knob

its & Language

The following settings can be modified under the

“Un

its & Language” menu:

 Units: select US, Metric, or Custom. The

custom option allows for individual selection of

the unit measures

 Language: change the language of the system

 Restore Unit & Language Settings: restores the

factory settings

1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob

2 — OPTION Button

3 — Rotary Pad

4 — MENU Button

To access and the change the setting, turn and

push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting

on the touchscreen.

Clock & Date

The following settings can be modified under the

“

lock & Date” menu:

 Sync With GPS Time: activates or deactivates

the clock synchronization through the GPS. If

the function is deactivated, the options Set

Time and Set Date are enabled

 Set Time: set the time manually

 Time Format: set the time format to either a

12-hour or a 24-hour clock.

 Set Date: set the date manually

 Restore Clock & Date Settings: restores the

factory settings

To access and the change the setting, turn and

sh the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting

on the touchscreen.

Cluster

The following settings can be modified under the

“

luster” menu:

 Warning Buzzer Volume: allows you to set the

volume of the warning buzzer on seven levels.

 Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function.

 Show Phone Info: allows you to activate/

deactivate repetition of the phone function

screens also on the instrument panel display.

 Show Audio Info: allows you to activate/

deactivate repetition of the audio function

screens (Radio and Media) also on the

instrument panel display.

 Show Nav Info: allows you to activate/

deactivate repetition of the navigator function

screens also on the instrument panel display.

 Digital Speed on all screens: this allows you to

activate/deactivating of digital speed on the

instrument panel display screens other than

the main screen.

 Consumption Bar: allows you to activate/

deactivate the consumption baron the display

screens of the instrument panel where it is

available.

 Performance Pages: allows you to choose, for

each driving mode, one of the two alternative

contents displayed in the screen.

 Custom Areas: allows you to select which

content to display in each of the three custom

izable areas on the display of the instrument

nel: time, date, outside temperature, radio

information, compass.

 Restore Cluster Settings: deletes the current

settings and restores the factory settings.

To access and the change the setting, turn and

sh the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting

on the touchscreen.

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES ON THE

INSTRUMENT PANEL

The following pages consist of warning lights and

messages.

NOTE:

 The warning light turns on together with a

dedicated message and/or chime when

applicable. These indications are precau-

tionary and as such must not be considered as

haustive and/or alternative to the

information contained in the Owner’s Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all

cases. Always refer to the information in this

section in the event of a failure indication.

 The failure indicators appearing on the display

are divided into two categories: very serious

and less serious faults. Serious faults are

indicated by a repeated and prolonged

warning cycle. Less serious faults are indicated

by a warning cycle with a shorter duration. You

can stop the warning cycle in both cases by

pushing the button located on the windshield

wiper stalk. The instrument panel warning light

will stay on until the cause of the failure is

eliminated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RED WARNING LIGHTS

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ON

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake

flu

id level and parking brake application. If the brake light

turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,

that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem

with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

sengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In

this case, the light will remain on until the condition has

been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake

Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

rning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/

RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately

four seconds. The light should then turn off unless the

parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the

light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an

authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied

th the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It

es not show the degree of brake application.

For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to have

the

system checked as soon as possible.

Release the electric park brake, then check that the

rning light has turned off.

If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE

The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates either a

lure of the EBD system or that the system is not

available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock

and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to

have the system inspected immediately.

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb

ck when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns

on while driving, have the system inspected at an

authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will

illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag

Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the

fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT

When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if

driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and

the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front

passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a

chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

ssible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized

dealer.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

WARNING!

 The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults

with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

 If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display),

there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number

of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AMBER WARNING LIGHTS

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

e or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

der-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The

ght will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN

position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then

the

Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning

and service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the brake

indicator light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition

is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected

by an authorized dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as

ssible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed

indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the

recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is

occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel

consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned

ove, the display will show the indications corresponding

to each tire in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no

hig

her then 50

mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized

aler to have the tire repaired.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction

indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to

have your sensor function checked.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low

The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire

pre

ssure is lower than the recommended value and/or that

slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire

duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is

“S

ee Manual”, it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving

Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the indications

that you find there.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light

luminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is

started.

ESC System Intervention:

Intervention by the system is

indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates

that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure:

If the indicator light does not turn off,

or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found

in the ESC system.

In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as

ssible.

Hill Start Assist System Failure:

The illumination of the

indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR

LIGHT

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light

luminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is

started.

The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active

fety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.

For further details about the active safety systems, refer to

“A

ctive Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety

systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHT

The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is

tivated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)

In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the

dicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as

the engine is started.

The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the

tra

ffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws

and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue traveling

moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort

from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the

vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause

damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

CAUTION!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when traveling (on some versions together with

the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) —

IF EQUIPPED

This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal

llision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as

ssible.

GREEN TELLTALE INDICATOR LIGHTS

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) illuminates

whe

n about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) illuminates

n about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

WARNING!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or

dlights are turned on.

Headlight Off Delay

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,

60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the OFF

sition.

LEFT TURN SIGNAL

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash

dependently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as

the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected

when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This

directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right

directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

pushed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BLUE TELLTALE INDICATOR LIGHT

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash

dependently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as

the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected

when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This

directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left

directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high

am headlights are activated.

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.

sh the multifunction control lever away from you to

switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a

second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,

“flash to pass” scenario.

RED SYMBOLS

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale

rns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the

engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this

telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause

is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in

the engine.

NOTE:

Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The

lumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil

in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon

entering the vehicle and also by activating the “Oil level” func

tion on the Information and Entertainment System.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If the

eng

ine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will

illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature

reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for

four minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool

whichever comes first.

In normal driving conditions: s

top the vehicle, shut off the

engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is

not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to

cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top off

with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN

and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually

for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the

telltale comes on when the engine is started again.

If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in

hig

h-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale

stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes

with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate

better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check

that the coolant level is correct as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILURE

If the telltale remains on, you may not have steering

istance and the effort required to operate the steering

wheel may be increased; steering is, however, possible.

NOTE:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must

initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this

roc

edure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from

one end to the other, and then turn it back to the central

position.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not

pletely shut. A chime will signal when the doors are

open and the vehicle is moving.

Close all the doors properly.

HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed,

ong with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open

hood appears on the display.

A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is

ving.

Fully close the hood.

LIFTGATE OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale turns on when the liftgate is not properly

osed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an

open liftgate appears on the display.

A buzzer is heard when the liftgate is open and the vehicle

moving.

Close the liftgate.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE

The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to

dicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

CAUTION!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or

with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS

This telltale, along with the related message, signals a

fai

lure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the

gine is running.

If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate

tervention is required. A loss of performance, irregular/

high idling speed or engine stopping might take place and

the vehicle may need to be towed.

Place the gear selector in the park position and turn the

vehi

cle off: the telltale should switch off. Start the vehicle.

If the telltale remains solid (the telltale does not flash) with

engine running, the vehicle can still be driven until proper

maintenance can be performed. If the telltale flashes with

the engine running, do not drive the vehicle.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL

This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level

ls below the minimum recommended value.

OIL OVER MAXIMUM LEVEL

The telltale turns on, along with the respective message on

the

instrument cluster display, to indicate that the engine

oil level is too high.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

n the engine under 3000 RPM during this time.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE

The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the

tomatic steering correction system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE

The illumination of the telltale with engine on corresponds

an alternator failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BRAKE DISC TEMPERATURE

When the telltale illuminates, it indicates an excessive

mperature of the brake discs.

Avoid aggressive brake maneuvers, hovering over the

bra

ke pedal, and reduce vehicle speed to allow brake

systems to cool down.

DAA SYSTEM ACTIVATION

The symbol appears, together with a message on the

splay, in case of activation of the Drive Attention Assist

(DAA) system.

Stop to pause while driving, pulling the car over in safe

conditions.

AMBER SYMBOLS

Warning Lights What It Means What To Do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine

obilizer system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Break-In Attempt

The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ACC

ition, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected

by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not Recognized

The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and

electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred

the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to “Enhanced

Acc

ident Response System” in “Occupant Restraint Systems”

in “Safety” for further information. If it is not possible to

restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is

available.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED

The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

NOTE:

After the first indication, each time the engine is started the

sym

bol will continue to illuminate as described above until

the oil is changed.

If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a

faul

t on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now

necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the

vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by

using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine

from reaching operating temperature.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first

switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol

comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil

pre

ssure sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level

nsor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

rward Collision Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

STOP/START SYSTEM FAILURE

This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system

lure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

tomatic windshield wiper.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

tomatic low beam alignment.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot

itoring system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor

lure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the

lowing lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking

lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer

lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / rear

fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate

lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown

protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical

connection.

Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an

thorized dealer.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system

fai

lure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off system

lure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM INDICATOR

The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the lane

parture alarm function is not enabled.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Lane

parture Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE —

IF EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the

tomatic high beam headlights.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING

The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission

ove

rheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this

case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or idling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio

stem.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE

While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed

miter system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP

Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly closed.

Tighten the cap properly.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to

gnal a failure in the electric park brake system.

This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle

cause the park brake could remain activated even if

automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant

controls.

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not

gaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and

remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,

that the electric park brake is not operational.

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle

olant level is low.

Top up, as described in “Engine Compartment” in

“S

ervicing And Maintenance.”

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control

(

CC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WEAR ON BRAKE PADS

This light will illuminate when the brake pads have reached

the

ir wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE:

Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the Inte-

grated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies

th factory parts.

WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED

This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake

scs have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE:

Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the Inte-

grated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies

th factory parts.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

WARNING!

It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic

ve control system.

Contact an authorized dealer.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE

Signals a windshield wiper failure.

Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATION

Signals information and failures.

The accompanying messages describe the failure.

Contact an authorized dealer.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE

This telltale will illuminate along with an accompanying

ssage when the AWD dynamic control system is

temporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The traction

system will work in RWD mode in this instance.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

TEMPORARY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWD dynamic

ntrol system is temporarily deactivated to prevent

damage. The traction system will work in RWD mode in this

instance.

In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce the load to

low the system to cool down. The AWD system will resume

normal operation when the symbol disappears from the

display.

ABS ACTIVATION

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABS system

activated.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic

rectional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION SELECTION —

IF EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable

spension setting is activated.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED

While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure in

suspension system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL

The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the

ndshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in

“S

ervicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the

features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section in

“Technical Specifications.”

TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILURE

The telltale illuminates to indicate that there has been a

lure in the control unit that manages the trailer lights.

Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to the

cket. If the fault persists the next time you start the

engine, contact an authorized dealer to have the system

checked.

LIFTGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILURE

The telltale illuminates to indicate a liftgate electric

ening/closing system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the

failure eliminated.

DAA SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol comes on in the event of a Driver Attention

sist (DAA) system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to

have

the failure eliminated.

HAS SYSTEM / TJA SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol lights up in case of Highway Assist (HAS) or

ffic Jam Assist (TJA) system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to

have

the failure eliminated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

GREEN SYMBOLS

BLUE SYMBOLS

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS

The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS

The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

STOP/START SYSTEM OPERATION

The telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine).

When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start System” in

“

tarting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED

The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM

The telltale illuminates when the HDC system intervenes.

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM

Operation

The Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD) carries out

a c

ontinuous diagnosis of the components of the

vehicle related to emissions.

It also alerts the driver of when these

com

ponents are no longer in peak condition by

switching on the

warning light on the

instrument panel. See “Warning Lights And

Mess

ages” paragraph in this chapter.

The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diagnostic)

to:

 Monitor the efficiency of the system

 Indicate an increase in emissions

 Indicate the need to replace damaged

components

The vehicle also has a connector, which can

int

erface with appropriate tools, that makes it

possible to read the error codes stored in the

electronic control units together with a series of

specific parameters for engine operation and

diagnosis. This check can be carried out by an

authorized dealer.

NOTE:

After eliminating a fault, to check the system

com

pletely, an authorized dealer is obliged to run

tests and, if necessary certain road tests.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

YBERSECURITY

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard

Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port

to allow access to information related to the

performance of your emissions controls.

Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the

diagnosis and service of your vehicle and

emissions system.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION

AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement

to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions

control system. Failure to pass could prevent

vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection

and Maintenance (I/M), this check

verifi

es the “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on

when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The

OBD

II system may not be ready if your vehicle

was recently serviced, recently had a depleted

battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II

system should be determined not ready for the

I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,

hic

h you can use prior to going to the test

station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is

ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ACC position,

t do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

sta

rt this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the

C position, you will see the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part

of a normal bulb check.

WARNING!

 ONLY an authorized service technician

should connect equipment to the OBD II

connection port in order to read the VIN,

diagnose, or service your vehicle.

 If unauthorized equipment is connected to

the OBD II connection port, such as a

driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that

vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could

be impaired or a loss of vehicle control

could occur that may result in an acci

dent inv

olving serious injury or death.

• Ac

cess, or a

llow others to access, infor-

mation stor

ed in your vehicle systems,

cluding personal information.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two

things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds

and then return to being fully illuminated

until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain

lly illuminated until you place the ignition

in the off position or start the engine. This

means that your vehicle's OBD II system is

ready and you can proceed to the I/M

station.

If your OBD II system is not

ready, you should see

an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your

vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery

failure or replacement, you may need to do

nothing more than drive your vehicle as you

normally would in order for your OBD II system to

update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II

system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated

during normal vehicle operation you should have

your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M

station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle

because the MIL is on with the engine running.

(Continued)

SAFETY

This very important section describes the safety

systems that your vehicle may be equipped with,

and provides instructions on how to use them

correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The vehicle may be equipped with the following

active safety devices:

 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

 Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System

 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System

 Drive Train Control (DTC) System

 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System

 Hill Descent Control (HDC) System

 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System

 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System

 Traction Control System (TCS)

For system operation, see the following pages.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

An integral part of the braking system, the

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) prevents one or

more wheels from locking and slipping in all road

surface conditions, regardless of the intensity of

the braking action. The system ensures that the

vehicle can be controlled even during emergency

braking, allowing the driver to optimize stopping

distances.

The system intervenes during braking when the

whee

ls are about to lock, typically in emergency

braking or low-grip conditions where locking may

be more frequent.

The system also improves control and stability of

the

vehicle when braking on a surface where the

grip of the left and right wheels varies, such as in

a corner.

The Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD)

sys

tem works with the ABS, allowing the brake

force to be distributed between the front and rear

wheels.

System Intervention

The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with

the

"Brake-By-Wire" (Integrated Brake System -

IBS) function. With this system, the command

given by pressing the brake pedal is not

transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.

Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the

pedal with the traditional system is no longer

noticeable.

ACTIVE TORQUE VECTORING (ATV)

YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The dynamic drive control is used to optimize and

balance the drive torque between the wheels of

the same axles. The Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

system improves the grip in turns, sending more

drive torque to the external wheel.

Given that, in a turn, the external wheels of the

car

travel more than the internal ones and

therefore turn faster, sending a higher thrust to

the external rear wheel allows for the car to be

more stable and to not suffer an "understeer"

condition. Understeer occurs when the vehicle is

turning less than appropriate for the steering

wheel position.

WARNING!

 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic

equipment that may be susceptible to

interference caused by improperly installed

or high output radio transmitting equipment.

This interference can cause possible loss of

anti-lock braking capability. Installation of

such equipment should be performed by

qualified professionals.

 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will

diminish their effectiveness and may lead to

a collision. Pumping makes the stopping

distance longer. Just press firmly on your

brake pedal when you need to slow down or

stop.

 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it

increase braking or steering efficiency

beyond that afforded by the condition of the

vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

afforded.

 The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including

those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, following another vehicle too closely,

or hydroplaning.

 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner that could jeopardize the

user’s safety or the safety of others.

WARNING!

DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE (DST)

YSTEM

The Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) function uses

the integration of the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system with the electric power steering to

increase the safety level of the whole vehicle.

In critical situations for example (braking on

rfaces with different grip conditions), the ESC

system influences the steering through the DST

function to implement an additional torque contri

bution on the steering wheel in order to suggest

most correct maneuver to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakes and steering

creases the safety and control of the vehicle.

NOTE:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver

rea

lize the correct course of action through small

torques on the steering wheel, which means the

effectiveness of the DST feature is highly depen

dent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reac-

tion to the applied torque. It is very important to

lize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,

meaning the driver is still responsible for steering

the vehicle.

DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL (DTC) SYSTEM

Some models of this vehicle are equipped with an

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, which offers an

optimal drive for countless driving conditions and

road surfaces. The system reduces tire slipping to

a minimum, automatically redistributing the

torque to the front and rear wheels as needed.

To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with AWD

tomatically passes to Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD)

when the road and environmental conditions are

such that they wouldn't cause the tires to slip.

When the road and environmental conditions

require better traction, the vehicle automatically

switches to AWD mode.

NOTE:

 There may be a brief delay in shifting to AWD

mode after a tire slipping event occurs.

 If the system failure symbol switches on, after

starting the engine or while driving, it means

that the AWD system is not working properly. If

the warning message activates frequently, it is

recommended to carry out the maintenance

operations.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)

YSTEM

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system

improves the directional control and stability of

the vehicle in various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s understeer

d oversteer, distributing the brake force on the

appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the

engine can also be reduced in order to maintain

control of the vehicle.

The ESC system uses sensors installed on the

vehi

cle to determine the path that the driver

intends to follow and compares it with the

vehicle’s effective path. When the real path

deviates from the desired path, the ESC system

intervenes to counter the vehicle’s oversteer or

understeer.

 Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is turning

more than it should according to the angle of

the steering wheel.

 Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning

less than it should according to the angle of the

steering wheel.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is indicated by the

fla

shing of the ESC warning light on the

instrument panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle stability and grip are critical.

WARNING!

 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,

including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery

surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot

prevent accidents resulting from loss of

vehicle control due to inappropriate driver

input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,

and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The

capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s

safety or the safety of others.

 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly

maintain your vehicle, may change the

handling characteristics of your vehicle, and

may negatively affect the performance of the

ESC system. Changes to the steering system,

suspension, braking system, tire type and size

or wheel size may adversely affect ESC

performance. Improperly inflated and

unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC

performance. Any vehicle modification or poor

vehicle maintenance that reduces the

effectiveness of the ESC system can increase

the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle

rollover, personal injury and death.

SAFETY

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)

YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Hill Descent Control (HDC) function is an

integral part of the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system, keeping the vehicle at a constant

speed while descending a hill by actively

controlling the brakes.

HDC aims to create vehicle stability and safer

drivi

ng in various situations, including poor grip

conditions and steep descents.

The system has three different modes:

 Off: the system is deactivated

 Enabled: the system is enabled and ready to

intervene when the activation conditions are

met

 Active: the system actively controls the vehicle

speed

Enabling The System

To enable the system, push the HDC switch

loc

ated on the steering wheel.

HDC Switch

The system is enabled if the car speed is below

ph (30 km/h). The system stays enabled

il the car speed reaches 37 mph (60 km/h),

the

system is disabled at speeds above 37

mph

(

km/h).

Activation of the HDC system is indicated by the

hit

icon appearing in the instrument cluster

display.

HDC Symbol

Activation Of The System

Once enabled, the HDC system will activate

omatically if the vehicle is driven on a downhill

slope with sufficient gradient, greater than 8%.

The speed set for the HDC system can be

adj

usted using the SET switch located on the

steering wheel.

HDC Speed SET Switch

Once the desired speed has been reached,

rele

ase the SET switch and the HDC system will

maintain the set speed. After set speed is

established, the HDC system will automatically

brake to keep the vehicle at the set speed if the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle gets

close to the set speed.

It is possible to reduce the set speed with the

brak

e pedal. When the pedal is released, the

system will adjust the set speed to the new

current speed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),

but

remains below 37

mph (60 km/h) and the

elerator pedal is released, as soon as the

vehicle gets close to the set speed the HDC

system will automatically brake to keep the

vehicle at the set speed.

The driver can cancel HDC system intervention at

any

time by pressing the accelerator pedal.

System Deactivation

The HDC system will be deactivated, but remain

available, if any of the following conditions are

met:

 The vehicle is traveling on a downhill slope with

a gradient less than 8%, on a level surface, or

on an uphill grade.

 PARK (P) mode is engaged.

Disabling The System

The system is disabled if any of the following

ditions are met:

 The HDC switch is pressed.

 Cruise Control/Adaptive Cruise Control is

activated.

 A vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is

exceeded.

System deactivation is shown by the icon on

the display turning off.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM

Hill Start Assist (HSA) is an integral part of the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system that

facilitates starting on slopes, activating automat

ically in the following cases:

 Uphill: the vehicle is stationary on a road with a

gradient higher than 5%, the engine is running,

the brake is pressed, and the transmission is

in NEUTRAL (N) or a gear other than REVERSE

(R) is engaged.

 Downhill: the vehicle is stationary on a road

with a gradient higher than 5%, the engine is

running, the brake is pressed, and the

transmission is in REVERSE.

When starting to move forward from a complete

sto

p, the ESC system control unit maintains the

braking pressure on the wheels until the engine

torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any

case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing

your right foot to be moved easily from the brake

pedal to the accelerator.

The system will automatically deactivate after two

sec

onds without starting, gradually releasing the

braking pressure. During this release stage, it is

possible to hear a typical mechanical brake

release noise, indicating the imminent movement

of the vehicle.

PANIC BRAKE ASSIST (PBA) SYSTEM

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) system is designed

to improve the vehicle’s braking capacity during

emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking by

mon

itoring the speed and force with which the

brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies

the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the

braking distance: the PBA system therefore

complements the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the PBA system is

obt

ained by pressing the brake pedal very quickly.

In addition, the brake pedal should be pressed

continuously during braking, avoiding

intermittent presses, to get the most out of the

system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake

pedal until braking is no longer necessary.

The PBA system is deactivated when the brake

ped

al is released.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in

controlling vehicle speed when descending

hills. The driver must remain attentive to the

driving conditions and is responsible for

maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start

Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling

may occur, such as on minor hills or with a

loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is

not a substitute for active driving involvement.

It is always the driver’s responsibility to be

attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,

and objects, and most importantly brake

operation to ensure safe operation of the

vehicle under all road conditions. Your

complete attention is always required while

driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

WARNING!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction

afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA

cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns,

driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. The capabilities of a

PBA-equipped vehicle must never be exploited

in a reckless or dangerous manner, which

could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety

of others.

SAFETY

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) automatically

operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on

wet roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on

one or both drive wheels on roads that are

slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending on the

slipping conditions, two different control systems

are activated:

 If the slipping involves both drive wheels, the

system intervenes, reducing the power

transmitted by the engine.

 If the slipping only involves one of the drive

wheels, the Brake Limited Differential (BLD)

function is activated, automatically braking the

wheel which is slipping (the behavior of a

self-locking differential is simulated). This will

increase the engine torque transferred to the

wheel which isn't slipping.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is indicated by the

shing of the ESC warning light on the

instrument panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle stability and grip are critical.

AUXILIARY DRIVING

SYSTEMS

The following auxiliary driving systems are

available in this vehicle:

 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — if equipped

 Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) — if equipped

 Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)

 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The vehicle may also be fitted with the following

dri

ving assistance systems:

 DAA (Driver Attention Assist)

 LDW (Lane Departure Warning)

 LKA (Lane Keeping Assist)

 HAS (Highway Assist System)

 TJA (Traffic Jam Assist)

 ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control)

 ISC (Intelligent Speed Control)

 TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition)

For the operation of the DAA, LDW, LKA, HAS, TJA,

C, ISC, or TSR systems, refer to the “Starting

And Operating” chapter.

NOTE:

When driving on two-way roads where there is no

ne dividing center line (e.g. on unpaved roads),

the use of the ABSA, HAS, TJA, and LKA systems

is strongly discouraged as the system could

detect the entire road as single-lane dividing

lines.

NOTE:

The driving assistance systems are designed to

d in driving the car. The driver must always

maintain a sufficient level of attention to the

traffic and road conditions and control the trajec

tory of the car.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)

YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses

radar sensors, located in the rear bumper, to

detect the presence of other vehicles in the rear

side blind spots of your vehicle.

Rear Sensor Location

he system warns the driver about the presence

of other vehicles in the detection area by illumi-

nating the warning light located within the door

rror on the side in which the other vehicle was

detected. If equipped, an audible chime will also

be heard to alert the driver (if option is selected

within the radio system).

BSM Indicator Light

hen the engine is started, the warning light

illuminates briefly to signal the driver that the

system is active.

Sensors

The sensors are activated when any forward gear

is engaged at a speed higher than approximately

6 mph (10 km/h).

The sensors are temporarily deactivated when

the

vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is in PARK.

The detection area of the system covers approxi-

mately one lane on both sides of the vehicle,

whi

ch is around 9 ft (3 m).

This area begins from the door mirror and

tends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) towards the

rea

r part of the vehicle.

When the sensors are active, the system

nitors the detection areas on both sides of the

vehicle and warns the driver about the possible

presence of vehicles in these areas.

While driving, the system monitors the detection

ne in three different situations:

 when you are being overtaken by a vehicle;

 when you are overtaking a vehicle;

 when a vehicle approaches from the side;

to check whether it is necessary to send a signal

the driver on both sides.

NOTE:

 The system does not alert the driver of the

presence of fixed objects (e.g. safety barriers,

poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circum

stances, the system may activate in the

pre

sence of these objects. This is normal and

does not indicate a system malfunction.

 The system does not alert the driver about the

presence of vehicles coming from the opposite

direction, in the adjacent lanes.

 If a trailer is hitched to the car, the system

automatically deactivates.

NOTE:

 For the system to operate properly, the rear

bumper area where the radar sensors are

located must stay free from snow, ice and dirt

gathered from the road surface.

 Do not cover the rear bumper area where the

radar sensors are located with any object (e.g.

adhesives, bike rack, etc.).

 If you wish to install a rear tow eye after

purchasing the vehicle, you will need to

deactivate the system via the radio system. To

access the function, select the following items

in sequence on the main menu:

a. “Driver Assistance”

. “Blind Spot Alert”

ear View

The system detects vehicles coming from the rear

rt of your vehicle on both sides and entering

the rear detection area with a difference in speed

of less than 25

mph (40 km/h) in relation to your

vehi

cle.

Overtaking Vehicles

If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, with a

fference in speed of less than approximately

mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the

ind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the

warning light on the door mirror of the

corresponding side illuminates.

If the difference in speed between the two

vehi

cles is greater than approximately 15 mph

(

5 km/h), the warning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System

The Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) system

sists the driver during reverse maneuvers in

the case of reduced visibility.

The RCP system monitors the rear detection areas

both sides of the vehicle to detect objects

moving toward the sides of the vehicle, with a

minimum speed between approximately 1

mph

km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving

a maximum speed of 21

mph (35 km/h), in areas

ch as parking lots.

The system activation is signaled to the driver by

audible warning.

NOTE:

 If the sensors are covered by objects or

vehicles, the system may not work as intended.

 For the system to operate correctly, the rear

bumper area where the radar sensors are

located must stay free from snow, ice and dirt

gathered from the road surface.

 Do not cover the rear bumper area where the

radar sensors are located with any object (e.g.

adhesives, bike rack, etc.).

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an

aid to help detect objects in the blind spot

zones. The BSM system is not designed to

detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even

if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM

system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,

glance over your shoulder, and use your turn

signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

SAFETY

Operating Mode

The system may be activated/deactivated via the

radio system. To access the function, select the

following items on the main menu in sequence:

1. “Driving Assistance”

“

Blind Spot Alert”

“

lind Spot Alert”, “Visual” Mode

When the system is enabled, the warning light

hin the door mirror on the side of the detected

object illuminates.

The visual warning on the mirror will blink if the

drive

r activates the turn signals, indicating a lane

change.

The warning light will be constant if the driver

sta

ys in the same lane.

“Blind Spot Alert” Function Deactivation

When the system is deactivated (“Blind Spot

Ale

rt” mode off), the BSM or RCP systems will not

emit an audible or a visual warning.

The BSM system will store the operating mode

that

was active when the engine was stopped.

Each time the engine is started, the operating

mode stored previously will be recalled and used.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rul

es and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

rec

eived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d`I

nnovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

bro

uillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

cau

sar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

irements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’e

xposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

pas

été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST (ABSA)

YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) System is to

help avoid/limit lateral collisions with cars

coming from adjacent lanes changing the

vehicle’s trajectory in order to try to keep it in the

detected lane.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back

up aid system. It is intended to be used to help

a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a

parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful

when backing up, even when using RCP.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing

up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury

or death.

(Continued)

The system warns the driver about the presence

of other vehicles in the detection area by illumi

nating the warning light located within the door

rror on the side in which the other vehicle was

detected and by means of an acoustic signal

and/or vibration on the steering wheel and/or

counter-steering torque on the steering wheel (if

the respective item on the “Driver Assistance”

menu is set up and then “Safety” is selected on

the radio system).

When the engine is started, the warning light

luminates briefly to signal the driver that the

system is active (the warning light comes on even

if the system is activated through the radio

system menu).

ABSA Indicator

Light

Sensors

The system uses radar sensors, located in the

r bumper, to detect the presence of vehicles

(cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) in the rear side

blind spots of the car.

The sensors are activated when any forward gear

engaged at a speed higher than about 6

mph

(

0 km/h), or when REVERSE (R) is engaged.

The sensors are temporarily deactivated when

car is stationary and in PARK (P).

The detection area of the system covers about a

ne on both sides of the car around 10

(

meters).

This area begins from the door mirror and

tends for about 20 ft (6 meters) towards the

rear part of the car.

When the sensors are active the system monitors

the

detection areas on both sides of the car and

warns the driver about the possible presence of

cars in these areas.

Rear Sensor Location

hile driving, the system monitors the detection

ne in three different situations:

 when you are being overtaken by a vehicle;

 when you are overtaking a vehicle;

 when a vehicle approaches from the side;

to check if it is necessary to intervene in order to

ep the vehicle inside the lane on both sides.

NOTE:

The system does not signal the presence of fixed

ject (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).

However, in some circumstances, the system

may activate in the presence of these

objects.This is normal and does not indicate a

system malfunction.

The system does not warn the driver about the

pre

sence of cars coming from the opposite direc-

tion, in the adjacent lanes.

WARNING!

 The accident risk persists despite the

application of torque to the steering wheel by

the ABSA system.

 Applying a torque that corrects the steering

wheel alignment does not always prevent an

accident. It is always the driver's responsi

bility to steer, brake or accelerate, especially

aft

er the ABSA system warning or after the

steering wheel torque intervention. The

driver is responsible for ensuring that there

are no pedestrians, other vehicles or

objectives along the direction of the vehicle.

Failure to comply with these precautions

may cause serious accidents and injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holding a

safe distance from the vehicle ahead

respecting the highway code in force in the

respective country.

 In some cases, the system could apply an

improper torque to the steering wheel. This

application can be interrupted at any time

turning the steering wheel in the opposite

direction.

WARNING!

SAFETY

Activation/deactivation

The system can be activated/deactivated using

the “Driver Assistance” menu in the radio system.

Select signal type, strength levels and sensitivity.

NOTE:

Vehicles with an active system will display the

fol

lowing screen, on the radio system.

ABSA Menu Screen

ystem intervention

The system intervenes in the following

nditions:

 the direction indicators have been turned on;

 there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane on the

same side of the direction indicator (blind spot

area);

 lane lines are not correctly detected;

 the driver tries to change lane intentionally.

If the system detects the presence of a vehicle in

the

rear side blind spots of the car, it applies a

torque on the steering wheel (if it has been set

through the “Settings” menu of the radio system),

in order to warn the driver of the need to keep the

car inside the lane and thus avoid collisions with

other vehicles.

The application of torque and vibration is

how

ever only available with car speed between

mph (60 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).

The application of torque, as well as of the

vib

ration, is suppressed/inhibited if:

 The torque given by the driver of the steering

wheel is high

 Lateral acceleration is high

 The trailer is connected to the correct control

module

 At least one hand is not detected on the

steering wheel for longer than a specific time

 The turn signal is turned off

NOTE:

The steering wheel torque is not applied if the

stem is unable to detect a lane and if the direc-

tion indicator for the appropriate side has not

en switched on.

The steering wheel detects the presence of the

dri

ver’s hands by a capacitive sensor installed in

the steering wheel and by the applied torque

measured on the steering column.

System availability

Aggressive driving of the car, or driving on the

dian lines, will prevent the correct operation of

the system.

In case of intervention of the stability and braking

stems (FCW, ESC, ABS) they will prevent the

system from operating.

Lane change will disable the system for a certain

riod of time.

The road must also comply with some specific

cha

racteristics, such as:

 Maximum/minimum lane width.

 Clearly identified and defined double yellow

lines and, for a limited period of time, a lane

with a single demarcation line.

NOTE:

In some cases, for a limited period of time, the

stem may be activate by a lane with a single

median line.

In cases of good road surface conditions, the

stem could correctly recognize other types of

valid lane markings (e.g. road edges, sidewalks,

etc.).

Hands Presence On The Steering Wheel

tection

The system is able to detect the presence of the

dri

ver’s hands on the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect the presence of

han

ds on the steering wheel for 0 to 6 seconds,

the following screen will be displayed on the

instrument cluster display. No acoustic warning

will be emitted in this case.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not

etected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence of

hands on the steering wheel from 6 to 15

seconds, the following screen will be displayed on

the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic

signal will sound if hands are not detected on the

steering wheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A continuous

signal will sound if hands are not detected on the

steering wheel for 12 to 15 seconds.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not

Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removed from

the

steering wheel, the LKA system will be

deactivated and a dedicated message will be

shown on the instrument cluster display. A short

acoustic signal will sound in this case.

In any of the situations above where the hands

are

removed from the steering wheel for more

than 6 seconds, it is necessary to reposition the

hands on the steering wheel.

Changing The System Sensitivity

The system's sensitivity can be set through the

rad

io system. Select the “Driver Assistance”

menu and then select “Comfort”. Sensitivity

“High” or “Low” can be selected.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System

The Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) system

sists the driver during reverse maneuvers in

the case of reduced visibility.

When the ABSA system is active, the RCP system

mon

itors the rear detection areas on both sides of

the vehicle to detect objects moving towards the

sides of the vehicle at a minimum speed between

0.6

mph and 2 mph (1 km/h and 3 km/h) from

obj

ects moving at a maximum speed of 22 mph

5 km/h).

These are generally occurrences that happen in

rking areas.

The system activation is signaled to the driver by

ans of a visual and audible warning.

NOTE:

If the sensors are covered by objects or vehicles,

the

system may not work as intended.

Changing the system sensitivity

To change the sensitivity and the strength of the

rque intervention on the steering wheel, refer to

“Settings” of the radio system.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING PLUS

(FCW+) S

YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This is a driving assistance system composed of a

radar located behind the front bumper and a

camera located in the center of the windshield.

Front Bumper Radar Location

indshield Camera Location

SAFETY

100

In the event of an imminent collision, the system

intervenes by automatically applying the vehicle’s

brakes to prevent a collision or reduce its effects.

The system provides the driver with audible and

visual signals through specific messages on the

instrument cluster display.

The audible and visual signals warn the driver

fore the system activates, depending on the

vehicle speed.

NOTE:

No warning signals are generated at speeds

low 20

mph (30 km/h).

The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if

possible frontal accident is detected (limited

braking). Signals and limited braking are

intended to allow the driver to react promptly, in

order to prevent or reduce the effects of a

potential accident.

In situations with the risk of collision, if the

stem detects no intervention by the driver, it

provides automatic braking to help slow the

vehicle and mitigate the potential frontal collision

(automatic braking). If intervention by the driver

on the brake pedal is detected, but not deemed

sufficient, the system may intervene in order to

improve the reaction of the braking system,

therefore reducing vehicle speed further

(additional assistance in braking stage).

The system will intervene automatically in case of

minent collision or impact against a pedestrian

crossing the road (speed under 31

mph (50 km/h)).

NOTE:

For safety reasons, when the vehicle has

opped, the brake calipers may remain blocked

for about two seconds. Make sure to press the

brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly forward.

Engagement/Disengagement

The system may be disengaged (and engaged

ain) in the “Driver Assistance” menu of the

Information and Entertainment system.

The system can be deactivated even with the

nition device in the ON position.

NOTE:

The system status can be changed with car at a

andstill only.

Select from among three operating modes:

 Warning and braking: the system (if active), in

addition to the visual and audible warnings,

provides limited braking, automatic braking

and additional assistance in the braking stage,

where the driver does not brake sufficiently in

the event of a potential frontal impact.

 Only warning: the system (if active), does not

provide limited braking, but guarantees

automatic braking or additional assistance in

the braking stage, where the driver does not

brake at all or not sufficiently in the event of a

potential frontal impact.

 Disabled: the system does not provide visual

and audible warnings, limited braking,

automatic braking or additional assistance in

the braking stage. The system will therefore

provide no indication of a possible collision.

Activation/Deactivation

The Forward Collision Warning system is

tivated whenever the engine is started

regardless of what is shown on the radio system.

Following a deactivation, the system will not warn

the

driver about the possible collision with a

preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting

selected in the radio system.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not

intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor

can FCW detect every type of potential

collision. The driver has the responsibility to

avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via

braking and steering. Failure to follow this

warning could lead to serious injury or death.

101

NOTE:

Each time the engine is started, the system is

tivated regardless of what setting was selected

when the engine was turned off.

This function is not active at a speed lower than

4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than 124 mph

(

km/h).

The system is active:

 Each time the engine is started

 When feature is selected within the radio

system

 When the ignition is in the ON position

 When the vehicle speed is between 2 mph

km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

 When the front seat belts are fastened

 The "Alfa DNA Pro" selector is not in RACE

position (if equipped)

NOTE:

If the safety belts of the front seats are not

rrectly fastened, the system will not intervene

on the braking system (only audible and visual

signals will be provided).

Changing The System Sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can be changed

thro

ugh the Information and Entertainment

system menu, choosing from one of the following

three options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far". Refer to

the description in the Information and

Entertainment system Supplement for how to

change the settings.

The default setting is "Medium". With this setting,

the

system warns the driver of a possible collision

with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a

standard distance, between that of the other two

settings.

With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the

stem will warn the driver of a possible collision

with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a

greater distance, thus providing the possibility of

acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually.

This setting provides the drivers with the

maximum possible reaction time to prevent a

potential collision.

With the option set to "Near", the system will alert

the

driver of a possible collision with the vehicle

in front when that vehicle is close. This setting

offers the driver a lower reaction time compared

to the "Medium" and "Far" settings, in the event of

a potential collision, but permits more dynamic

driving of the vehicle.

The system sensitivity setting is kept in the

mory when the engine is turned off.

System Limited Operation Warning

If a dedicated message is displayed, a condition

miting the system operation may have occurred.

The possible reasons of this limitation are

something is blocking the camera view or a fault.

If an obstruction is signaled, clean the area of the

rad

ar on the front bumper, and the camera area

on the windshield.

If a fault in the system is occurring, it will still be

ssible to drive the vehicle normally, but

automatic braking will not be available in the

event of an impending collision.

When the conditions limiting the system

fun

ctions end, this will go back to normal and

complete operation. Should the fault persist,

contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and a dedicated message

shown on the display, it means that there is a

fault with the system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,

t you are advised to contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Radar Indication Not Available

If conditions are such that the radar cannot

tect obstacles correctly, the system is

deactivated and a dedicated message appears

on the display. This generally occurs in the event

of poor visibility, such as when it is snowing or

raining heavily.

The function of this system can also be

mporarily reduced due to obstructions such as

mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases, a

dedicated message will be shown on the display

and the system will be deactivated. This message

can sometimes appear in conditions of high

reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice

or snow). When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, it will go back to normal and

complete operation.

In certain cases, this dedicated message could

displayed when the radar is not detecting any

vehicles or objects within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the reason

hind this message, check if the sensor is dirty.

It could be necessary to clean or remove any

obstructions in the area.

If the message appears frequently, even in the

absence of atmospheric conditions such as snow,

rain, mud or other obstructions, contact an

authorized dealer for a sensor alignment check.

SAFETY

102

In the absence of visible obstructions, manually

removing the decorative cover trim and cleaning

the radar surface could be required. Have this

operation performed at an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not install devices,

cessories or aerodynamic attachments in front

of the sensor or darken it in any way, as this can

compromise the correct functioning of the

system.

Frontal Collision Alarm With Active Braking — If

uipped

If this function is selected, the brakes are

erated to reduce the speed of the vehicle in the

event of potential frontal impact.

This function applies an additional braking

pre

ssure if the braking pressure applied by the

driver does not suffice to prevent potential frontal

impact.

The function is active with speed above 2 mph

km/h).

NOTE:

When using an automatic car wash it is recom-

mended to deactivate the system through the

ttings of the radio system. The system may

detect the presence of a car, a wall or another

obstacle and activate.

Driving In Special Conditions

In certain driving conditions, system intervention

ght be unexpected or delayed. The driver must

therefore be very careful, keeping control of the

vehicle to drive in complete safety.

 Driving close to a bend.

 The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.

 Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not

aligned in the driving lane.

 Lane change by other vehicles.

 Vehicles traveling at right angles to the vehicle.

NOTE:

 In particularly complex traffic conditions, the

driver can deactivate the system manually

through the Information and Entertainment

system.

 If the driver depresses the brake pedal fully or

makes an excessive steering maneuver during

system operation, the automatic braking

function may deactivate (e.g. to allow a

possible maneuverer to avoid the obstacle).

 The FCW system is automatically deactivated

when operating in race mode and a warning

message will be displayed on the instrument

cluster.

Driving Close To A Bend

When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system

y detect a vehicle in front of you, but not

driving in the same driving lane. In cases such as

these, the system may intervene.

Driving Around Wide Curves

he Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout

On a roundabout, the system could intervene

n it detects a vehicle ahead that is leaving the

roundabout.

Driving In Roundabouts

ehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or Not

igned In The Driving Lane

The system cannot detect vehicles in front of the

vehi

cle if they are outside the range of the radar

sensor and may not react to small vehicles, such

as bicycles or motorcycles.

Driving Near Small Vehicles

103

Lane Change By Other Vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the

same lane as your vehicle within the operating

range of the radar sensor, may cause the system

to intervene.

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

ehicles Traveling At Right Angles To The Vehicle

The system could temporarily react to a vehicle

tha

t is passing at right angles through the radar

sensor’s operating range.

Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range

FETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

guientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

ause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

uier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

usar su operación no deseada.

Changes or modifications made to this

uipment not expressly approved by Robert

BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to

operate this equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to

mply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial

environment. This equipment generates, uses,

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation

of this equipment in a residential area is likely to

cause harmful interference in which case the

user will be required to correct the interference at

his own expense.

Toutes modifications apportées à cet

éq

uipement qui ne sont pas expressément

homologuées par Robert BOSCH GmbH peuvent

annuler l'autorisation de la FCC de faire

fonctionner cet équipement.

Cet appareil a été vérifié et s'est révélé conforme

x normes applicables aux appareils

numériques de catégorie A, en vertu de la section

15 des règlements de la FCC. Ces normes sont

définies pour fournir une protection raisonnable

contre les interférences nuisibles lorsque

l'équipement est utilisé dans les installations

résidentielles. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut

émettre des ondes radioélectriques et, s'il n'est

pas installé et utilisé conformément au manuel

WARNING!

 The system has not been designed to

prevent impacts and cannot detect possible

conditions leading to an accident in

advance. Failure to take into account this

warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.

 The system may activate, assessing the

trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of

reflecting metal objects different from other

vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs,

barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level

crossings, gates, railways, objects near road

constructions sites or higher than the vehicle

(e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system

may intervene inside multi-story parking lots

or tunnels, or due to a glare on the road

surface. These possible activations are a

consequence of the real driving scenario

coverage by the system and must not be

regarded as faults.

 The system has been designed for road use

only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, the

system must be deactivated to avoid

unnecessary warnings. Automatic deacti

vation is signaled by the dedicated warning

ght/symbol switching on in the instrument

panel (refer to the instructions in the

"Warning Lights And Messages On The

Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel" for further information).

SAFETY

104

d’instruction, peut causer un brouillage

radioélectrique nuisible aux communications

radio. Le fonctionnement de cet équipement

dans une zone résidentielle est susceptible de

causer des interférences nuisibles; dans ce cas,

l'usager doit corriger les interférences à ses

propres frais.

Radio Frequency Exposure Information

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

ope

rating in conjunction with any other antenna

or transmitter.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

xposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour

un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de

20 cm de distance entre la source de

rayonnement et votre corps.

Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place au meme

end

roit ou utilise simultanement avec un autre

transmetteur ou antenne.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rul

es and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

rec

eived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d`I

nnovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

bro

uillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

cau

sar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

requ

irements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’e

xposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

pas

été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS)

The vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that sends the

inflation pressure information of each tire to the

control unit, and will signal the driver in the event

of insufficient tire pressure.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel

rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire

pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel

as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

Tire pressure will vary with temperature by

app

roximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F

(6.5°C). This means that when the outside

temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set

based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is

105

(Continued)

defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has

not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after a three hour

riod. The cold tire inflation pressure must not

exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded

into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing

And Maintenance” for information on how to

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire

pressure will also increase as the vehicle is

driven. This is normal, and there should be no

adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will signal the driver if pressure falls

low the warning limit for any reason, including

the effects of low temperature and normal loss of

pressure from the tire.

The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient tire

pre

ssure when pressure is equal to or greater

than the prescribed cold inflation level. Therefore,

if insufficient tire pressure is indicated by the (

)

warning light displaying in the instrument cluster,

crease the inflation pressure up to the

prescribed cold inflation value.

The system will automatically update, and the

“T

ire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will turn

off once the system receives the updated tire

pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for

up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

ord

er for the TPMS to receive this information.

NOTE:

The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tire pressure

dro

ps (e.g. if a tire bursts). In this case, proceed

with caution and avoid abrupt steering.

Operating Example

For example, your vehicle may have a

commended cold (parked for more than three

hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the

ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the

measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a

temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the

tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).

This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” Driving the

vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to

approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will still be on.

In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Warning Light” will turn off only after the tires are

inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard

pressure value.

Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication

If an insufficient pressure value is detected on

e or more tires, the

warning light in the

instrument cluster will display alongside the

dicated messages, the system will highlight the

tire or tires with insufficient pressure graphically,

and an acoustic signal will be emitted.

In this case, stop the vehicle, check the inflation

pre

ssure of each tire, and inflate the necessary

tire or tires to the correct cold inflation pressure

value, shown on the display or in the dedicated

TPMS menu.

TPMS Temporarily Disabled:

TPMS Check Message

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire

ssure Monitoring Warning Light” will flash on

and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid.

The system fault will also sound a chime. If the

ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

provided that the system fault still exists. The

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will turn

off when the fault condition no longer exists. A

system fault can occur due to any of the following:

 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving

next to facilities emitting the same radio

frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

 Installing some form of aftermarket window

tinting that affects radio wave signals.

CAUTION!

 The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS

pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on your

vehicle. Undesirable system operation or

sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the

same size, type, and/or style. The TPM

sensor is not designed for use on

aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a

poor overall system performance or sensor

damage. Customers are encouraged to use

OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature

operation.

 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause

the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an

aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended

that you take your vehicle to an authorized

dealer to have your sensor function checked.

 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the

valve stem, which could damage the TPMS

sensor.

CAUTION!

SAFETY

106

 Packed snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

 Using tire chains on the vehicle.

 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM

sensors.

After the punctured tire has been repaired with

the

original tire sealant contained in the Tire Kit,

the previous condition must be restored so that

the

warning light is off during normal driving.

TPMS Deactivation

The TPMS can be deactivated by replacing all four

hee

l and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel

and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS

sensors, such as when installing winter wheel

and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four

whee

l and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires

not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)

sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20

minutes

abo

ve 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,

the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain

on. The instrument cluster will display the

“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then

display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the

TPMS

will no longer chime or display the

“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the

instrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) will

remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel

and

tire assemblies (road tires) with tires

equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the

vehicle for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph

(24

km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “Tire

Pres

sure Monitoring Warning Light” will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The

instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” message and then display pressure

values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition

switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”

message will no longer be displayed, as long as

no system fault exists.

NOTE:

 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal

tire care and maintenance, or to provide

warning of a tire failure or condition.

 The TPMS should not be used as a tire

pressure gauge while adjusting your tire

pressure.

 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire will

cause the tire to overheat, and can lead to tire

failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an

urate tire pressure gauge, even if underin

flation has not reached the level to trigger

ill

umination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Warning Light”.

 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire

pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual

tire pressure in the tire.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rul

es and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

rec

eived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d`I

nnovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

bro

uillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

sar su operación no deseada.

107

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

requirements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’e

xposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

pas

été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in

your vehicle are the restraint systems:

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

EATURES

 Seat Belt Systems

 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air

Bags

 Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this

sec

tion may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on others.

If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Please pay close attention to the information in

this section. It tells you how to use your restraint

system properly, to keep you and your

passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to

min

imize the risk of harm from a deploying air

bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should

ways ride buckled up in the rear seat of a

vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the

vehi

cle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child

Restraints” in this section for further informa

tion) must be secured in the appropriate child

rest

raint or belt-positioning booster seat in a

rear seating position.

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a

rea

r-facing child restraint) must ride in the

front passenger seat, move the seat as far

back as possible and use the proper child

restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this

section for further information.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt

hind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided

th your child restraint to make sure that you

are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap

d shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should

moved back as far as practical to allow the

front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If

ur vehicle has side air bags, and deploy

ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate

force

fully into the space between occupants

and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to

modified to accommodate a disabled

person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”

section for customer service contact informa

tion.

WARNING!

 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a

rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If

the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not

transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

SAFETY

108

(Continued)

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent

driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road

may be a poor driver and could cause a collision

that includes you. This can happen far away from

home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives,

and

they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in

a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen

when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat

belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the

risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the

vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be

belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder

System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the

driver and outboard front seat passenger (if

ipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert

feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in

the ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch

first in the ON/RUN position, a chime will signal

for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front

seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front

passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain

on until both outboard front seat belts are

buckled. The outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated

hen

the vehicle is moving above a specified

vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard

front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped

with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when the outboard front passenger seat is

unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence

starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light

and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the

BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the

seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed

until the driver and occupied outboard front seat

passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver

should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat

belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equ

ipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the

vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning

sequence will begin until the seat belts are

buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is

not

active when the outboard front passenger

seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered

when an animal or other items are placed on the

outboard front passenger seat or when the seat

is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended

that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if

equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that

are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly

stowed.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped

with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only

duri

ng very sudden stops or collisions. This

feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt

to move freely with you under normal conditions.

However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and

reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The air

bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, the air bags

won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat

belt even though you have air bags.

 In a collision, you and your passengers can

suffer much greater injuries if you are not

properly buckled up. You can strike the

interior of your vehicle or other passengers,

or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your vehicle

are buckled up properly.

 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside

or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

 Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts.

109

(Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back

and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of

he front seat, and next to your arm in the rear

seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).

Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat

belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as

far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,

including the driver, should always wear their

seat belts whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position to minimize

the risk of severe injury or death in the event

of a crash.

 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you

could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow

these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

 Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted together can

crash into one another in a collision, hurting

one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder

belt or a lap belt for more than one person,

no matter what their size.

WARNING!

 A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk

of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces

won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,

but across your abdomen. Always wear the

lap part of your seat belt as low as possible

and keep it snug.

WARNING!

 A twisted seat belt may not protect you

properly. In a collision, it could even cut into

you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your

body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a

seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an

authorized dealer immediately and have it

fixed.

 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong

buckle will not protect you properly. The lap

portion could ride too high on your body,

possibly causing internal injuries. Always

buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest

you.

 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect

you properly. In a sudden stop, you could

move too far forward, increasing the

possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt

snugly.

 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is

dangerous. Your body could strike the inside

surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,

increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt

worn under the arm can cause internal

injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder

so that your strongest bones will take the

force in a collision.

WARNING!

 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not

protect you from injury during a collision. You

are more likely to hit your head in a collision

if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap

and shoulder belt are meant to be used

together.

 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. If your vehicle is

involved in a collision, or if you have

questions regarding seat belt or retractor

conditions, take your vehicle to an

authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA

Certified Collision Care Program facility for

inspection.

WARNING!

SAFETY

110

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert

the latch plate into the buckle until you hear

a “click.”

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt

Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies

w across your hips, below your abdomen.

To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull

up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt

if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on

the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk

of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the

sho

ulder and chest with minimal, if any slack

so that it is comfortable and not resting on

your neck. The retractor will withdraw any

slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button

the buckle. The seat belt will automatically

retract to its stowed position. If necessary,

slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted

lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible

the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 i

nches (15 to 30 cm) above

the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt

webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that

begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded

bbing. The folded webbing must enter the

slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it

ears the folded webbing and the seat belt is

no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,

the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted

upward or downward to position the seat belt

away from your neck. Push or squeeze the

anchorage button to release the anchorage, and

move it up or down to the position that serves you

best.

Adjustable Upper S

houlder Belt Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you

will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower

position, and if you are taller than average, you

will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher

position. After you release the anchorage button,

try to move it up or down to make sure that it is

locked in position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equ

ipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature

allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be

adjusted in the upward position without pushing

or squeezing the release button. To verify the

shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down

ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

ked into position.

111

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants

cluding pregnant women: the risk of injury in the

event of an accident is reduced for the mother

and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat

belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the

domen and across the strong bones of the

hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and

away from the neck. Never place the shoulder

belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped

with pretensioning devices that are designed to

remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a

collision. These devices may improve the

performance of the seat belt by removing slack

from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten

sioners work for all size occupants, including

se in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

lt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still

must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the

pretensioners are single use items. A deployed

pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be

replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped

with an Energy Management feature that may

help further reduce the risk of injury in the event

of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor

assembly that is designed to release webbing in a

controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions

are equipped with a Switchable Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a

child restraint system. For additional information,

refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The

Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”

section of this manual. The figure below

illustrates the locking feature for each seating

position.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

ocations

If the passenger seating position is equipped with

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only

pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to

comfortably wrap around the occupant’s

mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the

ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as

the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract

completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to

comfortably wrap around the occupant’s

mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle

until you hear a "click."

WARNING!

 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you

could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow

these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

 Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack

so that it is comfortable and not resting on

your neck. The retractor will withdraw any

slack in the shoulder belt.

 Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce

the effectiveness of the safety belt in a

crash.

 Always make all seat belt height adjustments

when the vehicle is stationary.

SAFETY

112

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is

automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still

retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.

Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child

restraint is installed in a seating position that has

a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old

and under should always be properly restrained

in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. B

uckle the combination lap and shoulder

lt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-

rd until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. A

llow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt

ret

racts, you will hear a clicking sound. This

indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto

matic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and

ow it to retract completely to disengage the

Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle

sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

(SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this

section may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on others.

If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you

a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon

necting wiring associated with the electrical Air

Bag

System Components. Your vehicle may be

equipped with the following Air Bag System

Components:

Air Bag System Components

 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

 Air Bag Warning Light

 Steering Wheel and Column

 Instrument Panel

 Knee Impact Bolsters

 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

 Seat Belt Buckle Switch

 Supplemental Side Air Bags

 Supplemental Knee Air Bags

 Front and Side Impact Sensors

 Seat Belt Pretensioners

 Seat Track Position Sensors

Air Bag Warning Light

The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the readiness of the

ctronic parts of the air bag system

whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch

is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the

air bag system is not on and the air bags will not

inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system

that

may deploy the air bag system even if the

battery loses power or it becomes disconnected

prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

ins

trument panel for approximately four to eight

seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch

is first in the ON/RUN position. After the

self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off.

If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the

system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,

WARNING!

 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a

rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If

the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not

transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

WARNING!

 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if

the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function

is not working properly when checked

according to the procedures in the Service

Manual.

 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to

restrain occupants who are wearing the seat

belt or children who are using booster seats.

The locked mode is only used to install

rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints

that have a harness for restraining the child.

113

either momentarily or continuously. A single

chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will

illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning

Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect

the air bag system. The diagnostics also record

the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag

system is designed to be maintenance free, if any

of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer

service the air bag system immediately.

 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on

during the four to eight seconds when the

ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.

 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the

four to eight-second interval.

 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-

tently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

rela

ted gauges are not working, the Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.

In this condition the air bags may not be ready to

inflate for your protection. Have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light

is detected, which could affect the

Sup

plemental Restraint System (SRS),

the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

will illuminate on the instrument panel. The

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until

the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will

sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light has come on and a fault has been

detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

comes on intermittently or remains on while

driving have an authorized dealer service the

vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the

Red

undant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this

manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder

belts for both the driver and front passenger. The

front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt

restraint systems. The driver front air bag is

mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger front air bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment.

The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are

embossed on the air bag covers.

Driver Front Air Bag

ssenger Front Air Bag

Dri

ver Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster

cation

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your

instrument panel could mean you won’t have

the air bag system to protect you in a collision.

If the light does not come on as a bulb check

when the ignition is first turned on, stays on

after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as

you drive, have an authorized dealer service

the air bag system immediately.

SAFETY

114

(Continued)

Passenger Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster

Location

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag

Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has

multistage driver and front passenger air bags.

This system provides output appropriate to the

severity and type of collision as determined by

the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which

may receive information from the front impact

sensors (if equipped) or other system

components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately

ring an impact that requires air bag

deployment. A low energy output is used in less

severe collisions. A higher energy output is used

for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/

front passenger seat belt buckle switch that

detects whether the driver or front passenger

seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch

may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or

fron

t passenger seat track position sensors that

may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional

protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front

air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of

injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front

air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,

including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole

collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset

collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and

cation of impact, front air bags may deploy in

crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but

that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle

celeration over time, vehicle speed and

damage by themselves are not good indicators of

whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

WARNING!

 Being too close to the steering wheel or

instrument panel during front air bag

deployment could cause serious injury,

including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your

arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a

rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If

the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not

transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

WARNING!

 No objects should be placed over or near the

air bag on the instrument panel or steering

wheel because any such objects could cause

harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe

enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

 Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually.

You may damage the air bags and you could

be injured because the air bags may no

longer be functional. The protective covers

for the air bag cushions are designed to open

only when the air bags are inflating.

 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The air

bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts

even though you have air bags.

WARNING!

115

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all

collisions, and also are needed to help keep you

in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it

signals the inflator units. A large quantity of

non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air

bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper

ssenger side of the instrument panel separate

and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to

their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less

time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air

bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain

the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees

of the driver and front passenger, and position

the front occupants for improved interaction with

the front air bags.

Supplemental Driver And Front

Passenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental

Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument

panel below the steering column and a Supple

mental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the

strument panel below the glove compartment.

The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide

enhanced protection during a frontal impact by

working together with the seat belts, preten

sioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental

at-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

are

located in the outboard side of the front

seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG”

or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the

outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant

jury during certain side impacts, in addition to

the injury reduction potential provided by the seat

belts and body structure.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

hen the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the

tboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The

inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into

the space between the occupant and the door.

The SAB moves at a very high speed and with

such a high force that it could injure occupants if

they are not seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.

Children are at an even greater risk of injury from

a deploying air bag.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

ABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side

r Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

ABICs) are located above the side windows. The

trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”

or “AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air

Bag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC) Location

WARNING!

 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee

impact bolsters in any way.

 Do not mount any accessories to the knee

impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,

citizen band radios, etc.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place

objects between you and the Side Air Bags;

the performance could be adversely affected

and/or objects could be pushed into you,

causing serious injury.

SAFETY

116

(Continued)

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and

other injuries to front and rear seat outboard

occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to

the injury reduction potential provided by the seat

belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side

ndows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside

edge of the headliner out of the way and covers

the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force

to injure occupants if they are not belted and

seated properly, or if items are positioned in the

area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

mplete ejection of vehicle occupants through

side windows in certain side impact events.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in

rtain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) determines whether the

deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular

impact event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. The side impact

sensors aid the ORC in determining the

appropriate response to impact events. The

system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags

on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts

that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In

side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy

independently; a left side impact deploys the left

Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys

the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by

itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side

llisions, including some collisions at certain

angles, or some side collisions that do not impact

the area of the passenger compartment. The Side

Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset

frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt

res

traint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time

than it takes to blink your eyes.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

tri

m, but they will open during air bag deploy-

ment.

WARNING!

 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or

other cargo up high enough to block the

deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering

above the side windows where the SABIC

and its deployment path are located should

remain free from any obstructions.

 In order for the SABICs to work as intended,

do not install any accessory items in your

vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add

an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do

not add roof racks that require permanent

attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof

of the vehicle for any reason.

WARNING!

 Occupants, including children, who are up

against or very close to Side Air Bags can be

seriously injured or killed. Occupants,

including children, should never lean on or

sleep against the door, side windows, or area

where the side air bags inflate, even if they

are in an infant or child restraint.

 Seat belts (and child restraints where

appropriate) are necessary for your

protection in all collisions. They also help

keep you in position, away from an inflating

Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from

the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their

seat belts properly and sit upright with their

backs against the seats. Children must be

properly restrained in a child restraint or

booster seat that is appropriate for the size

of the child.

WARNING!

 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not

lean against the door or window. Sit upright

in the center of the seat.

 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during

deployment could cause you to be severely

injured or killed.

 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The

Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to

restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side

Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your

seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

WARNING!

117

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are

designed to activate in certain rollover events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

determines whether deployment in a particular

rollover event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by

itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should

have deployed.

The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will

t deploy in all rollover events. The rollover

sensing system determines if a rollover event

may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences

a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment

is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will

deploy the side air bags and seat belt preten

sioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

mplete ejection of vehicle occupants through

side windows in certain rollover or side impact

events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors

the

internal circuits and interconnecting wiring

associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo

nents listed below:

 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

 Air Bag Warning Light

 Steering Wheel and Column

 Instrument Panel

 Knee Impact Bolsters

 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

 Seat Belt Buckle Switch

 Supplemental Side Air Bags

 Supplemental Knee Air Bags

 Front and Side Impact Sensors

 Seat Belt Pretensioners

 Seat Track Position Sensors

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

llisions. This does not mean something is

wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air

gs, any or all of the following may occur:

 The air bag material may sometimes cause

abrasions and/or skin reddening to the

occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.

The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns

or those you might get sliding along a carpet or

gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not

permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly

within a few days, or if you have any blistering,

see your doctor immediately.

 As the air bags deflate, you may see some

smoke-like particles. The particles are a

normal by-product of the process that

generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

inflation. These airborne particles may irritate

the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin

or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.

For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.

If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If

these particles settle on your clothing, follow

the garment manufacturer’s instructions for

cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have

ployed. If you are involved in another collision,

the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

NOTE:

 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air bag

deployment.

 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken

to an authorized dealer immediately.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners

cannot protect you in another collision. Have

the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the

seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an

authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the

Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced

as well.

SAFETY

118

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication

network remains intact, and the power remains

intact, depending on the nature of the event, the

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will

determine whether to have the Enhanced

Accident Response System perform the following

functions:

 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)

 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if

equipped)

 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has

power

 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as

long as the battery has power or for

minutes from the intervention of the

Enha

nced Accident Response System

 Unlock the power door locks

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any

of t

hese other functions in response to the

Enhanced Accident Response System:

 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the

HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC

Circulation Door

 Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine

• Electr

ic Motor (if equipped)

• El

ectric power steering

• Bra

ke booster

• El

ectr

ic park brake

• A

tomatic tran

smission gear selector

• Hor

• F

nt wiper

• He

adlamp washer

pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition

the OFF position and remove the key from the

ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Care

fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine

com

partment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting the

system and starting the engine. If there are no

fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical

devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset

the system by following the procedure described

below. If you have any doubt, contact an autho

rized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System

Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active,

a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn

the ignition switch from ignition ACC or ON/RUN

to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for

fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the

ground near the engine compartment and fuel

tank before resetting the system and starting the

engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and

right

turn signal lights, located in the instrument

panel, may both be blinking and will continue to

blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of

the road, you must follow the system reset

procedure.

119

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order

to be successful.

Customer Action

Customer Will See

NOTE:

Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).

2. Turn ignition ACC.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light BLINKS.

4. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is ON SOLID.

6. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light BLINKS.

8. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light BLINKS.

9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light is ON SOLID.

10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in

utral State).

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition OFF.

12. Turn ignition ACC. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one

nute or sequence will need to be repeated).

System is now reset and the engine may be started.

Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).

SAFETY

120

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or

less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

 How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

 Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

 How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

n-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi

tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,

e, and crash location) are recorded. However,

other parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

uipment is required, and access to the vehicle

or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such as law

enforcement, that have the special equipment,

can read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up

at all times, including babies and children. Every

state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in

proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you

can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

ckled up in a rear seat, if available. According

to crash statistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seats rather than

in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

ildren from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the

child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have

the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and

follow all the instructions and warnings in the child

restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels

attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure

tha

t it has a label certifying that it meets all

applicable Safety Standards. You should also

make sure that you can install it in the vehicle

where you will use it.

WARNING!

 Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when you need

it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to protect you. Do not modify the

components or wiring, including adding any

kind of badges or stickers to the steering

wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger

side of the instrument panel. Do not modify

the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running

boards.

 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell

anyone who works on your vehicle that it has

an air bag system.

 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air

bag system. The air bag may inflate

accidentally or may not function properly if

modifications are made. Take your vehicle to

an authorized dealer for any air bag system

service. If your seat, including your trim cover

and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way

(including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer

approved seat accessories may be used. If it

is necessary to modify the air bag system for

persons with disabilities, contact an

authorized dealer.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can

become a projectile inside the vehicle. The

force required to hold even an infant on your

lap could become so great that you could not

hold the child, no matter how strong you are.

The child and others could be badly injured or

killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be

in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

121

(Continued)

NOTE:

 For additional information, refer to

http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers

or call: 1–888–327–4236

 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:

https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/

child-car-seat-safety.html

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years

old or until they reach either the height or weight

limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types

of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant

carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the

vehic

le. It is recommended for children from birth

until they reach the weight or height limit of the

infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used

either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.

Convertible child seats often have a higher weight

limit in the rear-facing direction than infant

carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by

children who have outgrown their infant carrier

but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they

reach the highest weight or height allowed by

their convertible child seat.

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers

Children who are two years old or younger and

who

have not reached the height or weight limits

of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the

vehicle

Small Children

Children who are at least two years old or who

have

outgrown the height or weight limit of their

rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point

Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the

vehicle

Larger Children

Children who have outgrown their forward-facing

chil

d restraint, but are too small to properly fit

the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle

sea

t belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the

vehic

WARNING!

 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in

the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a

rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If

the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not

transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

WARNING!

SAFETY

122

(Continued)

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have

outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat

can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for

children who are over two years old or who have

outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children

should remain in a forward-facing child seat with

a harness for as long as possible, up to the

highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forwa

rd-facing limit for the child seat should use

a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s

seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with

knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while

the child’s back is against the seatback, they

should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The

child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in

the vehicle by the seat belt.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the

shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are

long enough to bend over the front of the seat

when their back is against the seatback, should

use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple

5-step test to decide whether the child can use

the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the

ck of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over

the

front of the vehicle seat – while the child

is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s

sho

ulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,

uching the child’s thighs and not the

stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the

who

le trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,

then

the child still needs to use a booster seat in

this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder

belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make

sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s

squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or

neck, move the child closer to the center of the

vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat

belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

 Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose

in a collision. The child could be badly injured

or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

 After a child restraint is installed in the

vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward

or rearward because it can loosen the child

restraint attachments. Remove the child

restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat

position. When the vehicle seat has been

adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

 When your child restraint is not in use,

secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or

LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the

vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In

a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the

occupants or seatbacks and cause serious

personal injury.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,

the shoulder belt will not protect a child

properly, which may result in serious injury or

death. A child must always wear both the lap

and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

123

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

ATCH) Restraint System

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint

chorage system called LATCH, which stands for

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The

LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for

installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are

two lower anchorages located at the back of the

seat cushion where it meets the seatback and

one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to

install LATCH-equipped child seats without using

the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions

may have a top tether anchorage but no lower

anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat

belt must be used with the top tether anchorage

to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Positions

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of

the Child + Child

Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower

Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower

Anchors + Top

Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Rear-Facing Child

straint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing Child

straint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Forward-Facing Child

straint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Lower Anchorage Symbol

(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY

124

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child

restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the

child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of

the

child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the

seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once

the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together

attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage

stem to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if

lowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster

seat owner’s manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the

ner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating

positions?

Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the

nter seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower

TCH anchorage?

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child

res

traints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH

lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the

center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages

in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front

ssenger seat?

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat

the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your

child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes

All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the

stallation of the child restraint. See “Head Restraints” in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

125

(Continued)

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars

that are found at the rear of the seat

cus

hion where it meets the seatback.

Each anchorage is under a cover with

the anchorage symbol on it. Lift the cover to

access the lower anchorage.

LATCH Anchora

ge Locations

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position

loc

ated on the back of the seat.

Tether Strap Anchorage Locations

TCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equ

ipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on

each side. Each will have a hook or connector to

attach to the lower anchorage and a way to

tighten the connection to the anchorage.

Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped

with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a

hook at the end to attach to the top tether

anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it

is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as

described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow

the seat belt, following the instructions below.

See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using

the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat

belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and

the tether strap of the child seat so that

you can more easily attach the hooks or

connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower

chorages for that seating position. If the

second row seat can be reclined, you may

recline the seat and/or raise the head

restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If

the rear seat can be moved forward and rear

ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it

its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat

forward to allow more room for the child seat.

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar

2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

3 — Tether Strap Anchorages

WARNING!

 Do not install a child restraint in the center

position using the LATCH system. This position

is not approved for installing child seats using

the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat

belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in

the center seating position.

 Never use the same lower anchorage to

attach more than one child restraint. Please

refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint” for typical installation instructions.

WARNING!

SAFETY

126

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the

child restraint to the lower anchorages in the

selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,

connect it to the top tether anchorage. See

the section “Installing Child Restraints Using

the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child

res

traint rearward and downward into the

seat. Remove slack in the straps according to

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc

tions.

6. T

est that the child restraint is installed tightly

pulling back and forth on the child seat at

the belt path. It should not move more than

inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install

a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are

not being used by other occupants or being used

to secure child restraints. An unused belt could

injure a child if they play with it and accidentally

lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a

child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle

the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt

interferes with the child restraint installation,

instead of buckling it behind the child restraint,

route the seat belt through the child restraint belt

path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat

belts are not toys and that they should not play

with them.

Installing Child Restraints Using The

Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap

belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions

are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep

the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the

child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a

locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”

into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing

out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the

ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing

is pulled back into the retractor.

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”

des

cription in “Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint

Systems” for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following

sec

tions for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

WARNING!

 Improper installation of a child restraint to

the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of

the restraint. The child could be badly injured

or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

 Child restraint anchorages are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used for adult

seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other

items or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING!

 Improper installation or failure to properly

secure a child restraint can lead to failure of

the restraint. The child could be badly injured

or killed.

 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

127

Installing A Child Restraint With A

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap

belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the

ating position. If the second row seat can

be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or

raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get

a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may

wish to move it to its rear-most position to

make room for the child seat. You may also

move the front seat forward to allow more

room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the

ret

ractor to pass it through the belt path of

the child restraint. Do not twist the belt

webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you

hea

r a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion

ght against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the

sho

ulder part of the belt until you have pulled

all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor.

Then, allow the webbing to retract back into

the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will

hear a clicking sound. This means the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If

is locked, you should not be able to pull out

any webbing. If the retractor is not

locked,

repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to

tighten the lap portion around the child

restraint while you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and

the

seating position has a top tether

anchorage, connect the tether strap to the

anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See

the section “Installing Child Restraints Using

the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly

pulling back and forth on the child seat at

the belt path. It should not move more than

inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so

hec

k the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if

necessary.

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child

restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to

attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the

Chil

d Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install

a fo

rward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight

limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front

pas

senger seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child

raint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also

allows contact.

Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes

All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the

tallation of the child restraint. See “Head Restraints” in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against

the

belt path of the child restraint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR

retractor.

WARNING!

 Improper installation or failure to properly

secure a child restraint can lead to failure of

the restraint. The child could be badly injured

or killed.

 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

SAFETY

128

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top

Tether Anchorage:

1. Look behind the seating position where you

plan to install the child restraint to find the

tether anchorage. You may need to move the

seat forward to provide better access to the

tether anchorage. If there is no top tether

anchorage for that seating position, move the

child restraint to another position in the

vehicle if one is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most

rect path for the strap between the anchor

and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped

with adjustable rear head restraints, raise

the head restraint, and where possible, route

the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower

the head restraint and pass the tether strap

around the outboard side of the head

restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child

res

traint to the top tether anchorage as

shown in the diagram.

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

Remove slack in the tether strap according to

the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

Center Tether Special Instructions

Center Tether Attachment:

1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center

hea

d restraint to the full down position.

2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and

hea

d restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child

res

traint to the center tether anchorage

located on the back of the seat.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to

the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc

tions.

TRANSPORTING PETS

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm

your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about

and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during

panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if

equ

ipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that

are secured by seat belts.

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing

car seat to any location in front of the car seat,

including the seat frame or a tether

anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a

rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage

that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See

the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the

location of approved tether anchorages in your

vehicle.

3 — Tether Strap Anchorages

WARNING!

 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could

lead to increased head motion and possible

injury to the child. Use only the anchorage

position directly behind the child seat to

secure a child restraint top tether strap.

 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear

seat, make sure the tether strap does not

slip into the opening between the seatbacks

as you remove slack in the strap.

129

(Continued)

SAFETY TIPS

TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

EXHAUST GAS

The best protection against carbon monoxide

entry into the vehicle body is a properly

maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the

exha

ust system, when exhaust fumes can be

detected inside the vehicle, or when the

underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have

a competent mechanic inspect the complete

exhaust system and adjacent body areas for

broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned

parts. Open seams or loose connections could

permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger

compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust

system each time the vehicle is raised for

lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE

NSIDE THE VEHICLE

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you

have

questions regarding the seat belt or

retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an

authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified

Collision Care Program facility for inspection.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four

to eight seconds as a bulb check when the

ign

ition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the

light is either not on during starting, stays on, or

turns on while driving, have the system inspected

at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After

the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System

has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is

removed. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized

dealer service the vehicle immediately.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in this

sec

tion for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode

and place the blower control on high speed. You

should be able to feel the air directed against the

windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if

your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.

Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with

the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch

pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely

attached using the floor mat fasteners so it

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the

accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe

operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

 Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a

collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

 Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts.

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you

unconscious and can eventually poison you.

To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety

tips:

 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or

in confined areas any longer than needed to

move your vehicle in or out of the area.

 If you are required to drive with the trunk/

liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all

windows are closed and the climate control

BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT

use the recirculation mode.

 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle

with the engine running, adjust your heating

or cooling controls to force outside air into

the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

WARNING!

SAFETY

130

(Continued)

PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD

AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and

uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,

glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or

sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.

Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the

tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation

pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake

lights and exterior lights while you work the

controls. Check turn signal and high beam

indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight

parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.

Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or

brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should

be located and corrected immediately.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or

stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat

fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere

with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals

and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat

using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install

you

r floor mat upside down or turn your floor

mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is

secured using the floor mat fasteners on a

regular basis.

 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT

FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any

other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an

itional floor mat on top of an existing floor

mat.

 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your

vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot

be properly attached and secured to your

vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,

only use a FCA approved floor mat for the

specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.

 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the

driver’s side floor area. To check for

interference, with the vehicle properly

parked with the engine off, fully depress the

accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal

(if present) to check for interference. If your

floor mat interferes with the operation of any

pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove

the floor mat from the vehicle and place the

floor mat in your trunk.

 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on

the passenger’s side floor area.

 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or

slide into the driver’s side floor area when

the vehicle is moving. Objects can become

trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch

pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle

control.

 NEVER place any objects under the floor mat

(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could

change the position of the floor mat and may

cause interference with the accelerator,

brake, or clutch pedals.

 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and

re-installed, always properly attach carpet to

the floor and check the floor mat fasteners

are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully

depress each pedal to check for interference

with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals

then re-install the floor mats.

 It is recommended to only use mild soap and

water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,

always check your floor mat has been

properly installed and is secured to your

vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by

lightly pulling mat.

WARNING!

131

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, be sure to adjust the

seat, the interior rear view mirror, and the door

mirrors, and fasten the seat belt correctly.

Never press the accelerator pedal before starting

the

engine.

If necessary, messages indicating the starting

proc

edure will be shown in the display.

STARTING PROCEDURE

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake and set the gear

lector to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedal without

uching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

If the engine doesn't start within a few

conds, you need to repeat the procedure.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized

dea

ler.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM

This system uses the key fob to start the engine

conveniently from outside the vehicle while still

maintaining security. The system has a range of

at least 300 feet (91

meters).

The remote starting system also activates the

mate control, the heated seats (if equipped),

and the heated steering wheel (if equipped),

depending on temperatures outside and inside of

the vehicle.

NOTE:

Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob

may

reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before

the

engine will remote start:

 Gear selector in PARK (P).

 Doors closed.

 Hood closed.

 Liftgate closed.

 Hazard switch off.

 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not

pressed).

 Battery at an acceptable charge level.

 PANIC button not pushed.

 System not disabled from previous remote

start event.

 Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing.

 Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped with

keyless ignition system).

 Fuel level meets minimum requirement.

WARNING!

 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

 Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

 Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

WARNING!

 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid

into the throttle body air inlet opening in an

attempt to start the vehicle. This could result

in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to

get it started. Vehicles equipped with an

automatic transmission cannot be started

this way. Unburned fuel could enter the

catalytic converter and once the engine has

started, ignite and damage the converter and

vehicle.

 If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start

from a booster battery or the battery in

another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to

“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”

for further information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

continuously crank the engine for more than

25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before

trying again.

STARTING AND OPERATING

132

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated

steering wheel and driver heated seat features

will automatically turn on in cold weather.

These features will stay on through the duration

remote start until the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN mode.

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer

Activation — If Equipped

When remote start is active and the outside

bient temperature is less than 39°F (4°C),

the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.

Exiting remote start will resume previous

operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer

is active.

The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and

eration will continue.

COLD WEATHER OPERATION

To prevent possible engine damage while starting

at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit

engine cranking when the ambient temperature

is less than –22°F (–30°C) and the oil

temperature sensor reading indicates an engine

block heater has not been used. An

externally-powered electric engine block heater is

available as optional equipment or from an

authorized dealer.

The message “plug in engine heater” will be

splayed in the instrument cluster when the

ambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C) at

the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to

avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.

EXTENDED PARK STARTING

If the vehicle has not been started or driven for at

least 30 days, it is advisable to follow the

indications below.

To start the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the ignition button

. If the engine does not start, wait five seconds

nd let the starter cool down and then repeat

the starting procedure

3. If the engine does not start after eight

ttempts, let the starter cool down for at least

10 seconds, and then repeat the starting

procedure

If the problem persists, contact an authorized

aler.

NOTE:

After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficult

arting, that can be noticed through rapid fatigue

of the starter, might also be due to a partially

drained battery. In this case, refer to "Jump

Starting" in "In Case Of Emergency".

IF ENGINE FAILS TO START

Starting the Engine with Key Fob Battery Run

Down or Drained

If the ignition does not respond when the button

pushed, the key fob battery might be run down

or drained. Therefore, the system does not detect

the presence of the key fob in the vehicle, and will

display a dedicated message.

In this case, follow the instructions outlined in

tarting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery" in

the "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" chapter, and

start the engine normally.

CAUTION!

Use of the recommended oil and adhering to

the prescribed oil change intervals is

important to prevent engine damage and

ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.

WARNING!

 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid

into the throttle body air inlet opening in an

attempt to start the vehicle. This could result

in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to

get it started. Vehicles equipped with an

automatic transmission cannot be started

this way. Unburned fuel could enter the

catalytic converter and once the engine has

started, ignite and damage the converter and

vehicle.

 If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start

from a booster battery or the battery in

another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to

“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”

for further information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

continuously crank the engine for more than

25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before

trying again.

133

AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE

NGINE

Proceed as follows:

 Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a

reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly.

 It is recommended to wait until the digital

engine coolant temperature indicator starts to

rise for maximum performance.

STOPPING THE ENGINE

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that is not

ngerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

With engine idling, push the ENGINE START/

OP button on the steering wheel to STOP

the engine.

NOTE:

Do not leave the ignition in ACC mode when the

eng

ine is off.

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater

than

5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold

the

ignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP

button three times consecutively within a few

seconds. The engine will shut down, and the

ignition will be placed in the ACC mode

With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to

away from the vehicle taking the key fob with

you, without the engine switching off. The vehicle

will inform about the absence of the key on board,

only if the doors are closed.

Stopping the engine (cycling from the ACC to the

OFF

position) the accessories are still powered for

about three minutes, or until a door is opened.

When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window

swi

tches remain active for three minutes.

Opening a front door will cancel this function.

After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the

tem

perature inside the engine compartment to

cool before shutting off the engine.

TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN

It is recommended before switching the vehicle

off, to keep the engine idling for a few minutes so

that the turbocharger can be suitably lubricated.

This procedure is particularly recommended after

severe driving.

After a full load operation, keep the engine idling

for t

hree to five minutes before switching it off.

This time allows the lubricating oil and the engine

coo

lant to eliminate the excessive heat from

combustion chamber, bearings, inner

components and turbocharger.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —

IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and

permits quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical

out

let with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),

the

engine block heater is recommended. For

ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the

engine block heater is required.

Follow the steps below to properly use the engine

blo

ck heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (access

or on the passenger side wiper cowl).

2. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and

ug it into a grounded, three-wire extension

cord.

3. After the vehicle is running, properly stow

ay behind access door on the passenger

side wiper cowl.

NOTE:

 The engine block heater cord is a factory

installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,

heater cords are available from anauthorized

dealer.

 The engine block heater will require 110 Volts

AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater

element.

 The engine block heater must be plugged in at

least one hour to have a warming effect on the

engine and at least four hours to have a

warming effect when ambient temperatures

are below -20°F (-29°C).

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block

heater cord before driving. Damage to the

110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause

electrocution.

STARTING AND OPERATING

134

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

ENGINE BREAK-IN

For both engines, use the following engine

break-in recommendations:

Despite modern technology and World Class

Manu

facturing methods, the moving parts of the

engine must still wear in with each other. This

wearing in occurs mainly during the first

500

miles (805 km) and continues through the

first

oil change interval.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its

first

few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-

tion. This should be considered a normal part of

break-in period and not interpreted as an indi

cation of a problem. Please monitor your oil level

duri

ng the break-in period and add oil as

required.

It is recommended for the operator to observe the

foll

owing driving behaviors during the new vehicle

break-in period:

0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):

 Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for

an extended period of time.

 Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not

more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.

 Avoid aggressive braking.

 Drive with the engine speed less than

3,500 RPM.

 Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph

(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):

 Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not

more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration

in lower gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).

 Avoid aggressive braking.

 Drive with the engine speed less than

5,000 RPM.

 Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph

(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

 Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting

manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPM

when possible.

 Do not perform sustained operation with the

accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.

 Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph

(136

km/h) and observe local speed limits.

For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):

 Do not participate in track events, sport driving

schools, or similar activities during the first

1,500

miles (2,414 km).

NOTE:

Monitor engine oil with every refueling and add if

nec

essary. Oil and fuel consumption may be

higher through the first oil change interval.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE

The vehicle is equipped with electric park brake

to guarantee better use and optimal performance

compared to a manually operated park brake.

The electric parking brake features a switch

loc

ated on the center console, a caliper with

motor for each rear wheel, and an electronic

control module.

Electric Park Brake Switch

The

electric parking brake can be engaged in two

ways:

 Manually, by pulling the switch on the center

console.

 Automatically, in “Safe Hold” or “Auto Park

Brake” conditions.

NOTE:

Normally, the electric parking brake is engaged

aut

omatically when the engine is stopped. This

function can be deactivated/activated on the

Information and Entertainment system by

selecting the following items in sequence on the

main menu: “Settings”, “Driver Assistance” and

“Automatic Parking Brake”.

In addition to engaging the electric park brake,

alo

ng with steering and positioning chocks in

front of the wheels (when on a steep slope), you

must always place the vehicle in the PARK (P)

mode before leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery

mus

t be replaced in order to unlock the electric

park brake.

135

(Continued)

Engaging The Park Brake Manually

Briefly pull the switch located on the center

nsole to manually engage the electric park

brake when the vehicle is stationary.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle

whe

n engaging the electric parking brake.

A slight movement of the brake pedal may be

tected when engaging the electric parking

brake with the brake pedal pressed.

With the electric parking brake engaged, the

AKE warning light on the instrument panel and

the switch will illuminate.

If, under exceptional circumstances, the use of

the

brake is required with the vehicle in motion,

keep the switch on the center console pulled as

long as the brake action is necessary.

The BRAKE warning light may turn on with the

hyd

raulic system temporarily unavailable; in this

case, braking is controlled by the motors.

The brake lights will also automatically turn on in

the

same way as normal braking with the use of

the brake pedal.

Release the switch on the center console to stop

the

braking action with the vehicle in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle is braked

til a speed below 1.9

mph (3 km/h) is reached

d the switch is kept pulled, the park brake will

definitively engage.

NOTE:

Driving the vehicle with the electric parking brake

gaged, or using it several times to slow down

the vehicle, may cause severe damage to the

braking system.

Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Manually

In order to manually release the park brake, the

nition should be in the ACC mode. Press the

brake pedal, and then push the switch on the

center console briefly.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle,

d a slight movement of the brake pedal may be

detected during disengagement.

After disengaging the electric parking brake, the

AKE warning light on the instrument panel and

the light on the switch will turn off.

If the BRAKE warning light on the instrument

nel remains on with the electric parking brake

disengaged, this indicates a fault: in this case,

contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

 Always engage the electric parking brake when

parking the vehicle to prevent injury or damage

caused by the unexpected movement of the

vehicle.

 Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of

the electric parking brake.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE OPERATING

ODES

The electric park brake may operate as follows:

 “Dynamic Operating Mode”: this mode is

activated by pulling the switch repeatedly while

driving.

 “Static Engagement and Release Mode”: with

the vehicle stationary, the electric park brake

can be activated by pulling the switch on the

center console once. Push the switch and the

brake pedal at the same time to disengage the

brake.

 “Drive Away Release” — if equipped: the

electric park brake will automatically

CAUTION!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failure

warning light on, some functions of the electric

parking brake are deactivated. In this case the

driver is responsible for brake activation and

vehicle parking in complete safety conditions.

WARNING!

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

 Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or

the gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

 Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to

brake failure and a collision.

 Always fully apply the park brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause

damage or injury.

WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING

136

disengage with the driver side seat belt

fastened and the detection of an action

performed by the driver to move the vehicle

(DRIVE [D] or REVERSE [R]). This feature can

be turned on or off in the Information and

Entertainment System.

NOTE:

If the car is equipped with carbon-ceramic brake

scs it is necessary to fasten the seat belts or

turn off the electric park brake before starting to

avoid damages to the ceramic brake discs.

 “Safe Hold”: if the vehicle speed is lower than

1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear selector is not in

RK (P) position and the driver's intention of

leaving the vehicle is detected, the electric

park brake will automatically engage to hold

the vehicle in safety conditions.

 “Auto Park Brake”: if the vehicle speed is

below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric park

bra

ke will automatically engage when the gear

selector is in PARK (P) position. The light on the

switch located on the center console switches

on together with the BRAKE warning light on

the instrument panel when the park brake is

engaged and applied to the wheels. Each

automatic park brake engagement can be

canceled by pushing the switch on the center

console and at the same time moving the gear

selector for the transmission to position

PARK (P).

SAFE HOLD

Safe Hold is a safety function that automatically

engages the electric park brake in the event of a

dangerous condition for the vehicle.

The electric park brake engages automatically to

pre

vent vehicle movement if:

 The vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h).

 A transmission operating mode different from

PARK (P) is activated.

 The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

 The driver side door is open.

 No attempts to apply pressure on the brake

pedal have been detected.

 The vehicle is parked on roads with a slope of

more than 4%.

The “Safe Hold” function can be temporarily

sabled by pushing the EPB switch located on

the center console and the brake pedal at the

same time, with the vehicle stationary and the

driver side door open.

Once disabled, the function will activate again

en the vehicle speed reaches 12

mph (20 km/h)

the ignition is cycled to OFF and then to ACC.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically

controlled 8-speed automatic transmission

where gear shifting automatically takes place,

depending on the vehicle usage instantaneous

parameters (vehicle speed, grade, and

accelerator pedal position).

Manual gear shifting can still occur thanks to the

“S

equential” mode position for the gear selector.

WARNING!

 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate

quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or

something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly

pressing the brake pedal.

 Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while

the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,

always apply the park brake, shift the

transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition

OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the

transmission is locked in PARK, securing the

vehicle against unwanted movement.

 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure

the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the

key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured.

Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and

do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN or

ACC mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

137

DISPLAY

The following information is shown on the

dedicated area of the display:

 In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P, R, N, D)

and with "D" the current gear number.

 In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): the mode

(M), the current gear and the double or single

gear shift request, both up and down (single or

double arrow).

Gear Display

GEAR SELECTOR

The gear functioning is controlled by the gear

selector, which can assume the following

positions:

 P = PARK

 R = REVERSE

 N = NEUTRAL

 D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed)

 AutoStick: + manually shift to higher gear; –

manually shift to lower gear

The positions diagram is illustrated on the top of

the

gear selector.

Gear Selector Center Console

The

letter corresponding to the mode selected on

the

gear selector lights up and appears on the

instrument cluster display.

To select a mode, move the gear selector forward

or re

arward while pressing the brake pedal. To

engage REVERSE (R), press the brake pedal

together with the gear selector button.

Gear Selector

The

gear selector is a joystick style shifting

mec

hanism which returns to the center position

automatically. It can be pushed forward twice and

rearward twice, based on the starting condition.

The PARK (P) mode can be enabled/disabled by

pus

hing the PARK (P) button. PARK (P) mode is

automatically activated if the following conditions

are met simultaneously:

 DRIVE (D) mode or REVERSE (R) mode is active

 The vehicle’s speed is close to 0 mph (0 km/h)

 The brake pedal is released

 The driver’s seat belt is not fastened

 The driver’s door is open

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the

following precautions are not observed:

 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only

after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above

idle speed.

 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

1 — Gear Selector

2 — PARK (P) Button

3 — Gear Selector Button

STARTING AND OPERATING

138

(Continued)

To transition the vehicle into REVERSE (R) mode

from DRIVE (D) mode, or into DRIVE (D) mode

from REVERSE (R) mode, it is necessary to move

the gear selector by pushing the gear selector

button.

When using AutoStick, activate it by moving the

gea

r selector from DRIVE (D) to the left and then

forward toward the - symbol or backward toward

the + symbol and the gear is changed.

To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from position

NEU

TRAL (N) to position DRIVE (D) or REVERSE

(R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or

stopped, and the brake pedal must also be

pressed.

NOTE:

 DO NOT accelerate while shifting from position

PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to another position.

 After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds

before accelerating. This precaution is partic-

ularly important with engine cold.

 It is not possible to select NEUTRAL (N) mode

from PARK (P) mode.

TRANSMISSION OPERATING MODES

PARK (P)

The transmission is locked in this mode. The

eng

ine can be started in this mode.

NOTE:

Never try to engage PARK (P) mode when the

vehic

le is moving. Before leaving the vehicle,

make sure this mode is engaged (letter P shown

on the display and gear selector) and that the

park brake is engaged.

When parking on a flat surface, first engage the

PAR

K (P) mode and then engage the electric park

brake.

When parking uphill, before activating the PARK

(P)

mode, engage the electric park brake.

Otherwise, it could be difficult to engage the (P)

mode.

To check that the PARK (P) mode is actually

eng

aged, make sure (P) is illuminated on the

display and on the gear selector.

WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute

for the park brake. Always apply the park

brake fully when parked to guard against

vehicle movement and possible injury or

damage.

 Your vehicle could move and injure you and

others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to

move the gear selector out of PARK with the

brake pedal released. Make sure the

transmission is in PARK before leaving the

vehicle.

 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate

quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or

something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

 Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift

the transmission into PARK, and turn the

ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF

mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,

securing the vehicle against unwanted

movement.

 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure

the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the

key fob from the vehicle, and lock the

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

Children should be warned not to touch the

park brake, brake pedal or the transmission

gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and

do not leave the ignition in the ACC mode. A

child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

WARNING!

139

REVERSE (R)

Select this mode only with the vehicle at a

standstill.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for

prol

onged periods with the engine running. The

engine may be started in this range. Apply the

electric park brake and shift the transmission into

PARK (P) if you must leave the vehicle.

DRIVE (D)

Use this mode in normal driving conditions.

Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or REVERSE

(R)

modes must take place only after releasing

the accelerator pedal, with vehicle at a standstill

and brake pedal pressed.

This mode ensures automatic engagement of the

mos

t suitable gears for driving needs and

maximum fuel economy in terms of consumption.

In this position, the transmission shifts the gears

aut

omatically, selecting the most suitable for

forward driving among those available as you go.

In this way the vehicle's optimal driving character

istics are provided for all conditions.

AutoStick

In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for sport

rivi

ng, when the vehicle is driven with a heavy

load, on slopes, when towing heavy trailers), it is

recommended to use the AutoStick (sequential

shifting) mode to select and keep a lower fixed

ratio.

In these conditions, the use of a lower gear

imp

roves vehicle performance and prevents

overheating.

It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) mode to

Aut

oStick mode regardless of vehicle speed.

Activation

Starting from DRIVE (D) mode, to activate the

seq

uential drive mode, move the gear selector to

the left (– and + indication of the trim). The gear

engaged will be shown on the display.

Shifting is made by moving the gear selector

forwa

rd, toward symbol – or backward, toward

symbol +.

Steering Column Mounted Shift Paddles —

If Equipped

The gear can be manually shifted also by using

paddles behind the steering wheel, pull the

right paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and

release it to engage a higher gear, perform the

same operation with the left paddle (-) to engage

a lower gear.

Steering Column Mounted Shift Paddles

NOTE:

If only one manual shift is necessary, the letter (D)

wil

l remain on the display with the engaged gear

next to it.

CAUTION!

 Before moving the transmission gear

selector out of PARK, you must push the

ignition button to cycle from OFF mode to the

ACC mode, and also press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, damage to the gear selector

could result.

 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,

as this can damage the drivetrain.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off

the ignition to coast down a hill. These are

unsafe practices that limit your response to

changing traffic or road conditions. You might

lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

STARTING AND OPERATING

140

Deactivation

To deactivate the sequential driving mode, bring

the gear selector back in position DRIVE (D)

("automatic" driving mode).

NOTE:

 To select the correct gear for maximum

deceleration (engine brake), just keep the gear

paddle pulled (–): the transmission goes to an

operating mode in which the vehicle can slow

down easily.

 The vehicle will keep the gear selected by the

driver until the safety conditions allow it.

 This means, for example, that the system will

try to prevent the engine from switching off,

automatically downshifting if the engine speed

is too low.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME

ODE

Transmission function is monitored electronically

for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected

that could result in transmission damage,

Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated.

In this condition, the transmission stays in fourth

gea

r, regardless of the selected gear. Positions

PARK (P), REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) still work.

The symbol might light up in the instrument

cluster.

Temporary Failure

In the event of a momentary problem, the

ran

smission can be reset to regain all forward

gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if

ssible. If not, shift the transmission to

NEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine

rns off.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then restart the

gine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the

pro

blem is no longer detected, the transmis-

sion will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your

arl

iest possible convenience. An authorized

dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if

the problem could reoccur. If the transmission

cannot be reset, service is required at an autho

rized dealer.

BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK

YSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake

Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that

holds the gear selector in PARK (P) unless the

brakes are applied.

This system prevents you from moving the gear

sel

ector from position PARK (P) unless the brakes

are applied.

To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the

ign

ition must be cycled to the ON/RUN position

(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must

be pressed.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Disabling

Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the vehicle,

con

veyor vehicle washing systems), inhibit the

automatic activation of PARK (P) mode when

stopping the engine. To do so, follow the

directions below:

1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill.

lace the transmission in the NEUTRAL (N)

sition.

3. Push the ignition button for at least three

conds.

The automatic activation of PARK (P) when the

eng

ine is stopped can also be deactivated on the

Information and Entertainment system by

selecting the following functions on the main

menu: "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and

"Automatic Parking Brake".

IMPORTANT NOTES

Failure to comply with what is reported below may

damage the transmission:

 Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the vehicle

at a standstill.

 Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass from

REVERSE to another mode only with the

vehicle at a standstill and engine idling.

 Do not change between PARK (P), REVERSE

(R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) modes with

engine running at a speed above idling.

 Before activating any transmission operating

mode, fully depress the brake pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking

on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could

lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,

causing a collision or personal injury.

141

(Continued)

NOTE:

The unexpected movement of the vehicle can

inj

ure the occupants or people nearby. Do not

leave the vehicle with engine running: before

getting out of the passenger compartment always

engage the electric park brake, select the PARK

(P) mode, stop the engine.

ALFA DNA SELECTOR

ALFA DNA SYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA system

selector (located on the center console). There

are up to four modes of operation to be selected

according to driving style and road conditions:

Alfa DNA Pro System Selector

 d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).

 n = Natural (mode for driving in normal

conditions).

 a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving mode for

maximum fuel savings).

 RACE = track race driving mode (if equipped).

 = Adjusts the calibration of the active

suspension (if equipped).

Unlike the other modes, the RACE position does

not

latch; therefore, by rotating the selector to

RACE, it will return to its initial position "d".

WARNING!

 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate

quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or

something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

 Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift

the transmission into PARK, and turn the

ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF

mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,

securing the vehicle against unwanted

movement.

 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure

the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the

key fob from the vehicle, and lock the

vehicle.

 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and

do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN or

ACC mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

 Only engage the gear with engine at idling

while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the

transmission temperature exceeds the

normal operating limits, the transmission

control unit may change the gear

engagement order and reduce the drive

torque. If the transmission overheats, it

could operate incorrectly until it cools down.

 When using the vehicle with extremely low

external temperatures, the transmission

operation may change depending on the

engine and transmission temperature, as

well as vehicle speed. Activation of the

torque converter clutch and of the eighth

gear is inhibited until the transmission oil is

correctly warmed up. Complete operation of

the transmission will be enabled as soon as

the fluid temperature reaches the

predefined value.

WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING

142

On the instrument panel display, the different

modes are characterized by different colors:

 Natural - Blue

 Dynamic - Red

 Advanced Efficiency - Green

 RACE - Yellow

Mode Display

Each driving mode is graphically different in

fram

e color and contents of each individual

"performance" screen.

DRIVING MODES

"Natural" Mode

“Natural” Mode is characterized by reduced

gine performance and ECO shifting strategy for

the automatic transmission.

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter

"; the display will light up in blue.

Natural Mode

he "Performance" screen graphically reproduces

some parameters closely linked to the efficiency

of the driving style, with a view to limiting

consumption.

Natural Mode Performance Display

Dynamic" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter

"; the display will light up in red.

Dynamic Mode

SC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds

that ensure more enjoyable, sportier driving while

guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.

Engine and transmission: adoption of sports

pping.

Dynamic Mode Performance Display

WARNING!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator

pedal increases considerably. Consequently,

driving is less fluid and comfortable.

143

The "Performance" screen displays parameters

related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate

the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations

(G-meter information), considering gravity

acceleration as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the

right.

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter

“

”; the display will light up in green.

Advanced Efficiency Mode

SC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds

med at ensuring maximum safety in low-grip

driving conditions. It is advisable to select

“Advanced Efficiency” mode in the presence of

low-grip road surfaces.

Engine and transmission: standard response.

The “Performance” screen graphically displays

me parameters closely related to the vehicle

acceleration, deceleration and gear selector.

Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display

“

RACE” Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to position

“

ACE”, the displays light up in yellow.

RACE Mode

ngine and transmission: adoption of sports

pping.

The “Performance” screen displays parameters

rel

ated to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate

the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations

(G-meter information), considering gravity

acceleration as a reference unit.

1 — Acceleration

2 — Deceleration

3 — Gear Selector

WARNING!

 It is recommended to activate this mode at

the track.

 In "RACE", the sensitivity of the accelerator

pedal increases considerably. Consequently,

driving is less fluid and comfortable.

STARTING AND OPERATING

144

The screen displays the lateral and longitudinal

acceleration peaks.

RACE Mode Performance Display

NOTE:

If the brake system overheats, this is communi-

cated by the Information and Entertainment

tem. In this case, allow the system to cool for

a few minutes by driving the vehicle normally

without operating the brakes.

Driving Mode Deactivation

To deactivate any driving mode, simply move the

sel

ector to any other mode.

NOTE:

 The next time that the engine is started, the

"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and

"Natural" mode selected previously is retained.

The system will reactivate in "Advanced

Efficiency", "Dynamic" or "Natural" mode,

depending on which mode was selected

before the engine was stopped.

 When the engine is next started, the "RACE"

mode selected previously is not retained. The

system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION

(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle's electronic suspension management

system is aimed at optimizing the vehicle's

performance.

The system continuously monitors the damping

of t

he suspensions through the actuator installed

on each shock absorber. This way, the calibration

of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the

conditions of the road surface and to the dynamic

conditions of the vehicle, improving its comfort

and road holding.

The driver can choose, even while driving, (only in

"Dy

namic” mode), between two types of

suspension calibration: a more sporty or a more

comfortable one.

By pushing the button, the system changes the

shoc

k absorber calibration.

Alfa Active Suspension Button

case of a system failure, the symbol and a

dedicated message will be shown on the

ins

trument panel display.

STOP/START SYSTEM

The Stop/Start system automatically shuts off

the engine during a vehicle stop if the required

conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal will automatically restart the

engine.

The function was developed to increase vehicle

effic

iency by reducing fuel consumption, gas

emissions, and sound pollution.

NOTE:

When the Stop/Start system stops the engine,

the

power steering is also disabled.

OPERATING MODE

Stopping The Engine

With the vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal

pres

sed, the engine switches off if the gear

selector is in a position other than REVERSE (R).

The system does not operate when the gear

sel

ector is in REVERSE (R), in order to make

parking maneuvers easier.

In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off

disabled to make the “Hill Start Assist” function

available (works only with running engine).

NOTE:

The engine can only be automatically stopped

afte

r having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After

automatic restart, the vehicle only needs to

exceed a speed of 0.3

mph (0.5 km/h) to stop

the

engine.

Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol

lighting up on the instrument cluster display.

145

Restarting The Engine

To restart the engine, release the brake pedal or,

turn the steering wheel slightly (if equipped).

With the brake pressed and the transmission in

aut

omatic mode DRIVE (D), the engine will restart

by shifting to REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to

“AutoStick”.

With brake pressed if the gear selector is in

“Au

toStick” mode, the engine will restart by

shifting to PARK (P) or by moving the selector

to + or -.

SYSTEM MANUAL ACTIVATION/

EACTIVATION

To manually activate/deactivate the system,

push the button located in the control panel on

the left of the steering wheel.

Stop/Start Button

stem Activation

The activation of the system is indicated by the

symbol lighting up on the display. In this

condition, the light on the button is off.

System Deactivation

A message will appear on the display when the

tem is deactivated. In this condition, the light

on the button is on.

NOTE:

Each time the engine is started, the system is

act

ivated regardless of where it was when it was

previously switched off.

POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES

OT AUTOSTOP

For higher comfort and increased safety, and to

reduce emissions, there are certain conditions

where the engine will not autostop despite the

system being active, such as:

 Engine still cold.

 Extreme cold outside temperature.

 Battery not sufficiently charged.

 Driver's door not shut.

 Driver's seat belt not fastened.

 Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking

maneuvers).

 With the automatic climate control active, an

adequate cabin heating or cooling comfort has

not been reached or with MAX-DEF function

active.

 During the first period of use, to initialize the

system.

 Steering angle beyond threshold.

ENGINE RESTARTING CONDITIONS

Due to comfort, emission control, and safety

reasons, the engine can restart automatically

without any action by the driver, under special

conditions, such as:

 Battery not sufficiently charged.

 Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the

brake pedal is pressed repeatedly).

 Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on roads

with a grade).

 Engine stopping by the Stop/Start system for

more than approx. three minutes.

 With the automatic climate control active, an

adjustment in cabin heating or cooling is made

or with MAX-DEF function active.

SAFETY FUNCTIONS

When the engine is stopped through the Stop/

Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt,

opens the driver's or passenger's door, or opens

the hood from inside the vehicle, the engine can

be restarted only by using the ignition.

This condition is indicated to the driver both

throu

gh a buzzer and a message on the

instrument cluster display.

ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION

If the driver does not carry out any action for more

than three minutes after the automatic engine

restart, the Stop/Start system will switch off the

engine in order to prevent fuel consumption.

In this situation, the engine can only be restarted

usi

ng the ignition device.

NOTE:

It is possible to keep the engine running by deac-

tivating the system.

STARTING AND OPERATING

146

IRREGULAR OPERATION

In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Start

system is deactivated.

For failure indications, refer to "Warning Lights

d Messages" paragraph in "Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel".

VEHICLE INACTIVITY

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the battery

is replaced), special attention must be paid to the

disconnection of the battery power supply.

Proceed as follows:

Remove connector from socket to disconnect

nsor (battery status monitoring) installed on

the negative pole of the battery. This sensor

should never be disconnected from the pole

except if the battery is replaced.

Battery Power Supply

NOTE:

After setting the ignition to OFF and having closed

the

driver side door, wait at least one minute

before disconnecting the electrical supply from

the battery. When reconnecting the electrical

supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition

is in the OFF mode and the driver side door is

closed.

SPEED LIMITER

DESCRIPTION

This feature allows the driver to program the

maximum speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:

The maximum set speed can be exceeded by

ntinuing to press the accelerator pedal.

The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle

ationary or in motion. The minimum speed that

can be set is 18

mph (30 km/h).

When this feature is active, the vehicle speed

pends on the pressing of the accelerator pedal

until the programmed speed limit is reached.

Refer to “Speed Limit Programming” in this

section for further information.

ACTIVATION

The feature can be activated/deactivated

through the radio system.

Activating The Device

To access this feature, select the Driver

sistance widget in the radio system, then

select the following items in sequence:

1. Speed Limiter

. ON

he activation of this feature is signaled by the

lumination of the green Speed Limiter icon,

along with the last speed set, in the instrument

cluster display. The Speed Limiter feature can

remain active concurrently with the Speed

Control system. If a speed limit below the one

indicated in the Speed Control is selected, the

Speed Control speed will be lowered to that of the

Speed Limiter. This function remains available in

RACE mode.

Speed Limiter Display

SPEED LIMIT PROGRAMMING

The speed limit can be programmed through the

radio system.

To access the function on the main menu, select

the

following items in order:

1. Driver Assistance

. Speed Limiter - Set Speed

y turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increases by

mph (5 km/h), from a minimum of 18 mph

0 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

1 — Socket

2 — Sensor

3 — Connector

147

EXCEEDING THE PROGRAMMED SPEED

By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the

programmed speed can be exceeded even with

the device active (e.g. in the event of overtaking).

The device is disabled until the speed drops

bel

ow the set limit, after which it reactivates

automatically.

PROGRAMMED SPEED ICON FLASHING

The programmed speed will flash in the following

scenarios:

 When the accelerator pedal has been fully

pressed and the vehicle has exceeded the

programmed speed.

 Activating the system after setting a limit below

the effective speed of the vehicle.

 In the event of overtake acceleration.

DEACTIVATION

The feature can be activated/deactivated

through the radio system.

Deactivating The Device

To access this feature, select the Driver

Ass

istance widget in the radio system, then select

the following items in sequence:

1. Speed Limiter

OFF

tomatic Deactivation Of The Device

The device deactivates automatically in the event

f fa

ult in the system. In this case, contact an

authorized dealer.

Temporary Signal Loss

When the devices loses the signal, the white

sym

bol without the speed indication illuminates

on the display.

System Failure

If there is a system failure, the amber symbol

uminates on the display.

SPEED CONTROL

(CRUISE CONTROL)

SPEED CONTROL DESCRIPTION

This is an electronically controlled driving

assistance feature that allows the desired vehicle

speed to be maintained, without having to press

the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at

a speed above 20

mph (30 km/h) on long

stre

tches of dry, straight roads with few variations

(highways).

The speed control buttons are located on the left

sid

e of the steering wheel.

NOTE:

 To ensure correct operation, the speed control

is designed to deactivate if more than one

function is operated simultaneously. In this

case, the system can be reactivated by

pushing the on/off button and setting the

desired speed.

 It is not recommended to use this feature in

city traffic.

 While driving downhill, the system could brake

the vehicle to keep the set speed the same.

TO ACTIVATE

To activate the Speed Control System, push the

on/off button located on the left side of the

steering wheel.

Speed Control

On/Off Button

Speed Control

Indicator Light

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the sys -

tem cannot maintain a constant speed. Your

icle could go too fast for the conditions, and

you could lose control and have an accident. Do

not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

STARTING AND OPERATING

148

The activation of the system is signaled by the

white warning light illuminating in the instrument

cluster display.

The Speed Control function can remain active at

the same time as the Speed Limiter system. If a

speed limit below the one indicated in the set

speed control is set, the speed control speed will

be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

To set a desired speed, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the Speed Control on.

hen the vehicle has reached the desired

eed, push the SET switch up or down and

release to activate. When the accelerator is

released, the vehicle will maintain the

selected speed automatically.

Set Switch Location

needed (when overtaking for instance), you can

acc

elerate beyond the set speed by pressing the

accelerator. When you release the pedal, the

vehicle goes back to the previously set speed.

When traveling downhill with the system active,

the

vehicle speed may slightly exceed the set

one.

NOTE:

Before pushing the SET switch, the vehicle must

traveling at a constant speed on a flat surface.

TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING

Increasing Speed

Once the Speed Control has been activated, the

spe

ed can be increased by pushing the SET

switch upward.

Pushing the switch upward to the first detent will

inc

rease speed in 1

mph (1 km/h) increments.

hing the switch upward to the second detent

will increase speed by 5

mph (10 km/h)

inc

rements. The new speed will then be set.

At every movement of the SET switch, the set

spe

ed will be adjusted.

Decreasing Speed

When the system is active, to reduce the speed,

pus

h the SET switch downward.

Pushing the switch downward to the first detent

wil

l decrease speed in 1

mph (1 km/h)

rements. Pushing the switch downward to the

second detent will decrease speed by 5

mph

(10

km/h) increments. The new speed will then

set.

At every movement of the SET switch, the set

spe

ed will be adjusted.

NOTE:

Moving the SET switch allows the driver to adjust

the

speed according to the selected unit of

measurement set in the radio system (see dedi

cated supplement).

Accelerating When Overtaking

Press the accelerator as you would normally.

hen

the pedal is released, the vehicle will return

to the set speed.

Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes

The vehicle can automatically downshift to keep

set speed when driving on hilly routes.

On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed may be

con

siderable and is advisable to deactivate the

Speed Control system.

NOTE:

The system keeps the speed set even uphill and

dow

nhill. A slight variation in the speed on slight

elevations is completely normal.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when

not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you

want. You could lose control and have an acci

dent. Always leave the system OFF when you

are

not using it.

149

TO RESUME THE SPEED

NOTE:

Before returning to the previously set speed, you

mus

t accelerate to a speed close to the set

speed, then push and release the RES button.

Resume Button Location

While in AutoStick (sequential) mode, before

reca

lling the previously set speed, you should

accelerate until you are close to that speed. Then,

push and release the RES button.

TO DEACTIVATE

Lightly pressing the brake pedal deactivates the

Speed Control without deleting the set speed.

The Speed Control may also be deactivated by

app

lying the electric park brake or when the

braking system is operated (e.g. operation of the

ESC system).

The set speed is deleted in the following cases:

 Pushing the on/off button twice

 The ignition is placed in the OFF position

 There is a malfunction with the Speed Control

system

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver assist

system that combines the speed control

functions with maintaining the distance from the

vehicle ahead.

The system allows to set and hold the vehicle at

the

desired speed without needing to press the

accelerator. It also allows to set and hold a

distance from the vehicle ahead (these settings

are set by the driver).

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system uses a

rada

r sensor located behind the front bumper

and a camera located in the center/upper part of

the windshield, to detect the presence of a

vehicle close ahead.

Front Bumper Radar Location

ndshield Camera Location

Thi

s system enhances driving comfort while on

the highway or out of town with light traffic.

If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead, the

sys

tem will maintain a fixed set speed.

If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the system

aut

omatically intervenes by braking (or

accelerating) slightly in order keep the set distance

while not exceeding the original set speed, seeking

to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

NOTE:

Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guar-

anteed under the following circumstances, and it

recommended to disable the system under the

following circumstances:

 Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.

 Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones.

 Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, roads

with steep climbs and descents, or roads with

numerous turns and bends.

 Entering a turn lane.

 Towing a trailer.

 When circumstances do not allow safe driving

at a constant speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

150

(Continued)

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The system has four operating states:

 Enabled (speed not set)

 Activated (speed set)

 Paused

 Deactivated

Enabling / Activation

To enable the system, push and release the on/

off b

utton located on the left side of the steering

wheel.

On/Off Button

Whe

n the system is enabled and ready to

ope

rate, the display shows a white vehicle icon

above dashes in place of the speed.

Enabled Icons

WARNING!

 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a

convenience system. It is not a substitute for

active driver involvement. It is always the

driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,

traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle

speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,

most importantly, brake operation to ensure

safe operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is always

required while driving to maintain safe

control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision and death

or serious personal injury.

 The ACC system:

• May react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-

cles, and stationary

objects (e.g., a

stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a

disabled vehicle) at speeds between

mph and 35 m

ph (4 km/h and

60 km/h

• C

nnot take stree

t, traffic, and weather

conditions into account, and may be

limited upon adverse sight distance

conditions.

• Does not always ful

ly recognize complex

driving conditions, which can result in

wrong or missing distance warnings.

• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop

while following a target vehicle and hold

the vehicle for approximately two

minutes in the stop position. If the target

vehicle does not start moving within two

minutes, the parking brake will be acti

vated and the

ACC system will be

canceled.

 You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

ow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex

driving situations (i.e., in highway

construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway

off-

ramp; when driving on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or

have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safe

dri

ving at a constant speed.

WARNING!

151

Setting a speed activates the system. The display

shows the icon in green with the set speed.

NOTE:

The system cannot be enabled when RACE mode

active.

Pausing / Deactivating

With the system enabled (speed not set), push

on/off button to disable.

With the system active (speed set), push the on/

off

button to pause. The display will show the icon

in white with the speed in brackets. To then

deactivate the system, push the on/off button

again.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

The speed can be set from a minimum of 19 mph

(3 0 km/h) to a maximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).

When the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

sh the RES/SET switch downward and release

it to activate the system. When the accelerator is

released, the vehicle will maintain the set speed

automatically.

SET Switch

While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the

stem will not be able to control the distance

between the vehicle and the one ahead. In this

case, the speed will be determined only by the

position of the accelerator pedal.

The system will return to normal operation as

on as the accelerator pedal is released.

The system ca

nnot be activated:

 When pressing the brake pedal

 When the brakes are overheated

 When the electric park brake has been

operated

 When either PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL is

engaged

 When the engine rpm is above a maximum

threshold

 When the vehicle speed is not within the

operational speed range

 When the ESC (or ABS or other stability control

systems) are operating or have just operated

 When the ESC system is off

 When the Forward Collision Warning system (if

equipped) is braking automatically

 In the event of system failure

 When the engine is off

 In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (in

this case the bumper area where it is located

must be cleaned)

If the system is set, the conditions described

ove also cause a cancellation or deactivation

of the system. These situations may vary

according to the conditions.

NOTE:

The system will not be deactivated when speeds

hig

her than those set are reached by pressing the

accelerator pedal above 100

mph (160 km/h). In

the

se situations, the system may not work

correctly and it is recommended to deactivate it.

TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING

Increasing Speed

Once the Speed Control has been activated, the

eed can be increased by pushing the RES/SET

switch upward.

Pushing the switch upward to the first detent will

crease speed in 1

mph (1 km/h) increments.

shing the switch upward to the second detent

will increase speed by 5

mph (10 km/h)

crements. The new speed will then be set.

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system on when not in use is dangerous. You

could accidentally set the system or cause it to

go faster than you want. You could lose control

and have a collision. Always leave the system

off when you are not using it.

STARTING AND OPERATING

152

Decreasing Speed

When the system is active, to reduce the speed,

push the RES/SET switch downward.

Pushing the switch downward to the first detent

wil

l decrease speed in 1

mph (1 km/h)

rements. Pushing the switch downward to the

second detent will decrease speed by 5

mph

(10

km/h) increments. The new speed will then

set.

NOTE:

 Moving the RES/SET switch downward allows

you to adjust the speed according to the

selected unit of measurement ("U.S." or

"Metric") set on the radio system (see

dedicated supplement).

 By keeping the accelerator pedal depressed,

the vehicle can continue to accelerate beyond

the set speed. In this case, use the RES/SET

switch to set the speed to the vehicle’s current

speed.

 When you push the RES/SET button to reduce

the speed, the braking system intervenes

automatically if the engine brake does not

slow the vehicle down sufficiently to reach the

set speed. The device holds the set speed

uphill and downhill; however a slight variation

is entirely normal, particularly on slight

inclines.

 The transmission could change to a lower gear

when driving downhill, or when accelerating.

This is normal and necessary to maintain the

set speed.

 The system will disable while driving if the

brakes overheat.

ACCELERATING WHEN OVERTAKING

When driving with ACC activated and following a

vehicle at a speed greater than 45

mph

(70 km/h), the system will provide an additional

acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in

passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration

is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn

signal and will only be active when passing on the

left-hand side.

The system detects the direction of traffic

tomatically when the vehicle passes from

left-hand traffic to right-hand traffic. In this case,

the overtaking assist function is only active when

the reference vehicle is overtaken on the right.

The additional acceleration is deactivated when

the driver uses the right turn signal and returns to

the original lane.

RESUMING THE SPEED

Once the system has been canceled but not

deactivated, to resume a previously set speed,

simply push the RES/SET switch upward and

remove your foot from the accelerator to recall it.

The system will be set to the last stored speed.

SETTING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN

EHICLES

The distance between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (short), two

bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars

(maximum).

Distance Icons

The distances from the vehicle ahead are propor-

tional to speed.

The interval of time with relation to the vehicle

hea

d remains constant and varies from one

second (for the short distance one-bar setting) to

two seconds (for the maximum distance four-bar

setting).

The set distance is shown on the display by a

ded

icated icon.

The setting is four (maximum) the first time the

sys

tem is used. After the distance has been

modified by the driver, the new distance will be

stored also after the system is deactivated and

reactivated.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if

traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a

set speed that is too high or too low for

prevailing traffic and road conditions could

cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate

too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow

these warnings can result in a collision and

death or serious personal injury.

153

To Decrease The Distance

Push and release the distance button to decrease

the distance setting. The distance setting

decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the

button is pushed.

Distance Button

The set speed is held if there are no vehicles

ahe

ad. Once the shortest distance has been

selected, the next push of the button will set the

maximum distance.

If a slower vehicle is detected in the same lane,

the

vehicle icon on the display illuminates from

grey to white. The system automatically adjusts

the vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance,

independently of the set speed.

The vehicle holds the set distance until:

 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed

higher than the set speed.

 The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the

detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control

system sensor.

 The distance setting is changed.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control system is

deactivated/paused.

STOP AND GO FUNCTION

The Stop and Go operating strategy allows you to

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead

until the vehicle has completely stopped. It will

also restart the vehicle automatically if the

vehicle ahead drives away within two seconds,

otherwise it is necessary to press the accelerator

pedal or move the RES/SET switch upward to

restart.

DEACTIVATION

The system is deactivated and the set speed is

canceled if:

 The on/off button is pushed (when the system

is on or paused).

 The ignition is in the OFF position.

 RACE mode is activated.

The system is canceled (the set speed and

stance are stored):

 When the system is paused (refer to

“Activation / Deactivation” in this section).

 When the conditions shown in the “Setting The

Desired Speed” section occur.

LIMITED OPERATION WARNING

If the dedicated message is shown on the display,

a condition limiting the Adaptive Cruise Control

operation may have occurred.

This could be due to an obstruction of the

vehi

cle’s sensor or camera. It could also be due to

a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected,

clean the area of the windshield opposite the

interior rear view mirror, where the camera is

located, as well as the area of the front bumper

where the sensor is located. Then check that the

message has disappeared.

WARNING!

 The maximum breaking applied by the

system is limited. The driver may apply the

brakes in all cases if needed.

 If the system predicts that the braking level is

insufficient to hold the set distance, either

“BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is

displayed to warn the driver of approaching

the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also

emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake

immediately as necessary to hold a safe

distance from the vehicle ahead.

 The driver is responsible for ensuring that

there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or

objectives along the direction of the vehicle.

Failure to comply with these precautions may

cause serious accidents and injuries.

 The driver is fully responsible for holding a

safe distance from the vehicle ahead

respecting the highway code in force in the

respective country.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver

must ensure that there are no pedestrians,

vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision and death or serious personal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING

154

When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, normal operation will resume.

Should the fault persist, contact an authorized

dealer.

PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING

The system may not work correctly in some

driving conditions (see the following). The driver

must control the vehicle at all times.

Towing A Trailer

Use of this system is not recommended while

wing a trailer.

Vehicle Not Aligned

The system may not detect a vehicle traveling in

the

same lane, in the same direction, but is not

aligned. It also may not detect a vehicle which is

cutting in from a side lane. Sufficient distance

from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed

in these cases.

The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and out of

the

driving lane causing the vehicle to brake or

accelerate unexpectedly.

Steering And Curves

Driving on curves with the system set could limit

eed and acceleration to guarantee vehicle

stability, even if no vehicles are detected ahead.

When leaving the curve, the system resets the

pre

viously set speed.

Steering And Curves

NOTE:

 In cases of narrow curves, the performance of

the system could be limited. In this case, it is

advisable to deactivate the system.

 The system only limits the speed DURING a

bend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On Slopes

When driving on roads with a variable incline, the

stem may not detect the presence of a vehicle

in the lane. System performance could be limited

according to speed, load, traffic conditions and

steep slopes.

Lane Change

The system may not detect the presence of a

cle until it is fully in your lane.

Lane Change

n this case, sufficient distance from the vehicle

which is changing lanes may not be guaranteed.

It is advisable to pay the utmost attention at all

times and be always ready to apply the brakes if

needed.

Small Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and

torcycles) traveling near the outer edges of the

lane or which enter the lane from curb side are

not detected until they are fully in the lane.

Small Vehicles

155

Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may

not be guaranteed in these cases.

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

The system can detect stationary vehicles when

the

vehicle is traveling at speeds between 2

mph

35 mph (4 km/h and 60 km/h). The driver

shou

ld always pay attention and be ready to press

the brakes if needed.

Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or

Cros

swise Direction

The system cannot detect the presence of objects

or ve

hicles traveling in opposite or crosswise

directions and consequently will not activate.

Objects And Vehic

les Moving In Opposite Or

Crosswise Direction

IFETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

cau

sar su operación no deseada.

Changes or modifications made to this

equ

ipment not expressly approved by Robert

BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to

operate this equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to

com

ply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial

environment. This equipment generates, uses,

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation

of this equipment in a residential area is likely to

cause harmful interference in which case the

user will be required to correct the interference at

his own expense.

Toutes modifications apportées à cet

équ

ipement qui ne sont pas expressément

homologuées par Robert BOSCH GmbH peuvent

annuler l'autorisation de la FCC de faire

fonctionner cet équipement.

Cet appareil a été vérifié et s'est révélé conforme

aux

normes applicables aux appareils

numériques de catégorie A, en vertu de la section

15 des règlements de la FCC. Ces normes sont

définies pour fournir une protection raisonnable

contre les interférences nuisibles lorsque

l'équipement est utilisé dans les installations

résidentielles. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut

émettre des ondes radioélectriques et, s'il n'est

pas installé et utilisé conformément au manuel

d’instruction, peut causer un brouillage radioélec

trique nuisible aux communications radio. Le

fonc

tionnement de cet équipement dans une

zone résidentielle est susceptible de causer des

interférences nuisibles; dans ce cas, l'usager doit

corriger les interférences à ses propres frais.

Radio Frequency Exposure Information

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

ope

rating in conjunction with any other antenna

or transmitter.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

xposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour

un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de

20 cm de distance entre la source de

rayonnement et votre corps.

Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place au meme

end

roit ou utilise simultanement avec un autre

transmetteur ou antenne.

GENERAL INFORMATION

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this

vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rul

es and with Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada license-exempt RSS

standard(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ce, and

2. T

his device must accept any interference

rec

eived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING

156

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d`Innovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée

aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

bro

uillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

sig

uientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

use interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

ier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda

sar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

requ

irements, the device must be installed and

operated to provide a separation distance of at

least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation

exp

osure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equip

ment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

’e

xposition aux rayonnements ISED établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un

minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source

de rayonnement et votre corps

NOTA:

Des changements ou des modifications n’ayant

pas

été expressément approuvés par la partie

responsable de la conformité pourraient

révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation de

l’équipement.

HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM

(HAS) — IF EQUIPPED

The Highway Assist System (HAS) is a driving

assistance operation that is only available when

driving on highways. The system operates up to

speeds of 90

mph (145 km/h) when horizontal

sig

ns are detected.

The system uses information from the front

cam

era and radar to help keep the vehicle in the

center of the lane and at a constant speed.

The HAS system combines Adaptive Cruise

Con

trol (ACC) functions with lane centering logic

to control the trajectory of the vehicle. The HAS

system requires the driver’s hands to remain on

the steering wheel.

Once HAS is activated, a dedicated screen will

app

ear on the instrument cluster display.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Activation

To activate the HAS system, push the button

ated on the left side of the steering wheel.

Highway Assist Button

spension Conditions

The following operations will suspend the HAS

sys

tem:

 Start steering manually

 Press the brake pedal

 Disable the ACC device

 Activate the turn signals

 Push the ACC activation setting button for two

seconds to activate Speed Control

 Place the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or

NEUTRAL

Reactivating the ACC system will reactivate HAS.

Refe

r to “Adaptive Cruise Control” in this chapter.

157

Automatic Deactivation

The system can be deactivated in the following

situations:

 If there are narrow bends

 When hands are removed from the steering

wheel

 If the left or right turn signal is activated

 If the driver intentionally changes lanes

without using the turn signal

 If the driver’s seat belt is released

 If the gear selector is placed in DRIVE

 If the Active Braking function is activated (refer

to “Forward Collision Warning” in “Safety for

further information)

 If the vehicle exits the highway

 If the lane markings are not detected by the

camera

 If the ACC device is deactivated

 If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)

NOTE:

 When the HAS system is turned off, the symbol

on the display turns red and then grey.

 Hands on the steering wheel are detected by a

capacitive sensor installed in it.

When the automatic suspension conditions are

ove

r, HAS will be automatically reactivated.

OPERATION

The HAS system only operates when the driver’s

hands are on the steering wheel.

If the system detects that the driver’s hands have

en removed from the steering wheel, the

system will alert the driver to place their hands

back on the steering wheel. Refer to “System

Status” in this section for further information.

If the vehicle crosses the lane boundary, the

eering wheel will vibrate and the dedicated

screen will appear in the instrument cluster

display.

NOTE:

The HAS system may take up to five seconds to

rn on once all conditions are met. During this

time, a grey indicator light will appear on the

instrument cluster display and the system will

automatically activate as soon as all of the condi

tions are met with no intervention from the driver.

The following conditions must be met before the

S system turns on:

 The HAS system must be enabled by pushing

the button on the steering wheel

 The vehicle must be on a highway

 ACC must be activated

 The right and left lane boundaries must be

visible

 The vehicle speed must be between 0 and

90 mph (0 and 145 km/h)

 The camera, radar, and radio system must be

functioning properly

 The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft

and 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)

 The turn signals must not be activated

 The HAS system must be functioning properly

Other operating limits:

 If the speed of ACC can be set to a higher value

(top speed 110 mph (180 km/h), HAS is only

ava

ilable as long as the vehicle speed is equal

to or less than 90

mph (145 km/h).

 When the ACC speed is reduced and the

vehicle speed is less than 90 mph (145 km/h),

the

system will automatically reactivate.

 If the ACC speed is set to 90 mph (145 km/h),

traveling downhill may increase the vehicle

speed. The HAS system will deactivate until the

speed returns to 90 mph (145 km/h).

INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY

The HAS system status can always be viewed in

the instrument cluster display.

The system status is indicated by the color of the

mbol on the display.

The HAS system uses sensors in the steering

whe

el to detect if the driver’s hands are on it.

If the driver’s hands are not on the steering

whe

el, a series of warnings will appear in the

instrument cluster display to alert the driver to

reposition their hands on the steering wheel. An

acoustic signal will also sound. After a period of

time, the HAS system will disable if the driver’s

hands do not return to the steering wheel.

After a period of time, the HAS system will disable

the driver has not repositioned their hands on

the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect hands on the

steering wheel, it will warn the driver by displaying

a dedicated screen on the instrument cluster

display.

STARTING AND OPERATING

158

SYSTEM STATUS

Active System

When the system is active, the following screen

ll appear in the instrument cluster display.

Highway Assist System Active

f on a different menu screen, a symbol will

pear on the instrument cluster display

indicating that the system is active.

When the driver’s hands are removed from the

eering wheel, the system disables after a few

seconds. A screen will appear in the instrument

cluster display warning the driver to return their

hands to the steering wheel.

Active System (Hands Removed From The

eering Wheel For A Short Time)

As soon as the driver removes their hands from

the

steering wheel, the following screen will

appear in the instrument cluster display. The

system will remain active at this time.

Hands Remove

d Initial Warning

If the driver does not return their hands to the

eering wheel within a few seconds, the

following screen will appear in the instrument

cluster display.

Hands Secondary

Warning

Active System (Hands Removed From The

eering Wheel For A Long Time)

If the driver still has not returned their hands to

the

steering wheel after the previous screen is

displayed, the following screen will now appear in

the instrument cluster display, and an acoustic

signal will sound until the driver regains control of

the vehicle.

Hands Remove

d Final Warning

If the driver’s hands are not returned to the

steering wheel after an extended period of time,

a deactivation message will appear on the

instrument cluster display. The steering wheel

control will be deactivated.

This display will remain active even when the

dri

ver’s hands are removed from the steering

wheel. The symbol on the display will turn grey.

When HAS is active, the Lane Keeping Assist

KA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems (if

equipped), if previously activated, will remain

activated.

LIMITED SYSTEM AVAILABILITY/

PERATION

System Availability

External factors and conditions may affect the

pro

per operation of the HAS system, such as:

 Narrow, winding, curvy streets

 Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog,

etc.)

 Front lights of oncoming vehicles or direct

sunlight or shade

159

 Damage or obstructions caused by mud, ice,

snow, etc.

 Bumper damaged or not aligned

 Interference with other equipment that causes

electromagnetic waves

 Presence of roadwork/road construction sites

 If the indications given by the navigation

system (if any) of the radio system are not yet

ready and/or if the navigation system is

recalculating the route

System Limited Operation

The HAS system may have limited or reduced

fun

ctionality when one of the following conditions

occur:

 Lane markings are not clear or in conditions of

poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog,

etc.)

 Either the camera or radar are damaged,

covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow,

etc.)

 When driving on hills or roads with narrow

bends

 Near highway toll booths

 When the highway entrance or exit is wider

than 20 ft (6 m)

 If the camera is exposed to glare caused by

reflections or direct sunlight

 If the navigation system information is

unavailable or being recalculated

NOTE:

 If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too

narrow with respect to the current speed, the

HAS system will disable.

 If damage to the windshield occurs, have the

windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) system can be

activated on all road types. The system uses a

camera to detect lane markings and keep the

vehicle in the center of the lane.

When the system is unable to detect lane

rkings, it will still operate using surrounding

traffic. This can occur in congested traffic

scenarios, when the vehicles ahead or

surrounding obstruct the visibility of the lane

markings. When the speed is below 12

mph

km/h), the system can use a lock-on strategy

t allows the vehicle to automatically follow the

vehicle ahead.

The TJA system combines Adaptive Cruise Control

CC) functions with Lane Departure Warning

functions to maintain vehicle speed and steering

wheel behavior.

NOTE:

Do not use the TJA system while driving in urban

are

as.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Activation

To activate the system, push the button on the

ft side of the steering wheel.

To deactivate the system, push the button again.

Traffic Jam Assist Button

uspension Conditions

The following operations will suspend the TJA

stem:

 Pressing the brake pedal

 Opening the driver’s door

 Disabling ACC

 If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h)

 Releasing the driver’s seat belt

 Placing the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or

NEUTRAL

 If the Forward Collision Warning system or

Active Braking intervenes

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

 Always remain alert and be ready to take

control of the vehicle in the event that the

HAS system disables.

 Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel when the HAS system is activated.

 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles

and pay attention to traffic conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING

160

Automatic Deactivation

System operation will be temporarily disabled

under the following conditions:

 When traveling around narrow bends

 If the lane boundaries are not detected

 One of the two lines is interrupted

 The sun is low and reflects on the radar

camera

 If the turn signals are activated

 If the driver intentionally changes lanes

without using the turn signal

 If manual steering begins

 If the driver’s hands are removed from the

steering wheel

 When there is no surrounding traffic and there

are no horizontal lane boundaries

 If the system is not functioning properly

 If lateral acceleration is high

NOTE:

 When TJA is turned off, the symbol in the

instrument cluster display will turn red, and

then grey.

 A sensor in the steering wheel detects whether

the driver’s hands are placed on the steering

wheel.

When the automatic suspension conditions are

ove

r, the TJA system will be automatically

reactivated.

OPERATION

The TJA system can only operate when the

driver’s hands are on the steering wheel.

If the system detects that the driver’s hands have

en removed from the steering wheel, a

message will appear in the instrument cluster

display to alert the driver to place their hands

back on the wheel.

NOTE:

 If the vehicle begins to cross the lane

boundary, the steering wheel will vibrate and a

dedicated screen will appear in the instrument

cluster display.

 The TJA system may take up to five seconds to

become active once all conditions are met.

The following conditions must be met in order to

tivate the system:

 The TJA system must be enabled

 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system must

be turned on

 The right and left lane boundaries must be

recognized by the system

 The vehicle must be traveling at a speed

between 0 and 37 mph (0 and 60 km/h)

 The camera, radar, and radio system must be

functioning properly

 The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft

and 13.7

ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)

 The turn signals must be turned off

 The TJA system must be functioning properly

 If the ACC speed is set to 37 mph (60 km/h) or

less, traveling downhill may increase the

vehicle speed. The system will remain inactive

until the speed returns to 37 mph (60 km/h)

less.

INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY

The TJA system status is indicated by the color of

the symbol in the instrument cluster display.

The system uses sensors in the steering wheel to

tect if the driver’s hands are present. If the

driver’s hands are removed, a series of warnings

will appear in the instrument cluster display to

alert the driver to reposition their hands on the

steering wheel. Acoustic signals will also be

emitted.

If the driver’s hands are not returned to the

eering wheel after a period of time, the system

will be disabled.

SYSTEM STATUS

Active System

An active system is indicated by the following

reen in the Driver Assistance menu on the

instrument cluster display.

TJA System Active

161

Active System (Hands Removed From The

Steering Wheel For A Short Time)

The following screen will appear in the instrument

cluster display immediately after the driver’s

hands are removed from the steering wheel. The

system still remains active at this time.

Hands Remove

d Initial Warning

If the driver does not return their hands to the

eering wheel within a few seconds, the following

screen will appear in the instrument cluster

display.

Hands Remove

d Secondary Warning

Active System (Hands Removed From The

eering Wheel For A Long Time)

If the driver’s hands have still not been returned

the steering wheel, the following screen will

appear in the instrument cluster display.

Hands Remove

d Final Warning

An acoustic signal will sound until the driver

regains control of the vehicle (hands on steering

wheel). The system is still active at this time.

If the driver’s hands are not returned to the

eering wheel after a period of time, a deacti-

vation message will appear on the instrument

uster display and the steering wheel control will

be deactivated.

Once the symbol on the display turns grey, the

stem is no longer active and the driver must

take control of the vehicle. At this time, the

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system and Lane

Departure Warning system will also be disabled.

When the TJA system is active, the Lane Keeping

sist (LKA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

systems (if equipped) will be temporarily

disabled. When TJA is not active, the LKA/LDW

systems will remain active. Refer to “Lane

Keeping Assist” and “Land Departure Warning” in

this chapter for further information.

LIMITED SYSTEM AVAILABILITY/

PERATION

System Availability

Performance of the TJA system may be affected

the following factors:

 Narrow, winding, curvy streets

 Lane boundaries that are not clear or in

conditions of poor visibility (e.g. heavy rain,

snow, fog, etc.)

 If the camera is exposed to glare from direct

sunlight or headlights of an oncoming vehicle

 If the camera or sensor is damaged, covered,

or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)

 The bumper is damaged or misaligned

 Interference with other equipment causes

electromagnetic waves

 Construction sites

 If the indications given by the navigation

system of the radio system are not yet ready or

if the system is recalculating

System Limited Operation

The TJA system may have limited or reduced

ctionality when one of the following conditions

occurs:

 Lane boundaries are not clear or in conditions

of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog,

etc.)

 Either the camera or radar are damaged,

covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow,

etc.)

 When driving on hills or narrow bends

 Near highway toll booths

STARTING AND OPERATING

162

 When the highway entrance or exit is more

than 20

ft (6 m) wide

 If the camera is exposed to glare from

reflections or direct sunlight

NOTE:

 If damage to the windshield occurs, have the

windshield replaced by an authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

 If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too

narrow with respect to the current speed, the

TJA system will deactivate.

TRAFFIC SIGN

RECOGNITION (TSR)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system uses a

camera mounted on the windshield to detect

recognizable road signs such as:

 Speed limits

 Signs indicating the end of the situations

indicated above

If the camera does not detect valid speed limits,

the

radio system navigation system may suggest

unregulated speed limits.

The system always checks the traffic signs

dicating the current speed limit signs. The

system is able to recognize and display up to two

different road signs in the instrument cluster

display.

Depending on the unit of measurement (km or

h) set through the “Unit of Measurement”

menu in the radio system, the TSR system will

automatically show the indication of the road sign

in the unit of measurements selected in the

instrument cluster display.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The TSR System can be activated/deactivated in

the radio system by selecting “Comfort” in the

“Driver Assistance” menu. The system activation

is signaled by road signs shown on the

instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

 By selecting “Blinking”, the driver can activate

a warning to display when the speed exceeds

the limit indicated by the TSR System. The

speed road sign on the instrument cluster

display will blink until the vehicle speed drops

below the displayed limit.

 Selecting “Offset” will set the speed at which

“Blinking” is activated up to a maximum of

mph (10 km/h) above the limit detected by

the

system.

 If no speed limit signs are found, the system

will revert to the speed limit signs that are

stored in the NAV system.

INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY

The system status can always be viewed through

the instrument cluster display.

The instrument cluster display shows only the

eed limit indications and consists of the

following steps:

 The new speed limit recognized by the system,

which is indicated by means of a

predetermined color. The road sign indicating

the end of the speed limit or a “Road Sign Not

Detected” message may appear in this zone.

 After a predetermined distance, the previously

displayed road sign changes color to inform

the driver that the speed limit provided may no

longer be valid.

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

 Always remain alert and be ready to take

control of the car in the event that the TJA

system disables.

 Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel when the TJA system is activated.

 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles

and pay attention to traffic conditions.

 The TJA system should only be used as a

driving aid. The driver must always pay

attention to their surroundings when the

system is operating and be ready to take

control of the vehicle at any time.

 Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) which

could interfere with the hand detection

sensor on the steering wheel.

163

(Continued)

1 — Traffic Sign Recognized

INTELLIGENT SPEED

CONTROL (ISC) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The Intelligent Speed Control (ISC) system is

always paired with the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) system. The ISC system suggests an

automatic speed adjustment to the driver based

on the speed limit for the road being traveled. The

driver can decide whether to accept or reject the

automatic speed adjustment, using the switch on

the steering wheel.

If the speed limit is exceeded according to the

roa

d signs or traffic conditions, a dedicated

graphic message is displayed on the instrument

panel display.

RES/SET Switch

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Activation

The system can be activated in the radio system

selecting the “Driver Assistance” menu and

then selecting “Comfort”. The symbol illuminates

in the instrument cluster display when the system

is active.

1 — ISC System Active

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

 Always remain alert and be ready to take

control of the vehicle in the event that the

TJA system disables.

 Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel when the TJA system is activated.

 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles

and pay attention to traffic conditions.

CAUTION!

 Functionality may be limited or the system

may not work if the sensor is obstructed.

 The system may have limited operation or

not work at all in weather conditions such as

heavy rain, hail, thick fog, and low

temperatures. Strong light contrasts can

influence the recognition capability of the

sensor.

 The area surrounding the sensor must not be

covered with stickers or any other object.

 Do not tamper or perform any operations in

the area of the windshield glass directly

surrounding the sensor.

 Clean foreign matters such as bird

droppings, insects, snow or ice on the

windshield. Use specific detergents and

clean cloths to avoid scratching the

windshield.

CAUTION!

STARTING AND OPERATING

164

Deactivation

The system is deactivated under the following

conditions:

 When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

system is deactivated

 When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system is deactivated

NOTE:

Selecting “Speed Offset” allows the driver to set

e speed up to a maximum of 10 mph (16 km/h)

ove or below the suggested speed set by the ISC

system. In this instance, the road sign information

shown in the instrument cluster display will

continue to be detected by the TSR system.

INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY

The system status is indicated by a white or green

icon in the instrument cluster display (similar to

the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) device) to the

left of the road sign indications provided by the

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system.

ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION OF THE

UGGESTED SPEED

The system can be activated if the driver has

activated the following systems beforehand:

 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

When these systems are active, a telltale will

splay in the instrument cluster display

indicating the suggested speed provided by the

TSR system. The driver has the option to accept

or reject this using the RES/SET switch on the

steering wheel.

To accept the proposed speed and adjust the

eed set by ACC, move the RES/SET switch up or

down in the direction indicated in the telltale.

To reject the proposed speed, move the RES/SET

itch up or down in the direction opposite of the

arrow in the telltale. The ACC system will continue

to regulate to the previously set speed.

If the speed set by the ACC system is the same as

the

speed detected by the TSR system, the speed

limit indicator on the instrument cluster display

will be highlighted with a green circle.

1 — Suggested Speed Higher Than Current Speed

2 — Suggested Speed Lower Than Current Speed

1 —Road Sign Recognized

165

DRIVER ATTENTION

ASSIST (DAA) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The Driver Attention Assist (DAA) system detects

when the driver is feeling fatigued and warns the

driver to pull over and take a break.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The DAA system can be activated and deactivated

through the radio system by selecting the

following in order:

1. Driver Assistance

river Attention Assist

SYSTEM INTERVENTION

Using information from the front camera, the

system implements two operating logics:

 The first operating logic takes the driving style

into account, observing the road and detecting

to what extent the driver can continue driving

with few lane crossing events.

 The second operating logic measures the time

spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed

above 40

mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph

(18

km/h). If the “Standard” option is

ected, in these conditions, the “Dozy Driver”

message may appear after three hours of

driving. If the “Early” option is selected and

these conditions occur, the “Dozy Driver”

message will be displayed after two hours of

driving.

NOTE:

If the conditions described above are not

det

ected continuously during the entire driving

period, the “Dozy Driver” message may be

displayed later than 2 or 3 hours. If the driving

style indicates that the driver is unable to follow

the road trajectory and respect the horizontal

lane markings, the red symbol will appear on the

instrument cluster display to suggest that the

driver should stop for a break. An audible signal

will also sound.

If the driver acc

epts the suggestion provided by

the system by pushing the MENU button on the

multifunction lever, the message will disappear

from the display and the symbol will be displayed

in the dedicated area of the instrument cluster

display until the next engine shutdown.

If the driver ign

ores the warning provided by the

system and does not stop, the message will

continue to remain on the display, along with the

symbol.

NOTE:

 In the event of a DAA system failure, an amber

symbol will appear in the instrument cluster

display along with a dedicated message.

 If the ABS system activates, “ABS ACTIVE” will

display in place of the DAA symbol and will

remain active until the ABS system

deactivates.

DAA Warning Message

A Warning Icon

Cha

nging The System Sensitivity

The DAA system intervention sensitivity can be

adj

usted through the radio system within the

Driver Assistance menu.

NOTE:

 If “Race” mode (if equipped) is activated, the

DAA system will be automatically deactivated.

 The system sensitivity cannot be changed in

the event of a camera system failure.

WARNING!

The DAA System is an aid for driving and does

not relieve the driver of the responsibility of

driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue

while driving, pull over safely for a break with

out waiting for the DAA to intervene. Only

retu

rn to the road when you are in the right

physical and mental condition to prevent

endangering yourself and other drivers.

STARTING AND OPERATING

166

PARKSENSE SYSTEM

VEHICLES WITH REAR PARKING

ENSORS ONLY

The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper,

detect obstacles while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

When an obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert

will sound and visual indications will be displayed

on the instrument cluster.

Rear Sensor Locations

ngagement/Disengagement

To turn the system off, push the ParkSense

stem button located to the left of the headlight

switch. The indicator light within the button will

illuminate when the system is turned off. Pushing

the button a second time will turn the system

back on, and the indicator light will turn off.

ParkSense System On/Off Button

he indicator light within the ParkSense System

tton will also be on in case of system failure. If

the button is pushed with a system failure, the

indicator light will flash for approximately five

seconds. The light will then stay on constantly.

NOTE:

When the ignition is ON/RUN, the ParkSense

stem keeps the last state when the engine was

stopped (activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/Deactivation

The system, when engaged, is automatically

tivated by engaging the REVERSE gear. It is

deactivated by engaging another gear.

Acoustic Signal

When REVERSE is engaged and there is an

stacle behind the vehicle, an acoustic signal

with variable frequency will sound.

 The acoustic signal increases in frequency as

the distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle decreases.

 The acoustic signal becomes continuous when

the distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle is less than 11 inches (30 cm), and

ops if the distance increases.

 The acoustic signal is constant if the distance

between the vehicle and the obstacle is

unchanged.

NOTE:

If several obstacles are detected by the sensors,

ly the nearest one is considered.

An acoustic signal will not sound if the vehicle is

PARK.

Indication On Display

The driver can select the type of warning they

uld like to be displayed through the radio

system. To access the function on the main

menu, select in the following order:

1. Driver Assistance

. P

arkSense Settings

. Mode

. Sound and Display

isual Indications

The system indicates the presence of an obstacle

displaying a single red arc in the detected

area, in relation to the distance of the object and

the position of the vehicle.

If the obstacle is detected in the rear central

are

a, a single red arc will be displayed as the

obstacle approaches, first constant, then

flashing, in addition to an acoustic signal.

167

If the obstacle is detected in the rear left and/or

right area, a single red flashing arc will be shown

in the corresponding area on the display and the

system will emit an acoustic signal, either at

frequent intervals or constantly.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstacle

when a single red flashing arc is shown on the

display and the acoustic signal becomes

continuous.

If several obstacles are detected simultaneously

the rear area, the display will show all of them,

regardless of the area in which they were

detected.

It is not possible to exit from the display screen

whi

le the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Fault Indication

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated

whe

n REVERSE is engaged by a message on the

instrument cluster display. Refer to "Warning

Lights And Messages On The Instrument Panel" in

"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for

further information.

Messages On The Display

In case of system failure, a dedicated message

pears on the instrument cluster for about five

seconds.

 Cleaning The Sensors: If the display shows a

message requiring the sensors to be cleaned,

make sure that the outer surface and the

underside of the rear bumper is free of debris

(e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas

are clear, place the ignition in the OFF position.

Then, return it to ON/RUN. If the message is

still displayed, contact an authorized dealer.

 Audio System Not Available: If the display

shows a message that the audio system is not

available, it means that the acoustic signal will

be emitted by the instrument panel, and not

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Operation With A Trailer

The operation of the ParkSense system is

tomatically deactivated when a trailer’s

electrical connector is plugged into the vehicle.

The sensors are automatically reactivated when

the electrical connector is removed.

NOTE:

Some conditions may affect the performance of

the

ParkSense system:

 Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the

presence of ice, snow, mud, or thick paint on

the surface of the sensor.

 The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo

interference) due to mechanical interference,

for example when washing the vehicle or in

extreme weather.

 The signals sent by the sensors can be altered

by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g.

pneumatic brake systems of trucks or

pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.

 System performance can be influenced by the

position of the sensors. For example, due to a

change in the ride setting (caused by wear to

the shock absorbers or suspension), by

changing tires, overloading the vehicle or

operations that require the vehicle to be

lowered.

 Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other

adhesives over the sensors as this will affect

system performance.

 The presence of a trailer hitch without a trailer.

This may interfere with the operation of the

parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense

system, it is recommended to remove or close

the trailer hitch assembly when the vehicle is

not being used for towing.

WARNING!

 Before using the ParkSense system, it is

strongly recommended that the ball mount

and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from

the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or

damage to vehicles or obstacles because the

hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle

than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the

sensors could detect the ball mount and

hitch ball assembly, depending on its size

and shape, giving a false indication that an

obstacle is behind the vehicle.

 Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the ParkSense system.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing

up. You are responsible for safety and must

continue to pay attention to your

surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

STARTING AND OPERATING

168

VEHICLES WITH FRONT AND REAR

ARKING SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED

The parking sensors, located in the front and rear

bumpers, detect the presence of any obstacles

and warn the driver through an acoustic signal

and visual indications, which will be displayed on

the instrument cluster.

Front Sensor Locations

ear Sensor Locations

ngagement/Disengagement

To turn the front parking sensors off, push the

rkSense system switch located to the left of

the headlight switch. The indicator light within the

switch will illuminate when the system is turned

off. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the

front sensors back on, and the indicator light will

turn off.

NOTE:

Deactivation of both the front an

d rear parking

sensors can only be done through the radio

system.

The indicator light within the ParkSense system

itch will also be on in case of system failure. If

the switch is pushed with a system failure, the

indicator light will flash for approximately five

seconds. The light will then stay on constantly.

NOTE:

When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-

tion, the ParkSense system keeps the last state

n the engine was stopped (activated or deac-

tivated) in its memory.

System Activation/Deactivation

When the REVERSE gear is engaged and the

stem is on, the front and rear sensors are

activated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to

a forward gear, the rear sensors are deactivated,

while the front sensors remain active until the

speed of 9

mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.

NOTE:

In certain operating conditions, the system could

art detecting an obstacle only after the vehicle

has moved slightly (a few inches).

Acoustic Signal

In the presence of an obstacle at the front or the

r of the vehicle, an acoustic signal with

variable frequency will sound:

 The acoustic signal increases in frequency as

the distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle decreases.

 The acoustic signal becomes continuous when

the distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle is less than 11

inches (30 cm), and

ops if the distance increases.

 The acoustic signal is constant if the distance

between the vehicle and the obstacle is

unchanged.

NOTE:

If the sensors detect several front and rear obsta-

cles, the closest obstacle is considered. An inter-

mittent signal will sound if the obstacles are at

same distance (front and rear).

When the system emits an acoustic signal, the

vol

ume of the radio system, if activated, is

automatically lowered.

CAUTION!

 The ParkSense system is only a parking aid

and it is unable to recognize every obstacle,

including small obstacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or

below the sensors will not be detected when

they are in close proximity.

 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

the ParkSense system in order to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It

is recommended that the driver looks over

his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense

system.

169

Indication On Display

The driver can select the type of warning they

would like to be displayed through the radio

system. To access the function on the main

menu, select in the following order:

1. Driver Assistance

. P

arkSense Settings

. Mode

. Sound and Display

isual Indications

The system indicates the presence of an obstacle

displaying a single red arc in the detected

areas, in relation to the distance of the object and

the position of the vehicle.

If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear

ntral area, a single red arc will be displayed as

the obstacle approaches, first constant, then

flashing, in addition to an acoustic signal.

If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear left

d/or right area, a single red flashing arc will be

shown in the corresponding area on the display

and the system will emit an acoustic signal, either

at frequent intervals or constantly.

If several obstacles are detected simultaneously

the front and rear area, the display will show all

of them, regardless of the area in which they were

detected.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstacle

whe

n a single or several flashing arcs are shown

on the display and the acoustic signal becomes

continuous.

It is not possible to exit from the display screen

whi

le the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Fault Indication

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated by a

ssage on the display on the instrument

cluster. Refer to "Warning Lights And Messages

On The Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Messages On The Display

In case of system failure, a dedicated message

pears on the instrument cluster for about 5

seconds.

 Cleaning the front or rear sensors: If the

display shows a message requiring the

sensors to be cleaned, make sure that the

outer surface and the underside of the front

and rear bumpers are free of debris (e.g. snow,

mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear,

place the ignition in the OFF position. Then,

return it to the ON/RUN position. If the

message is still displayed, contact an

authorized dealer.

 Audio system not available: If the display

shows a message that the audio system is not

available, it means that the acoustic signal will

be emitted by the instrument panel, and not

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Operation With A Trailer

The operation of the rear sensors is automatically

activated when a trailer’s electrical connector

is plugged into the vehicle, while the front sensors

stay active and can provide acoustic and visual

warnings. The rear sensors are automatically

reactivated when the electrical connector is

removed.

NOTE:

Some conditions may influence the performance

the ParkSense system:

 Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the

presence of ice, snow, mud, or thick paint on

the surface of the sensor.

 The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo

interference) due to mechanical interference,

for example when washing the vehicle or in

extreme weather.

 The signals sent by the sensors can be altered

by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g.

pneumatic brake systems of trucks or

pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.

 System performance can be influenced by the

position of the sensors. For example, due to a

change in the ride setting (caused by wear to

the shock absorbers or suspension), by

changing tires, overloading the vehicle or

operations that require the vehicle to be

lowered.

 Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other

adhesives over the sensors as this will affect

system performance.

 The presence of a trailer hitch without a trailer.

This may interfere with the operation of the

parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense

system, it is recommended to remove or close

the trailer hitch assembly when the vehicle is

not being used for towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING

170

(Continued)

LANE DEPARTURE

WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

The Lane Departure Warning system uses a

forward looking camera located on the

windshield to detect lane markings and measure

vehicle position within the lane boundaries.

When one or both lane limits are detected and

the

vehicle passes over one without an activated

turn signal, the system emits a visual as well as

an acoustic signal.

If the vehicle continues to go beyond the line of

the

lane without any intervention from the driver,

the surpassed line will light up on the display (left

or right) to urge the driver to bring the vehicle

back into the limits of the lane.

WARNING!

 Before using the ParkSense system, it is

strongly recommended that the ball mount

and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from

the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or

damage to vehicles or obstacles because the

hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle

than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the

sensors could detect the ball mount and

hitch ball assembly, depending on its size

and shape, giving a false indication that an

obstacle is behind the vehicle.

 Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the ParkSense system.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing

up. You are responsible for safety and must

continue to pay attention to your

surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

 The ParkSense system is only a parking aid

and it is unable to recognize every obstacle,

including small obstacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or

below the sensors will not be detected when

they are in close proximity.

 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

the ParkSense system in order to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It

is recommended that the driver looks over

his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense

system.

CAUTION!

 Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle

may interfere with the correct operation of

the camera. Before starting, make sure the

load is correctly positioned in order not to

cover the camera operating range.

CAUTION!

 Do not cover the operating range of the

camera with stickers or other objects.

 Do not tamper with nor operate on the

camera. Do not close the openings in the

aesthetic cover located under the interior

rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of

the camera, contact your authorized dealer.

 The camera may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such as:

heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, or

formation of ice layers on the windshield.

 Camera operation may also be compromised

by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or

ice on the windshield, by traffic conditions

(e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with

yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or

opposite way on the same lane, bend with a

small radius of curvature), by road surface

conditions and by driving conditions (e.g.

off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is

always clean. Use specific detergents and

clean cloths to avoid scratching the

windshield. The camera operation may also

be limited or absent in some driving, traffic

and road surface conditions.

 If the windshield must be replaced due to

scratches, chipping or breakage, contact

exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not

replace the windshield on your own. It is

advisable to replace the windshield if it is

damaged in the area of the camera.

CAUTION!

171

SYSTEM ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The system is activated/deactivated by pushing

the button located on the end of the multifunction

lever, or through the Driver Assistance widget

though the radio system within the Comfort

menu.

Lane Departure Warning System Activation/

eactivation Button

NOTE:

When the engine is started, the system maintains

the

operating mode that was selected when it

was turned off.

Activation Conditions

Once turned on, the system becomes active only

the following conditions are met:

 The vehicle speed is equal to or above 37 mph

(60

km/h); the system is deactivated at

eeds equal to or greater than 110 mph

80 km/h).

 The lane limit lines are visible at least on one

side.

 There are suitable visibility conditions.

 The road is straight or with wide radius bends.

 A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in

front.

 The turn signal is not active.

SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE

ISPLAY

The Lane Departure Warning system advises the

driver when the vehicle leaves the driving lane by

showing symbols and messages on the

instrument cluster display.

When the system is active and the lane limits

have

not been detected, the display shows two

grey lane lines.

Lane Limits Not Detected

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit

When the system is active and only, for example,

left lane limit has been detected, the detected

lane illuminates in white on the display. The

system is then ready to provide visual warnings

on the display in the event of unintentional exiting

of the lane (turn signal not activated) to the left.

Left Lane Limit Detected

hen the system detects that the vehicle has

approached the lane line and is about to pass it,

the left line on the display illuminates in yellow.

Left Lane Limit Approached

he system operates in the same way, but

rrored, in the event of exiting the right lane

when only the right lane limit has been detected.

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both Limits

When the system is active, both lane lines on the

splay illuminate in white to indicate the

successful detection of both limits.

STARTING AND OPERATING

172

When lane limits are detected, the system is

ready to provide indications in case the driver

unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not

activated).

As the Lane Departure Warning system detects

the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will

adjust the display accordingly (from white to

yellow and yellow to white, and increase their

thickness).

If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an

dible signal as well as the visual indication in

the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted

through the speakers on the side of the lane limit

which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle is

exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible

signal will come from the speakers on the left of

the vehicle).

Changing The System Settings

The system's sensitivity can be set through the

rad

io system. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be

selected.

To access the function, from the main menu

lect the following in order:

1. Settings

. C

omfort

. Lane Departure Warning

. S

ensitivity

imited Operation Warning

If a message appears on the display, a condition

miting the Lane Departure Warning system

operation may have occurred. This could be an

obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the

system.

If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the

ndshield by the interior rear view mirror.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal

nditions, the system may not function properly.

When the conditions limiting the system are

rrected, it will go back to normal operation.

Should a fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Warning

If the system turns off and appears on the

display, it means that there is a system fault.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,

t you are advised to contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST

(LKA) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system uses a

camera located on the windshield to detect the

lane limits and calculate the position of the

vehicle within such limits, in order to make sure

that the vehicle remains inside the lane. This is

an active system that will apply torque to the

steering wheel if it senses that the vehicle is

drifting out of the lane.

When one or both lane limits are detected and

the

vehicle passes over one without a turn signal

being applied, the system will apply torque to the

steering wheel and a visual signal will be

displayed in the instrument cluster display. An

audible signal may also sound.

If the vehicle continues to go beyond the lane line

thout any driver intervention, the surpassed

lane line (left or right) will light up on the

instrument cluster display to urge the driver to

bring the vehicle back inside the lane limits.

Lane Cr

ossed

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The system is activated/deactivated by pressing

the button at the end of the multifunction lever.

Each time the engine is started, the system

maintains the operating mode that was selected

when it was previously turned off.

Activation/Deactivation Button

173

Activation Conditions

Once the activation button is pushed, the system

becomes active only if the following conditions

are met:

 The car speed is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h).

(T he system is deactivated at speeds equal to or

higher than 110

mph (180 km/h))

 The lane limit lines are visible at least on one

side

 There are suitable visibility conditions

 The road is straight or with wide radius bends

 A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in

front

 The turn signal (to indicate leaving the lane) is

not active

SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE

ISPLAY

The Lane Keeping Assist system also advises the

driver when the car changes lanes by showing

symbols and messages on the instrument cluster

display.

The message at the top of the display remains

tive only until the main reconfigurable area of

the display is activated by pressing the TRIP

button located on the end of the windshield wiper

lever. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

After activating the main reconfigurable area, the

ne Keeping Assist system messages will be

shown in the instrument cluster display.

When the system is active and the lane limits

have

not been detected, the display shows two

grey lane lines.

Lane Limits Not Detected

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit

When the system is active and only, for example,

left lane limit has been detected, the detected

lane lights up in white on the display; the system

is ready to provide visual warnings on the display

in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane

(turn signal indicator not activated) to the left.

Left Lane Limit Detected

hen the system detects that the vehicle has

approached the lane line and is about to pass it,

the left line on the display lights up in yellow.

Left Lane Limit Approached

NOTE:

The system operates in the same way, but

rrored, in the event of exiting the right lane

when only the right lane limit has been detected.

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both Limits

When the system is active, both lane lines on the

splay illuminate in white to indicate the

successful detection of both limits.

When lane limits are detected, the system is

rea

dy to provide indications in case the driver

unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not

activated).

As the Lane Keeping Assist system detects the

ne limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will

adjust the display accordingly (from white to

yellow and yellow to white, and increase their

thickness).

If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an

dible signal as well as the visual indication in

the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted

through the speakers on the side of the lane limit

which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle is

exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible

signal will come from the speakers on the left of

the vehicle).

STARTING AND OPERATING

174

(Continued)

Hands Presence On The Steering Wheel

Detection

The system is able to detect the presence of the

dri

ver’s hands on the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect the presence of

han

ds on the steering wheel for a few seconds

(up to 6 seconds), the following screen will be

displayed on the instrument cluster display. No

acoustic warning will be emitted in this case.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not

etected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence of

han

ds on the steering wheel for a few seconds

(from 6 to 15 seconds), the following screen will

be displayed on the instrument cluster display. A

short acoustic signal will sound if hands are not

detected on the steering wheel for 6 to 12 sec-

onds. A continuous signal will sound if hands are

not detected on the steering wheel for 12 to

15 seconds.

Hand Pr

esence On The Steering Wheel Not

etected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removed from

the

steering wheel, the LKA system will be

deactivated and a dedicated message will be

shown on the instrument cluster display. A short

acoustic signal will sound in this case.

In any of the situations above where the hands

are

removed from the steering wheel for more

than 6 seconds, it is necessary to reposition the

hands on the steering wheel.

Changing The System Sensitivity

The system's sensitivity can be set through the

rad

io system in the Driver Assistance menu.

Select “Lane Keep Assist - Settings” and then

“Keeping sensitivity”. Sensitivity “Early” or “Late”

can be selected.

Changing The System Strength

The system’s strength can be set through the

io system in the Driver Assistance menu.

Select “Lane Keep Assist - Settings” and then

“Strength”. Strength “Low” or “High” can be

selected.

Limited Operation Warning

If a message appears on the display, a condition

miting the LKA system operation may have

occurred. This could be an obstruction of the

camera view, or a fault in the system.

If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the

ndshield by the interior rear view mirror.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal

nditions, the system may not function properly.

When the conditions limiting the system are

rrected, it will go back to normal operation.

Should a fault persist, contact an authorized

dealer.

System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and appears on the

display, it means that there is a system fault.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle,

t you are advised to contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

 Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle

may interfere with the correct operation of

the camera. Before starting, make sure the

load is correctly positioned, in order not to

cover the camera operating range.

 If the windshield must be replaced due to

scratches, chippings or breakage, contact an

authorized dealer. Do not replace the

windshield on your own; there is risk of

malfunction. It is advisable to replace the

windshield if it is damaged in the area of the

camera.

175

REAR BACK UP CAMERA /

DYNAMIC GRIDLINES

DESCRIPTION

The Rear Back Up Camera is located on the

liftgate, above the rear license plate.

Rear Back Up Camera Location

hen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the radio system

splay will show the area behind the vehicle, as

seen by the Rear Back Up Camera, along with a

warning message.

Rear Back Up Camera Display

ear Back Up Camera Features

To activate the Rear Back Up Camera features,

lect Driver Assistance from the Main Menu of

the radio system. Under “Driver Assistance”, Rear

Back Up Camera features can be selected:

 View

 Camera Delay

 Camera Guidelines

Selecting “View” will activate the camera view on

the

display.

Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the camera

vie

w to remain on the display shortly after the

vehicle is no longer in REVERSE, followed by the

previously active screen.

Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will activate the

splay of the dynamic guidelines that indicate

the route of the vehicle.

 Do not tamper with or operate on the

camera. Do not close the openings in the

aesthetic cover located under the interior

rearview mirror. In the event of a failure of

the camera, contact an authorized dealer

immediately.

 Do not cover the operating range of the

camera with stickers or other objects. Also

pay attention to other objects on the hood

(e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they do

not interfere with the camera.

 The camera may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such as:

heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, or

formation of ice layers on the windshield.

 Camera operation may also be compromised

by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt

or ice on the windshield, traffic conditions

(e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with

yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or

opposite way on the same lane, bend with a

small radius of curvature), or road surface

conditions and driving conditions (e.g.

off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is

always clean. Use specific detergents and

clean cloths to avoid scratching the

windshield. The camera operation may also

be limited or absent in some driving, traffic

and road surface conditions.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be

sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before

backing up. You are responsible for the safety

of your surroundings and must continue to pay

attention while backing up. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

STARTING AND OPERATING

176

SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE

ISPLAY

Indications On The Display

Through the radio system settings, by activating

the

"Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can

be seen on the rear camera display. If activated,

the guidelines are positioned on the image to

highlight the width of the vehicle and the

expected reverse path based on the steering

wheel position.

The various colored areas indicate the distance

from

the rear of the vehicle.

A central line indicates the center of the vehicle to

sist in rear parking maneuvers or trailer hitch

alignment.

The following table shows the approximate

stances for each area:

Messages On The Display

If the liftgate is opened, the camera will not

tect any obstacle behind the vehicle. The

display will show a dedicated warning message.

Make sure the liftgate is closed by pushing next

the lock until it clicks.

IMPORTANT NOTES

 Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the camera

may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to

keep the camera surface clean, and free from

debris.

 When parking, be aware of obstacles that may

be above or below the camera range.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel type is

correct.

Also, stop the engine before refueling.

NOTE:

An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful

haust emissions, thus contributing to air pollu

tion.

REFUELING CAPACITY

To ensure that you fill the tank completely, top off

twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle.

Further top-off could cause faults in the fuel

fee

ding system.

CAUTION!

 To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up

Camera should only be used as a parking

aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to

view every obstacle or object in your drive

path.

 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must

be driven slowly when using the Rear Back

Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an

obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the

driver look frequently over his/her shoulder

when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.

Area

Distance From The

Rear Of The Vehicle

Red

0–11.8 inches

–30 cm)

Yellow

11.8 inches to 3.3 feet

0 cm–1 m)

Green

3.3 feet or more

m or more)

CAUTION!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even

in small amounts in an emergency, as this

would damage the catalytic converter beyond

repair.

177

REFUELING PROCEDURE

The fuel filler door is unlocked when the central

door locking system is unlocked. It is automat

ically locked when the central locking system is

app

lied.

Opening The Fuel Filler Door

To refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pushing on the point

sho

wn by the arrow.

Fuel Door

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe.

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,

fore removing the nozzle, wait for at least

10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside

the tank.

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas

p about ¼ turn until you hear one click.

This is an indication that cap is properly tight

ened.

The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED

FUE

L = gasoline).

Fuel Door Label

ergency Fuel Door Opening

In the event of an emergency, the fuel filler door

can

be opened from inside the liftgate.

Proceed as follows:

Models With Compact Spare Tire

1. O

pen the liftgate and lift up the load floor.

ad Floor

2. U

nlock the locking device and remove the

mpact spare tire to reach the emergency

opening cable on the side of the fuel door.

Cargo Area

Pull the cable to release the fuel door lock.

lease Cable

4. Open the fuel door by pushing it.

1 — Locking Device

1 — Release Cable

STARTING AND OPERATING

178

(Continued)

Models Without Compact Spare Tire

1. O

pen the liftgate and lift up the load floor.

ad Floor

2. Lift up the cover to reach the emergency

ening cable on the side of the fuel door.

Cargo Box

Pull the cable to release the fuel door lock.

rgo Box Opened

Open the fuel door by pushing it.

NOTE:

If the filler compartment is washed with a pres-

sure washer, keep it at a distance of at least

8 inches (20 cm).

VEHICLE LOADING

CERTIFICATION LABEL

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration regulations, your vehicle has a

certification label affixed to the driver's side door

or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of

man

ufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month,

Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that

appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.

1 — Cover

2 — Release Cable

WARNING!

 Never have any smoking materials lit in or

near the vehicle when the fuel door is open

or the tank is being filled.

 Never add fuel when the engine is running.

This is in violation of most state and federal

fire regulations and may cause the MIL to

turn on.

 A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle.

You could be burned. Always place gas

containers on the ground while filling.

WARNING!

179

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your

vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,

options and cargo. The label also specifies

maximum capacities of front and rear axle

systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not

exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the

allowable load weight a truck can carry, including

the weight of the driver, all passengers, options

and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on

the front and rear axles. The load must be

distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of

each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the

com

ponents in the system with the lowest load

carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).

Heavier axles or suspension components

sometimes specified by purchasers for increased

durability do not necessarily increase the

vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label

represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.

Replacement tires must be equal to the load

capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire

size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your

vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total

weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including

vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with

no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle.

The front and rear curb weight values are

determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo

are added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front

and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be

determined by weighing it when it is loaded and

ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a

com

mercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has

not been exceeded. The weight on the front and

rear of the vehicle should then be determined

separately to be sure that the load is properly

distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing

the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the

front or rear axles has been exceeded but the

total load is within the specified GVWR. If so,

weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear

to front as appropriate until the specified weight

limitations are met. Store the heavier items down

low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before

driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an

adve

rse effect on the way your vehicle steers and

handles and the way the brakes operate.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and

information on limits to the type of towing you can

reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a

trailer, carefully review this information to tow

your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty

cove

rage, follow the requirements and

recommendations in this manual concerning

vehicles used for trailer towing.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If

you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it

can change the way your vehicle handles. This

could cause you to lose control. Also

overloading can shorten the life of your

vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING

180

COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS

The following trailer towing related definitions will

assist you in understanding the following

information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your

vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo

and tongue weight. The total load must be limited

so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to

“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the

weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment

(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the

trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"

condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put

ur fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The

entire weight of the trailer must be supported by

the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating

(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your

vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front

and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front

and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not

exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to

“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted

on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider

this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Trailer Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied

by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch

ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.

These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the

market today and they are commonly used to tow

small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying

leverage through spring (load) bars. They are

typically used for heavier loads to distribute

trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front

axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in

accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it

provides for a more level ride, offering more

consistent steering and brake control thereby

enhancing towing safety. The addition of a

friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens

sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer

stability. Trailer Sway Control and a weight

distributing (load equalizing) hitch are

recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)

and may be required depending on vehicle and

trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maxi -

mum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving

dition can result if either rating is exceeded.

You could lose control of the vehicle and have a

collision.

WARNING!

 An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing

Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,

braking performance, and could result in a

collision.

 Weight Distributing Systems may not be

compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.

Consult with your hitch and trailer

manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

181

TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in

selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given

dri

vetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Engine/Transmission Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.0L Engine 3,000 lbs (1360 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on

the

Tire and Loading Information placard.

STARTING AND OPERATING

182

(Continued)

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight

stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Weight Distribution

onsider the following items when computing the

ight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

 The tongue weight of the trailer.

 The weight of any other type of cargo or

equipment put in or on your vehicle.

 The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the

tra

iler adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, addi-

tional factory-installed options or dealer-installed

tions must be considered as part of the total

load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And

Loading Information” placard for the maximum

combined weight of occupants and cargo for your

vehicle.

TOWING REQUIREMENTS

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle

drivetrain components, the following guidelines

are recommended:

CAUTION!

Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the

GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads

balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side

to side which will cause loss of control of the

vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers

heavier in front is the cause of many trailer

collisions.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow

these guidelines to make your trailer towing as

safe as possible:

 Make certain that the load is secured in the

trailer and that it will not shift during travel.

When trailering cargo that is not fully

secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that

may be difficult for the driver to control. You

could lose control of your vehicle and have a

collision.

 When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do

not overload your vehicle or trailer.

Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor

performance, or damage to brakes, axle,

engine, transmission, steering, suspension,

chassis structure, or tires.

 Safety chains must always be used between

your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the

chains to the frame or hook retainers of the

vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the

trailer tongue and allow enough slack for

turning corners.

 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked

on a grade. When parking, apply the parking

brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle

transmission in PARK. Always block or

"chock" the trailer wheels.

 GCWR must not be exceeded.

 Total weight must be distributed between

the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the

following four ratings are not exceeded:

• GVWR

• GTW

• GAWR

• Tongue weight

rating for the trailer hitch

utilized.

CAUTION!

 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first

500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.

e engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that

a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph

km/h) and do not make starts at full

rottle. This helps the engine and other parts

of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!

183

Towing Requirements — Tires

 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire.

 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)

when towing while using a full size spare tire.

 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to

the safe and satisfactory operation of your

vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for proper tire inflation

procedures.

 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation

pressures before trailer usage.

 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire

damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires”

in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper

inspection procedure.

 When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires

with a higher load carrying capacity will not

increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake

system or vacuum system of your vehicle with

that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate

braking and possible personal injury.

 An electronically actuated trailer brake

controller is required when towing a trailer with

electronically actuated brakes. When towing a

trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge

actuated brake system, an electronic brake

controller is not required.

 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers

over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for

trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And

Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the

trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the

trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and

ven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved

trailer harness and connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring

harn

ess.

The electrical connections are all complete to the

vehi

cle but you must mate the harness to a trailer

connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

NOTE:

 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the

vehicle before launching a boat (or any other

device plugged into vehicle’s electrical

connect) into water.

 Be sure to reconnect once clear from water

area.

Four-Pin Connector

WARNING!

 Do not connect trailer brakes to your

vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can

overload your brake system and cause it to

fail. You might not have brakes when you

need them and could have an accident.

 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing, you should allow for

additional space between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so

could result in an accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453

kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and

they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to

do this could lead to accelerated brake lining

wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer

stopping distances.

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING

184

Seven-Pin Connector

TOWING TIPS

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,

stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area

located away from heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission

Select the DRIVE range when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive strategy to

avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if

frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you

can use the AutoStick shift control to manually

select a lower gear.

NOTE:

Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle

und

er heavy loading conditions will improve

performance and extend transmission life by

reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

This action will also provide better engine

braking.

Speed Control — If Equipped

 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

 When using the Speed Control, if you

experience speed drops greater than 10 mph

(16

km/h), disengage until you can get back to

crui

sing speed.

 Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light

loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission

overheating, take the following actions:

City Driving

In city traffic, while stopped, place the

tran

smission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase

engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

 Reduce speed.

 Temporarily turn off air conditioning.

INSTALLING THE RECEIVER

To properly install the receiver, follow the

directions below:

1. Retrieve the receiver from the luggage

mpartment.

2. Push the receiver into the trailer hitch, and

cure by inserting the locking pin into the

trailer hitch.

3. Insert the safety split ring into the hole on the

cking pin.

NOTE:

Ensure that the locking pin is removed from the

trai

ler hitch before installing the receiver.

Trailer Hitch And Receiver

— Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

1 — Receiver

2 — Locking Pin

3 — Safety Split Ring

A — Trailer Hitch

185

CONNECTING THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

To connect the trailer’s electrical system, follow

the directions below:

1. Remove the socket protective cover.

. Completely insert the plug into the socket.

lectrical Tow Connector

REMOVING THE RECEIVER

When the receiver is no longer needed, disconnect

the electrical connections and remove it from its

position using the directions below:

1. Remove the safety split ring from the locking

in.

2. Pull the locking pin out of the trailer hitch.

. R

emove the receiver from the trailer hitch.

SUGGESTIONS FOR

DRIVING

SAVING FUEL

Below are some suggestions which may help you

save fuel and lower the amount of harmful

emissions released into the atmosphere.

Vehicle Maintenance

Checks and operations should be carried out in

cordance with the Maintenance Plan. Refer to

"Scheduled Servicing" in "Servicing And

Maintenance" for further information.

Tires

Check the tire pressures at least once every four

eks: if the pressure is too low, consumption

levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher.

NOTE:

Tire pressure that is too high can cause prema-

ture tire wear, reduced control, etc.

Unnecessary Loads

Do not travel with an overloaded liftgate. The

ight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly

affect fuel consumption and stability.

Electric Devices

Use electrical systems only for the amount of time

eded. The rear window defroster, additional

headlights, windshield wipers and heater blower

fan require a considerable amount of energy;

increasing the current uptake increases fuel

consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).

Climate Control System

Using the climate control system will increase

nsumption: use standard ventilation when the

temperature outside permits.

Devices For Aerodynamic Control

The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic

ntrol may adversely affect air drag and

consumption levels.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs

whe

n the vehicle is stationary; this causes the

engine to warm up more slowly, thereby

increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is

therefore advisable to drive off immediately,

slowly, avoiding high speeds: by doing this the

engine will warm up more quickly.

Number

Function

1 Lights ground (Lights GND)

Position light, side marker

ghts, and license plate light

3 Left turn signal and stop light

4 Right turn signal and stop light

STARTING AND OPERATING

186

Unnecessary Actions

Avoid revving up when starting at traffic lights or

before stopping the engine. This action is

unnecessary and causes increased fuel

consumption and pollution.

Gear Selection

Use a high gear when traffic and road conditions

low it. Using a low gear for faster acceleration

will increase fuel consumption. Improper use of a

high gear increases consumption, emissions and

engine wear.

Max. Speed

Fuel consumption considerably increases as

eed increases. Maintain a constant speed,

avoiding unnecessary braking and acceleration,

which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and

emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently severely affects

nsumption and emissions: acceleration should

be gradual and should not exceed the maximum

torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold Starting

Short trips and frequent cold starts will not allow

the

engine to reach optimum operating

temperature. This results in a significant increase

in consumption levels (from +15 to +30% in city

driving) and emissions.

Traffic And Road Conditions

High fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic,

for

instance when traveling in traffic with

frequent use of low gears or in cities with many

traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and rough

road surfaces also adversely affect consumption.

Stops In Traffic

During prolonged stops (e.g. railway crossings),

rn off the engine.

PERFORMANCE — QUADRIFOGLIO

This vehicle is equipped with an engine capable

of delivering exceptionally fast acceleration and

speed:

 Peak power: 505 HP at 6,500 RPM.

 Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at 2,500–5,000 RPM.

 Top speed: 176 mph (283 km/h).

 Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h):

3.6 seconds.

For safe driving, it is essential, particularly during

the

first days of use, to get to know the car by

driving carefully and gradually discovering its

performance.

Brakes

The car braking system may be available with

fou

r carbon-ceramic material brake discs, one on

each wheel.

In order to guarantee the maximum braking

pacity for the first use, Alfa Romeo performs a

"run-in" procedure for discs and pads directly at

the factory.

The use of carbon-ceramic material brake discs

arantees braking features (better

deceleration/pedal load ratio, braking distances,

fading resistance) proportional to the dynamic

features of the car in addition to considerably

decreasing the unsprung component weight.

The materials used and the structural features of

the

system could generate unusual noises which

have absolutely no adverse effect on correct

operation and reliability of the braking system.

Greater pressure may need to be applied to the

bra

ke pedal the first time to keep the same

braking capacities in presence of condensation

or salt on the braking surfaces, for example after

washing or if the car is not used for a long time.

NOTE:

Given the high technological level of this system,

y servicing on it must be performed by an

authorized dealer which exclusively has the skills

needed for the repair and maintenance opera

tions.

In case of intensive, high-performance use of the

r, have the efficiency of the carbon-ceramic

material braking system inspected as shown on

the Maintenance Plan at an authorized dealer.

187

Driving On Race Tracks

Before driving on a track using a racing style, it is

necessary to:

 Attend a race track driving course.

 Check the liquid levels in the engine

compartment. For more information, see the

“Checking Levels” section in the “Servicing

And Maintenance” chapter.

 Have the car inspected at an authorized

dealer.

Remember that the car was not designed to be

drive

n exclusively on the race track and that this

use increases stress and component wear.

NOTE:

Quadrifoglio front brakes are equipped with NAO

typ

e pads (Non-Asbestos Organic). These pads

are NOT suitable for high thermal loads (for

example track use). If you want to use vehicle on

a track it is recommended to use the optional

CCM Brakes (Carbon Ceramic Brake disc).

Preheating the carbon ceramic material brake

dis

The brake discs must be warmed up to make

them

fully efficient. You are advised to perform

the following procedure to achieve optimal

efficiency:

 Brake nine times from 80 mph to 18 mph

(130 km/h to 30 km/h) with deceleration

equ

al to 0.7g (the longitudinal acceleration

value is shown on the instrument panel display

by setting RACE mode and selecting the

“Performance” page) with 20 second intervals

between brake applications; keep the car at a

speed comprised between 37

mph and

62 m

ph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and do not

brak

e for 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool

dow

 Then brake three times from 124 mph to

18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with

dec

eleration equal to 1.1g (ABS operation)

with 30 second intervals between brake

applications; keep the car at a speed

comprised between 37

mph and 62 mph

(60

km/h and 100 km/h) and do not brake for

minutes to allow the brakes to cool down.

188

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these may interfere

h your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can help you to deal

wit

h critical situations independently.

In an emergency, we recommend that you call the

phon

e number found in “Helpful Addresses And

Telephone Numbers” under “How To Deal With

Warranty Problems” in the Warranty Book.

You may also consider contacting an authorized

dea

ler.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

To contact Alfa Romeo Emergency Roadside

Assistance Dial toll-free 1–844–253–2872 for

U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for Canadian

Residents

 Provide your name, vehicle identification

number, license plate number, and your

location, including the telephone number from

which you are calling.

 Briefly describe the nature of the problem and

answer a few simple questions.

 You will be given the name of the service

provider and an estimated time of arrival. If you

feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let

us know. With your consent, we will contact

local police or safety authorities.

HAZARD WARNING

FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in

the switch bank below the radio screen.

Push the switch once to turn the

Hazard Warning Flashers on. When the

swi

tch is activated, all directional turn

signals will flash on and off to warn

oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the

switch a second time to turn the Hazard Warning

Flashers off.

This is an emergency warning system and it

shou

ld not be used when the vehicle is in motion.

Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is

creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek

ass

istance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will

continue to operate even though the ignition is

cycled to OFF.

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

nic Brake Assist (PBA) System

The PBA system is designed to improve the

hic

le’s braking capacity during emergency

braking.

For further details about the Panic Brake Assist

Sys

tem, refer to the “Active Safety Systems”

section in the “Safety” chapter.

SOS - EMERGENCY CALL

Your vehicle has an on-board assistance feature

that is designed to provide support in case of an

accident and/or emergency. This feature is

automatically activated by air bag intervention, or

can be activated manually by pushing the button

located on the base of the rear view mirror.

NOTE:

SOS - Emergency Call will only work with an

ena

bled network operator.

SOS - Emergency Call Button

CAUTION!

Prolonged use of the Hazard Warning Flashers

may discharge the vehicle’s battery.

189

The SOS - Emergency Call system automatically

forwards a call to emergency services in the event

of an accident with air bag intervention providing

that the ignition device is in RUN position and the

air bags are working. The manual Emergency Call

is also possible when the ignition device is OFF

until its backlight stays on by pushing the SOS

button at the base of the mirror. When the

connection between the vehicle and a public

safety operator is made, your vehicle will

automatically transmit location and vehicle

information to the emergency service operator.

Only a public safety operator can remotely end

the SOS - Emergency Call and, if necessary, call

the vehicle back through the Emergency Call

system. Once the call has ended, you can still call

the emergency service operator to indicate

additional information by pushing the button

again.

To Use SOS - Emergency Call

Push and hold the SOS - Emergency Call button

a few seconds. The LED, located next to the

SOS button, will blink once and then stay on

indicating a call has been placed.

NOTE:

If the SOS - Emergency Call button is accidentally

shed, there is a 10 second delay before the call

is placed. The system will issue a verbal alert that

a call is about to be made. To cancel the call

connection, push the SOS - Emergency Call

button again.

Once a connection between the vehicle and an

ergency service operator is made, the SOS -

Emergency Call system will transmit the following

important vehicle information to the operator:

 Indication that the occupant placed an SOS -

Emergency Call.

 The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

 The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

You will then be able to speak with the emergency

rvice operator to determine if additional help is

needed.

The SOS - Emergency Call has priority over other

dio sources, which will be muted. If you have a

phone connected via Bluetooth®, it is discon

nected and reconnected at the end of the SOS -

ergency Call. Voice prompts will guide you

during the SOS - Emergency Call. If a connection

is made between an emergency service operator

and your vehicle, emergency service operators

may record conversations and sounds within your

vehicle once a connection is made, and by using

the service you consent to having this information

shared.

NOTE:

If you have not subscribed to the SOS service or if

the

service is not available or has expired, the

Connect system will display a dedicated screen

when the button is pressed informing you to

contact the national emergency number 9-1-1

(the respective graphic button will be displayed to

make the call if you have connected your mobile

phone via Bluetooth® The call to the national

emergency number 9-1-1 will be made via the

mobile phone by pressing red graphic button

shown on the Connect system display.

SOS Screen Message

OS - Emergency Call System Limitations

When the ignition switches to the RUN position,

the

Emergency Call system runs a routine check.

During this check, a red indicator will illuminate

for about three seconds. This signal must not be

confused with a fault warning. In the event of a

malfunction, the red indicator would remain on. If

the SOS - Emergency Call system detects a

malfunction, any of the following may occur at the

time the malfunction is detected:

NOTE:

The SOS Call function may not be available for the

firs

t minute after the vehicle is started

 The LED next to the SOS button will be contin-

uously illuminated red.

 The Emergency Call system is powered by its

own non-rechargeable battery to ensure

operation, even when the vehicle battery is

discharged or disconnected. When system

battery is discharged, the instrument cluster

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

190

(Continued)

display will show a special message, different

than other messages referring to other types

of faults. In this case, the system works only if

 The instrument cluster will display a message

alerting you to contact the Service Network

along with a failure warning light.

Even if the SOS - Emergency Call system is fully

fun

ctional, external or uncontrolled factors may

prevent or stop SOS - Emergency Call operation.

These include, but are not limited to, the following

factors:

 The key fob has been removed from the

vehicle, and the delayed accessories mode is

active.

 The ignition is in OFF position.

 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

 The SOS - Emergency Call system software

and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle

collision.

 There are network problems that could limit or

impair service operation (e.g., error by

operator, busy network, bad weather, etc.).

If the vehicle battery connection fails due to a

llision or accident, the system can support an

SOS - Emergency Call for a limited period of time.

If the battery is disconnected for service, the

system turns off. In this case, it will be possible to

make an SOS - Emergency Call only when the

battery is reconnected to the vehicle’s electrical

system.

System Requirements

 Vehicle must have an operable 3G network

connection.

 Vehicle must be powered with a properly

functioning electrical system.

 The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC

position, or in OFF position until its backlight

stays on.

WARNING!

 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

3G and GPS aerials. You could prevent 3G

and GPS signal reception, which can prevent

your vehicle from placing an emergency call.

An operable 3G network connection and a

GPS signal is required for the

SOS-Emergency Call system to function

properly.

 Do not add any aftermarket electrical

equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system.

This may prevent your vehicle from sending a

signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid

interference that can cause the

SOS-Emergency Call system to fail, never

add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to

your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the

antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE

AND SYSTEM LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR

ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER

AN ACCIDENT) THE SOS FEATURES, APPS

AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT

OPERATE.

 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

turns on the air bag warning light in the

instrument cluster if a malfunction in any

part of the air bag system is detected. If the

air bag warning light is illuminated, the air

bag system may not be working properly and

the SOS-Emergency Call system may not be

able to send a signal to an emergency

service operator. If the air bag warning light

is illuminated, contact the Service Network

to have the air bag system checked

immediately.

 Ignoring the LED on the SOS-Emergency Call

button could mean you will not have

emergency call services if needed. If the LED

on SOS-Emergency Call button is illuminated

red, contact the Service Network to have the

emergency call system checked

immediately.

 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger

(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road

conditions or location), do not wait for voice

contact from an emergency service operator.

All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

 Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

and regularly inspect your vehicle may result

in vehicle damage, accident or injury.

WARNING!

191

Frequently Asked Questions:

What happens if I accidentally push the SOS -

ergency Call Button? You have 10 seconds

after pushing the emergency button to cancel the

call. To cancel the call, push the button again.

What type of information is sent when I make an

S - Emergency Call from my vehicle? Certain

vehicle information, such as the VIN, is

transmitted along with last known GPS location.

Also note that emergency service operators may

record conversations and sounds within your

vehicle once a connection is made, and by using

the service you consent to having this information

shared.

When can I use the SOS - Emergency

ll button?

You can O

NLY

use the

SOS - Emergency Call button to make a

ll if you or someone else needs

emergency assistance.

BULB REPLACEMENT

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

 Before replacing a bulb, check the contacts for

oxidation.

 Replace blown bulbs with others of the same

type and power.

 After replacing a headlight bulb, always check

its alignment.

 When a light is not working, check that the

corresponding fuse is intact before changing

the bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to

“Fuses” in this chapter.

NOTE:

In some particular climate conditions, such as low

mperature, humidity, or after washing the

vehicle, a thin condensation layer may form on

the internal surfaces of the front and rear head

lights. This condensation will disappear after

itching on the headlights.

TYPES OF BULBS

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B):

To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then

extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C):

Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D):

To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E):

To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F):

to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

192

REPLACEMENT BULBS

*Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights

REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS

Front Light Cluster

Direction Indicators

Proceed with the directions below to change

bs:

1. Operating inside the engine compartment,

cate the protective cover.

Protective Cover Location

Remove protective cover.

Pro

tective Cover

Light bulbs Type Power

Front direction indicators* PY24W 24W

Rear Fog lights * H11 55 W

Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL)* H15 55/15W

Dipped beam headlights* H7 55W

Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W

Glove compartment light W5W 4W

Liftgate light W5W 5W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W

WARNING!

Only replace bulbs when the engine is off. Also

ensure that the engine is cold, to prevent the

risk of burns.

193

3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counter-

clockwise, and then slide it off the headlight

Bulb/Connector

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb

hol

der.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is

rrectly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the

hou

sing on the headlight body and turn it

clockwise, making sure that it is locked

correctly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Fro

nt Light Cluster With Main Beam Xenon Gas

Dis

charge Headlights

To replace the bulbs of the main beam

head

lights, contact an authorized dealer.

REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS

Courtesy Mirror Light

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. L

ift the mirror cover and remove the lens,

ing a suitable tool.

Sun Visor

2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side

ntacts, then insert the new bulb, making

sure that it is correctly fastened between the

contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it first on one side

d then pressing on the other side until it

clicks into place.

Glove Compartment Light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. O

pen the glove compartment.

emove the courtesy light assembly, using a

itable tool.

Courtesy Lamp Indent

Open protective cover and remove the bulb

pulling out of the connector.

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly

inserted fully.

5. Close the protective cover on the lens.

Install courtesy light, inserting it first on one

de and then pressing on the other side until

it clicks into place.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.

Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb

life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily

surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1 — Mirror Cover

2 — Lens

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

194

Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Open the liftgate, and remove the liftgate

mp assembly using a suitable tool.

Ceiling Light Indent

Open protective cover and remove the bulb

lling out of the connector.

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly

serted fully.

4. Close the protective cover on the lens.

Install liftgate lamp in the correct position,

serting it first on one side, and then

pressing on the other side until it clicks into

place.

Puddle Lights On Door Panel

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. O

pen the door and remove the puddle light

sembly, using a suitable tool.

Puddle Light Indent

Open protective cover and remove the bulb

pulling out of the connector.

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly

serted fully.

4. Close the protective cover on the lens.

Install puddle light in the correct position,

serting it first on one side and then pressing

on the other side until it clicks into place.

FUSES

GENERAL INFORMATION

The fuses protect electrical systems against

excessive current.

When a device does not work, you must check the

ele

ctrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/

melt.

Also, please be aware that using power outlets for

ext

ended periods of time with the engine off may

result in vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses

1 — Electrical Circuit

2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit

3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

195

J-CASE Fuse

Fuse Extracting Pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to the

fus

e box.

Fuse Box

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them,

d extract the pliers pulling upwards.

The pliers have two different ends, both of which

are

specifically designed to remove the different

types of fuses present in the vehicle:

Fuse Extracting Pliers

fter use, return the pliers to their proper position

following the below procedures:

 Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert

them into their housing.

 Push downward on the pliers into their housing

until they click into place.

1 — Electrical Circuit

2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit

3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

1 — MINI fuse

2 — J-CASE fuse

WARNING!

 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an

appropriate replacement fuse with the same

amp rating as the original fuse. Never

replace a fuse with another fuse of higher

amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with

metal wires or any other material. Do not

place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or

vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may

result in serious personal injury, fire and/or

property damage.

 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the

ignition is off and that all the other services

are switched off and/or disengaged.

 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an

authorized dealer.

 If a general protection fuse for safety

systems (air bag system, braking system),

power unit systems (engine system,

transmission system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

196

FUSE LOCATION

The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are

grouped in two boxes below the passenger side

foot board and inside the luggage compartment.

CONTROL UNIT UNDER PASSENGER SIDE

OOTBOARD

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. L

ift the upper end of the footboard on the

ssenger side, pulling to release the two

buttons.

Release Buttons On Footboard

Unscrewing the two hooks, remove the panel

lling downward.

Release Hooks On Footboard

The

fuses are freely accessible on the control

uni

After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel

and

footboard are correctly locked.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. L

ift the luggage compartment cover.

Remove the control unit cover.

ntrol Unit

The

fuses are freely accessible on the control

uni

The number identifying the electrical component

corre

sponding to each fuse is shown on the

cover.

After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have

clo

sed the cover correctly.

1 — Footboard

2 — Panel

197

CONTROL UNIT UNDER PASSENGER SIDE FOOTBOARD

Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Front power window (driver’s side) F33 25

Front power window (passenger side) F34 25

Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control system, alarm, power

or mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port

F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), doors unlock, central lock F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

198

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Receiver module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40

Hi-Fi system F08 30

I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10

KL15/a 12 Volts Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15

Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10

Tow bar (+15) F4 10

199

JACKING AND TIRE

CHANGING

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

This vehicle can be equipped with a Tire Service

Kit. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for

further information.

As an alternative to the Tire Service Kit, the

vehic

le may be purchased with a compact spare

tire. Refer to “Changing Procedure” in this

chapter for further information.

JACK INFORMATION AND USAGE

RECAUTIONS

Jack Information

 The jack weighs 4.4 lb (2 kg).

 The jack requires no adjustment.

 The jack cannot be repaired, and in the event

of a fault it must be replaced by another factory

replacement.

 No tool other than its extension lever may be

fitted on the jack.

Jack Maintenance

 Prevent any dirt from depositing on the "worm

screw".

 Keep the "worm screw" lubricated.

 Never modify the jack.

Conditions Of Non-Use Of The Jack

 Temperatures below −40°F (−40°C).

 On sandy or muddy ground.

 On uneven ground.

 On steep slopes in extreme weather

conditions.

 In direct contact with the engine or for repairs

under the vehicle.

 On boats.

CHANGING PROCEDURE

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid

ice or slippery areas.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.

Apply the electric park brake.

lace the gear selector into PARK (P).

Place the ignition in the OFF mode.

Block both the front and rear of the wheel

agonally opposite of the jacking position.

For example, if changing the right front tire,

block the left rear wheel.

Wheels Blocked

WARNING!

 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of

the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid the danger of

being hit when operating the jack or

changing the wheel.

 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is

dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack

and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never

put any part of your body under a vehicle that

is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised

vehicle, take it to a service center where it

can be raised on a lift.

 Never start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on a jack.

 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be

used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.

The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level

surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of

the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

200

7. Open the liftgate and lift up the load floor

using the handle.

8. Take the warning triangle and position it at a

suitable distance from the vehicle to warn

oncoming vehicles.

9. Unscrew the locking plate and take out the

mpact spare tire and the air compressor.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

10. Remove the damaged wheel by using the

whe

el wrench to loosen the bolts by one turn.

11. Position the jack under the vehicle, near the

whe

el to be changed, taking care not to

damage the plastic body panel.

12. Lift the extension lever on the wrench.

cking Location

13. Rotate the extension lever clockwise until the

rou

nd pin on the jack engages in the hole in

the lifting block located about 6

inches

(15 cm) from the outside edge of the body.

The

lifting points are marked by triangles

visible on the plastic body panel.

Jacking Point Indicator

. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw

ockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the

vehicle only until the tire just clears the

surface and enough clearance is obtained to

install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire

lift provides maximum stability.

1 — Locking Plate

2 — Extension Lever

3 — Wrench Head

4 — Jack

5 — Lifting Block

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking

on locations other than those indicated in the

Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

201

15. Remove the five wheel bolts and take the

wheel off.

16. Make sure the contact surfaces between

compact spare tire and hub are clean so that

the fastening bolts will not come loose.

17. Fit the compact spare tire by inserting the

firs

t wheel bolt for two threads into the hole

closest to the valve.

18. Take the wheel wrench and tighten the wheel

lts.

19. Inflate the compact spare tire by removing

the

cap from its inflation valve and screwing

on the compressor inflation hose fitting.

20. Make sure that the switch on the compressor

in the (off) O position, open the liftgate and

insert the plug into the power socket in the

cargo area, or on the center console and start

the engine. Place the on/off switch in the (on)

I position.

Attaching Compressor To Tire

. Inflate the compact spare tire to a pressure of

.5 psi (3 bar).

NOTE:

If spare tire is over inflated, be sure to lower the

psi

in the tire to the recommended amount by

using the deflation button on the air compressor.

22. Operate the wheel wrench on the jack to

wer the vehicle.

23. Remove the jack.

. Use the wheel wrench to fully tighten the

lts, passing alternately from one bolt to the

diagonally opposite one.

To obtain a more accurate reading, it is advisable

check the pressure of the compact spare tire

on the pressure gauge with the compressor off.

NOTE:

Do not stow the deflated tire in the compact spare

tire

location.

The compressor was designed for inflating the

com

pact spare tire. Do not use it for inflating

mattresses, rafts, etc.

NOTE:

Spare tires are intended for temporary use only.

Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as

n as possible.

TIRE SERVICE KIT —

IF EQUIPPED

DESCRIPTION

If a tire is punctured, you can make an emergency

repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear

storage area under the load platform.

1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can

rep

air the tire safely. You should be as far as

possible from the side of the road, and in a

position that is not dangerous for oncoming

traffic. Turn on the hazard warning flashers,

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can

make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off

the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the

vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve

stem facing outward. The vehicle could be

damaged if the spare tire is mounted

incorrectly.

6 — Air Compressor

7 — Pressure Gauge

8 — Power Button

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the

jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until

the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow

this warning may result in serious injury.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack

parts and the spare tire in the places provided.

Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or

replaced immediately.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

202

(Continued)

remove the safety triangle from the luggage

compartment, and place it at a suitable

distance from the vehicle to make other

drivers aware of your presence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with

the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near

to the ground. This will allow the tire repair kit

hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the

tire service kit flat on the ground.

3. Place the gear selector in PARK (P).

Apply the electric park brake and turn the

gine OFF.

To access the Tire Service Kit, open the liftgate

and

lift the load floor.

Load Floor

The Tire Service Kit consists of:

 Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid

 Filler Tube

 Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge

and connectors

 Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph

(80

km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily

ble to the driver (e.g. on the dashboard)

after repairing the tire

 An instruction pamphlet for reference in

prompt and correct use of the Tire Service Kit,

which must be then given to the personnel

dealing with the sealant-treated tire

 A pair of protective gloves

 Some adapters, for inflating different

elements

Tire Service Kit Components

NOTE:

 The sealing fluid is effective with external

temperatures of between -40°F (-40°C) and

122°F (50°C).

 The sealing fluid has an expiration date.

INFLATION PROCEDURE

1 — Sealant Cartridge

2 — Filling Hose

3 — Adhesive Label

4 — Air Compressor

WARNING!

 Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of

the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough

off the road to avoid the danger of being hit

when using the Tire Service Kit.

 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circumstances:

• If the puncture in the tire tread is approx-

ately 1/4 inch (6 m

m) or larger.

• If the tire has any sidewall damage.

• If

the tire has any damage from driving

with extremely low tire pressure.

• If the tire has any damage from driving

a flat tire.

• If the wheel has any damage.

• If

you are unsure of the condition of the

re or the wheel.

 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames

or heat sources.

 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure

to follow these warnings can result in injuries

that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you.

203

To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake.

2. Connect the hose to the sealant cartridge

ntaining the sealing liquid. Unscrew the tire

valve cap, take out the filler tube and tighten

the fitting on the tire valve.

Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire

Make sure the power switch of the

mpressor is in the off (O) position.

4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in the

nter console, then start the engine.

Inserting Plug Into Outlet

Start the compressor by placing the power

itch in the on (I) position.

Air Compressor

Inflate the tire to a pressure of at least 32 psi

.2 bar). Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for more information. In order

to obtain a more precise reading, check the

pressure value on pressure gauge with the

compressor off.

7. If the pressure is not at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)

aft

er 15 minutes, disengage the compressor

from

the valve and power outlet. Then, move

the vehicle forwards approximately five tire

turns in order to distribute the sealing fluid

inside the tire evenly, and then repeat the

inflation operation.

8. Drive the vehicle for about 5 m

iles (8 km),

stop, engage the electric park brake, and

recheck the tire pressure.

 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire

Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,

or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful

if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through

the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory

irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of

water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.

Change clothing as soon as possible, if there

is any contact with clothing.

 Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains

latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,

consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If

swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do

not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

WARNING!

1 — Sealant Cartridge

2 — Filler Hose

4 — Air Compressor

5 — Hose

6 — Sealant Cartridge Connector

7 — Power Switch

8 — Pressure Gauge

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

204

9. If the pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar),

DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see an autho

rized dealer.

10. I

f a pressure value of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar)

detected, restore the correct pressure (with

engine running and electric park brake

engaged), and drive immediately with great

care to an authorized dealer.

11. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant

ttle where it can be easily seen by the

driver as a reminder that the tire has been

treated with a Tire Service Kit, as well as not

to exceed the speed restriction for the

treated tire.

NOTE:

Only use original sealant cartridges, which can be

purc

hased at an authorized dealer.

CHECKING AND RESTORING TIRE

RESSURE

The compressor can also be used to check and, if

necessary, restore the tire pressure.

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that the power switch is in the

ff) O position.

2. C

onnect the hose directly to the valve on the

re to be inflated.

3. Insert the plug into the socket in the

ssenger compartment or in the cargo area

and start the engine.

4. Start the compressor by putting the power

itch to (on) I. As soon as the correct pres-

sure is reached, put the power switch to

(off) O.

Air

Compressor And Components

the tire is over inflated, reduce the pressure by

pus

hing the PSI/BAR button and releasing it

when the correct pressure is reached.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be

jump started using a set of jumper cables and a

battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable

battery booster pack. Jump starting can be

dangerous if done improperly, so please follow

the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack,

foll

ow the manufacturer's operating instructions

and precautions.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire

repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or

replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not

exceed 50

mph (80 km/h) until the tire is

repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this

warning can result in injuries that are serious

or fatal to you, your passengers, and others

around you. Have the tire checked as soon as

possible at an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to

the padded area on the steering wheel. Adher

ing the speed restriction sticker to the padded

are

a on the steering wheel is dangerous

because the air bag may not operate (deploy)

normally resulting in serious injury. In addition,

do not adhere the sticker to areas where warn

ing lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed.

5 — Hose

7 — Power Switch

8 — Pressure Gauge

9 — PSI/BAR Button

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is

frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause

personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or

any other booster source with a system voltage

greater than 12 Volts or damage to the

battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical

system may occur.

205

REMOTE BATTERY CONNECTION POSTS

Your vehicle is equipped with remote battery

connection posts for jump starting. Depending on

the vehicle model, remote post locations may

vary.

Non Quadrifoglio Model

The remote jump starting battery posts can be

found inside the engine compartment.

Remote Battery

Post Locations

The remote positive (+

) post is located above the

engine stabilizer bar, which can be accessed by

opening the spring loaded protective flap.

Remote Positive

(+) Protective Flap

Remote Positive

(+) Post

The remote negative (-

) post is an exposed stud,

positioned next to the passenger side hood lock

on the upper frame rail.

Remote Negative

(-) Post Location

To carry out the operation, you need to have the

rrect cables to connect to the battery of

another vehicle or a portable battery booster

pack to the remote posts of the discharged

battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at

the ends and are identified by different sheath

colors (red = positive, black = negative).

Remote Positive (+

) Post

Remote Negative (-

) Post

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The

resulting electrical spark could cause the

battery to explode and could result in serious

injury. Only use the specific ground point, do

not use any other exposed metal parts.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

206

Quadrifoglio Model

Remote Battery Post Locations

The remote positive (+

) post is located next to the

passenger side hood lock on the inside of the

upper frame rail, and can be accessed by

removing the protective flap.

Remote Positive

(+) Protective Flap

Remote Positive

(+) Post Location

The remote negative (-) post is an exposed stud,

positioned next to the passenger side hood lock

on the upper frame rail.

Remote Negative

(-) Post Location

To carry out the operation, you need to have the

rrect cables to connect to the battery of

another vehicle or a portable battery booster

pack to the remote posts of the discharged

battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at

the ends and are identified by different sheath

colors (red = positive, black = negative).

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

Remote Positive (+) Post

Remote Negative (-

) Post

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The

resulting electrical spark could cause the

battery to explode and could result in serious

injury. Only use the specific ground point, do

not use any other exposed metal parts.

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure

could result in personal injury or property

damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result

in damage to the charging system of the

booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

207

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle the

ignition to OFF.

2. Turn off all electrical features in the vehicle.

f using another vehicle to jump start the

ttery, park the vehicle within the jumper

cables reach, apply the park brake and make

sure the ignition is OFF.

Cable Connection

Proceed as follows to perform a jump starting

proc

edure:

1. Connect the positive (+

) end of the jumper

cable to the remote positive (+) post of the

vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+

)

jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the

booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-

) end of the jumper

cable to the negative (-) post of the booster

battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-

)

jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post

of the discharged vehicle.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the

oster battery, let the engine idle a few

minutes, and then start the engine in the

vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a

portable battery booster pack, before starting

the vehicle, wait a few seconds after

completing the connection.

6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-

ction procedure below.

Cable Disconnection

1. D

isconnect the negative (-

) end of the jumper

cable from the remote negative (-) post of the

vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-

)

jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the

booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+

) end of the jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the booster

battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+

)

jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post

of the vehicle with the discharged battery, and

reinstall the protective cap.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your

vehic

le, you should have the battery and charging

system inspected at an authorized dealer.

BUMP STARTING

Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or

coasting downhill.

NOTE:

You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic

tran

smission by pushing it.

ENGINE OVERHEATING

Engine overheating may occur in situations such

as (but not limited to) extreme environmental

temperatures or frequent engine stops/starts. If

the engine becomes overheated, the Engine

Temperature Warning Light in the instrument

cluster will illuminate along with a dedicated

message. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages

On The Instrument Panel” in the “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

In any of the following situations, you can reduce

the

potential for overheating by taking the

appropriate action.

 On the highways — slow down.

 In city traffic — while stopped, place the

transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase

engine idle speed.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as

this could establish a ground connection and

personal injury could result.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The

resulting electrical spark could cause the

battery to explode and could result in serious

injury. Only use the specific ground point, do

not use any other exposed metal parts.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power

outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,

even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,

etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough

without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery

will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery

life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

208

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down

impending overheat condition:

 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.

The A/C system adds heat to the engine

cooling system and turning the A/C off can

help remove this heat.

 You can also turn the temperature control to

maximum heat, the mode control to floor and

the blower control to high. This allows the

heater core to act as a supplement to the

radiator and aids in removing heat from the

engine cooling system.

NOTE:

 If the cooling fan does not operate while the

engine is running, the engine temperature will

increase. Stop the engine and contact an

authorized dealer.

 If the engine continues to overheat or

frequently overheats, have the cooling system

inspected. The engine could be seriously

damaged unless repairs are made. Contact an

authorized dealer.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

See an authorized dealer to disengage the

manual park release lever.

TOWING A DISABLED

VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a

disabled vehicle using a commercial towing

service.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a Anti-Lift Protec-

tion system, you will need to disable the system

or to towing by pushing the button located on

the overhead console. Refer to ”Security Alarm

System — If Equipped” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

The operators of the assistance vehicle must be

formed with regard to the vehicle's minimum

height from ground in order to avoid contact

between the ends of the bumpers with the

equipment of the breakdown truck.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your

radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from

under the hood, do not open the hood until the

radiator has had time to cool. Never try to

open a cooling system pressure cap when the

radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge

reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle

the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off

until the pointer drops back into the normal

range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn

the engine off immediately, and call for

service.

WARNING!

A special tool is required to perform this

procedure. Damage to the vehicle or serious

injury or death may occur if the procedure is

performed improperly. Please contact an

authorized dealer to have this procedure

performed.

CAUTION!

 The vehicle should be transported with all

four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of

a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing

with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted.

When towing with only the front (or rear)

wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the

body, it could damage the transmission.

 Do not use sling-type equipment when

towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

 When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,

do not attach to front or rear suspension

components. Damage to your vehicle may

result from improper towing.

 Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is

released, and remain released, while being

towed.

 Damage from improper towing is not covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

209

The following image illustrates the front and rear

attachment corners of the vehicle, to be taken

into consideration when loading the vehicle on

the commercial towing vehicle.

Front And Rear Loading Angles

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four

wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a

commercial towing vehicle.

TOW EYES

If the vehicle has been in an accident or has

broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools

container located inside the luggage

compartment for vehicle towing. Towing is meant

only for short distances on a paved road surface.

Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. U

nhook the cap on the front grille or rear

umper (if equipped), pushing on the upper

part.

Front Tow Eye Cap

AWD Models

A — Front Loading Angle 21.7°

B — Rear Loading Angle 18.3°

AWD

Models

Quadri-

foglio

dels

A — Front Loading Angle 21.7° 20.8°

B — Rear Loading Angle 18.3° 21.0°

Quadrifoglio

Models

A — Front Loading Angle 20.8°

B — Rear Loading Angle 21.0°

CAUTION!

 DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the

drivetrain will result.

 DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing

dolly can cause significant damage to your

vehicle.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above

req

uirements can cause severe transmission

damage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

210

Rear Tow Eye Cap

2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the

luggage compartment and carefully clean the

threaded housing on the vehicle before

using it.

3. T

ighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about

turns).

NOTE:

The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the

tow

eye must not exceed 15°.

Work Angle Of Tow Cable

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced

Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Sa

fety” for further information on the Enhanced

Accident Response System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER

(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record data that will assist in understanding how

a vehicle’s systems performed under certain

crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Sa

fety” for further information on the event data

recorder (EDR).

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow

eyes.

 Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains

may break, causing serious injury or death.

 Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow

straps may break or become disengaged,

causing serious injury or death.

 Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may

cause components to break resulting in

serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

 The tow eye must be used exclusively for

roadside assistance operations. Only use the

tow eye with an appropriate device in

accordance with the highway code (a rigid

bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short

distance to the nearest service location.

 Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles

off the road or where there are obstacles.

 In compliance with the above conditions,

towing with a tow eye must take place with

two vehicles (one towing, the other towed)

aligned as much as possible along the same

center line. Damage to your vehicle may

occur if these guidelines are not followed.

 When towing, only use a facility that can tow

vehicles with low ground clearances as

extensive damage can result by using a

standard tow truck platform.

211

Correct servicing permits the performance of the

vehicle to be maintained over time, as well as

limited running costs and safeguarding the

efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a

long life for the vehicle under the best conditions.

For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned a series

of c

hecks and services for your vehicle at fixed

intervals based on distance and time, as

described in the Scheduled Servicing Plan.

Before each service, it is always necessary to

care

fully follow the instructions in the Scheduled

Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically check level of

fluids, tire pressure, etc.).

Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized

dea

ler according to a set time schedule. If, during

each operation, in addition to the ones

scheduled, the need arises for further

replacements or repairs, these may be carried

out with the owner’s explicit consent only.

NOTE:

Scheduled Servicing intervals are required by the

man

ufacturer. Failure to have them carried out

may invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

You are advised to inform an authorized dealer of

any

small operating irregularities without waiting

for the next service.

PERIODIC CHECKS

Every month or every 620 miles (1,000 km) or

before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:

 Engine coolant level.

 Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an

authorized dealer as soon as possible).

 Windshield washer fluid level.

 Tire inflation pressure and condition.

 Operation of lighting system (headlights,

direction indicators, hazard warning lights,

etc.).

 Operation of windshield washing/wiping

system and positioning/wear of wiper blades.

 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Oil consumption of the engine depends on

con

ditions and driving style. For this reason, the

engine oil level must be checked every

1,860

miles (3,000 km), and top off if necessary

refer

to “Engine Oil” in this chapter for further

information.

HEAVY USAGE OF THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle is used under one of the following

conditions:

 Dusty roads.

 Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles

(7 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.

 Engine often idling or driving long distances at

low speeds or long periods of inactivity.

 In the event of a long period of inactivity.

The following checks must be carried out more

ofte

n than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing

Plan:

 Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

 Visually inspect conditions of: engine,

transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel

system/brakes) and rubber elements

(sleeves/bushes, etc.).

 Check battery charge and battery fluid level

(electrolyte).

 Visually inspect conditions of the accessory

drive belts.

 Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and

replace oil filter.

 Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air

filter.

 Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500

km) if

the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road

environment or is operated predominately at idle

or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle

use is considered Severe Duty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

212

MAINTENANCE PLAN (2.0L T4 MAIR ENGINE)

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Change engine oil and replace oil filter

SOS backup battery replacement (if equipped)

● ● ●

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check the tire service kit recharge condition and

expiration date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel

warning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool)

and, if equipped, engine oil degradation

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody

protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),

rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system

and adjust nozzles, if necessary

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake

pads and operation of pad wear indicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

213

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the

accessory drive belt(s)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt(s) ●

Replace air cleaner cartridge

● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner

o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement

1. The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the

instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles (16,000 km).

2. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.

3. Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

4. If oil degradation ratio (data collectible from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

7. The spark plug change interval is 60,000 miles for NAFTA market or 60,000 km outside NAFTA. Yearly intervals do not apply.

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

WARNING!

 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you

have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could

cause an accident.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

214

MAINTENANCE PLAN (2.9L V6 ENGINE)

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

SOS backup battery replacement (if equipped)

● ● ●

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and

expiration date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel

warning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody

protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),

rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system

and adjust nozzles, if necessary

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake

pads and operation of pad wear indicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Inspect the CV/Universal joints ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

215

Brake pads/brake discs replacement

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the

accessory drive belt(s)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s

Replace air cleaner cartridge

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid

Replace the cabin air filter

o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement

● ● ● ● ●

1. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.

2. Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

3. The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message

on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket.

4. Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/

or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt

must be replaced every 2 years.

5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

7. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

216

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CHECKING LEVELS — 2.0L T4 MAIR ENGINE

1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Filler Cap

3 – Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

217

CHECKING LEVELS — 2.9L V6 ENGINE

ENGINE OIL

The engine oil level can be seen on the

instrument cluster display every time the engine

is started, or on the Information and

Entertainment system display by activating on the

main menu (MENU button) the following

functions in sequence:

1. “Apps”

“My Car”

“

Oil Level”

ck on the display using the 6 notches that the

oil

level is between the MIN and MAX level:

1 notch MIN level, 6 notches MAX level.

If the oil level is close to or below the MIN mark,

add

oil gradually through the filler, (refer to

“Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On

Display” in this section) considering that each

notch shown on the display corresponds to

approximately 8.8 fl oz (250

ml).

The oil level can also be checked manually on

L Quadrifoglio models.

1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Dipstick

3 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 – Engine Oil Filler

CAUTION!

Make sure not to add too much oil when

topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess

may damage the engine. Have the vehicle

checked. Never exceed the MAX level when

topping off engine oil. It is advisable to check

the oil level in intermediate steps using the oil

dipstick (2.9L Quadrifoglio Only).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

218

(Continued)

NOTE:

Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper

rque whenever it is removed to add oil to

engine. Never run the engine with cap removed

as this could cause oil to leak from engine.

Manual Oil Level Checking Procedure —

2.9L Quadrifoglio

Check that the oil level is between the MIN and

marks on dipstick, clean it with a lint-free

cloth and reinsert it. Extract the dipstick again

and check that the level is between the MIN and

MAX marks.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On

splay — 2.9L Quadrifoglio

If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to

sure the correct indication of the oil level on

the display, proceed with the process below:

 Leave the car on flat ground with the engine

running for approximately five minutes

(temperature higher than 198°F (90°C) and

shut the engine off

 Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition to the

ACC mode without starting the engine and wait

for a few seconds.

NOTE:

If the level indication is not updated after the

pre

viously described procedure, repeat the

engine adjustment, shut the engine off and wait

another five minutes before starting it again. If

the indication is not updated after the second

start, contact an authorized dealer.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On

splay — 2.0L T4 MAir

If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to

sure the correct indication of the oil level on

the display, proceed with the process below:

 Leave the car on flat ground with the engine

running for approximately five minutes

(temperature higher than 176°F (80°C) and

shut the engine off.

 Start the engine again and idle it for about two

minutes.

NOTE:

If you have added the specified amount of oil and

the

indicator is not reading “Full”, please contact

an authorized dealer.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID

If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of the

reservoir and add the fluid described in the

“Fluids and Lubricants” in the “Technical Specifi

cations” chapter.

WASHER FLUID FOR WINDSHIELD/

EADLIGHTS

The windshield and headlight (if equipped)

washer fluid reservoir is equipped with a

telescopic filler neck.

If the level is too low, remove reservoir cap and lift

the

filler neck. Then, add the fluid described in

“Technical Specifications”. After filling the

reservoir, lower the filler neck and install the

reservoir cap until you hear it click.

NOTE:

The headlight washers are activated every

10 activations of the windshield washer.

NOTE:

The headlight washing system will not work if the

quid level is low (situation indicated by the

symbol on the instrument cluster display). The

windshield washer will keep working.

CAUTION!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately on

the display after topping off. Consequently,

wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the

display and follow the procedure below.

WARNING!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the

engine to cool down before loosening the filler

cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminum

cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!

CAUTION!

The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.

If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notch on the

right turns red) after the fill-up, go to an

authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the oil in excess removed.

Do not add oil with specifications different

from those of the oil already in the engine.

Used engine oil and oil filters contain

substances which are harmful to the

environment. To change the oil and filters, we

advise you to contact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

219

On vehicles equipped with headlight washers,

there is a reference notch on the dipstick: ONLY

the windshield/rear window washer operates

with the level below this reference.

BRAKE FLUID

Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the

fluid level in the tank is low, contact an authorized

dealer to have the system checked.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ACTIVATION

YSTEM OIL

The transmission control oil level should only be

checked at an authorized dealer.

USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE

F YOUR BATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and make it last

longer, observe the following instructions:

 When you park the vehicle, ensure that the

doors and liftgate are closed properly to

prevent any lights from remaining on inside the

passenger's compartment.

 Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard

warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time

when the engine is not running.

 Before performing any operation on the

electrical system, disconnect the negative

battery cable.

If you wish to install electrical accessories after

rchasing the vehicle that require permanent

electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories

which influence the electrical supply

requirements, contact an authorized dealer,

whose qualified staff will evaluate the overall

electrical consumption.

NOTE:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering

st be initialized. The warning light on the

instrument panel switches on to indicate this. To

rry out this procedure, simply turn the steering

wheel all the way from one end to the other, and

then turn it back to the central position.

BATTERY

The battery does not require the electrolyte to be

topped up with distilled water. A periodic check

carried out at an authorized dealer, however, is

necessary to check efficiency.

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for

intenance.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with another

ori

ginal battery with the same specifications.

Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for

maintenance.

NOTE:

It will not be possible to open the liftgate with a

y or by pushing the button in the passenger

compartment when the battery is disconnected.

So, always position the manual liftgate opening

strap on the liftgate lock before disconnecting the

battery. The procedure is described in the “Lift

gate Emergency Opening” procedure described in

“Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To Know

Your Vehicle”.

CAUTION!

If the charge level remains under 50% for a

long time, the battery may be damaged by

sulphation, reducing its capacity and

efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is

also more prone to the risk of freezing (at

temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).

WARNING!

 Battery acid is a corrosive solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery

acid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing.

Do not lean over a battery when attaching

clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin,

flush the area immediately with large

amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting”

in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

 Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the battery.

Do not use a booster battery or any other

booster source with an output greater than

12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch

each other.

 Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after handling.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

220

PRESSURE WASHING

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high

pressure washer is not recommended.

BATTERY RECHARGING

IMPORTANT NOTES

NOTE:

 Before using the charging device, always make

sure that it is appropriate for the installed

battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 Volts)

and low amperage (maximum 15 Amps).

 Recharge the battery in a well ventilated

environment.

 Before using any devices to charge or to

maintain the charge of the battery, carefully

follow the instructions provided with the device

in order to properly and safely connect it to the

vehicle battery.

You can recharge the battery without discon-

necting the wires of the vehicle's electrical

stem.

 To reach the battery, remove the load floor

inside the liftgate.

Load Floor

 Locate the battery access panel under the load

floor.

Battery Access Panel

 Remove the protective cover and connect the

positive cable terminal of the charger (usually

red) to the positive terminal (+) of the battery.

 Connect the negative terminal of the charger

(usually black) to nut next to the negative

terminal (-) of the battery.

Battery

CAUTION!

Precautions have been taken to safeguard all

parts and connections however, the pressures

generated by these machines is such that

complete protection against water ingress

cannot be guaranteed.

WARNING!

 Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it

may explode because of the nitrogen

trapped inside the ice crystals.

 At all times while charging or recharging the

battery, make sure that any sparks or open

flames are kept sufficiently far away from the

battery.

1 — Protective Cover

2 — Negative Post (Nut)

221

The vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery

Sensor (IBS), which is able to measure the charge

and discharge voltage and calculate the charge

level and the general condition of the battery. The

sensor is placed next to the negative terminal (-)

of the battery.

For a correct charge/discharge procedure, the

charge voltage must go through the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow the instruc-

ons on the user's manual to completely

recha

rge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger

off

before disconnecting it from the battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of the

ttery charger and then the red cable

terminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of the positive

rminal of the battery and the access cover

to the battery compartment.

NOTE:

If a "quick-type" battery charger is used with the

bat

tery fitted on the vehicle, before connecting it

disconnect both cables of the battery itself. Do

not use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide

the starting voltage.

DEALER SERVICE

The following pages contain instructions on the

required maintenance from the technical

personnel who designed the vehicle.

In addition to these specific maintenance

ins

tructions specified for routine scheduled

servicing, there are other components which may

require periodic maintenance or replacement

over the vehicle’s life cycle.

ENGINE OIL

Engine Oil Level Check

To ensure correct engine lubrication, the oil must

ays be kept at the prescribed level (see

“Engine Compartment” in this chapter).

Check the oil level at regular intervals, for

exa

mple every 1,864 miles (3,000 km).

It must be checked about five minutes after

pping the engine.

Full operating temperature must be reached. The

vehic

le must also be parked on as level a surface

as possible.

The engine oil level can be checked using the

Info

rmation and Entertainment system. To

access the function, activate the main menu

(MENU button) and select the following options in

sequence:

1. “Applications”

“Vehicle Information”

“Oil level”

sure that the oil level is within the interval on

dipstick between the minimum and maximum

limits (Quadrifoglio only).

Changing The Engine Oil

See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correct

ervi

cing intervals.

Choice Of Engine Oil Type

To ensure optimal performance and maximum

prot

ection in all operating conditions, it is advised

to use certified engine oils. Refer to “Fluid And

Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information.

Additives For Engine Oil

It is strongly recommended not to use additives

(

her than leak detection dyes) with the engine

oil.

The engine oil is a product designed especially for

the

vehicle and its performance may be deteri-

orated through the use of further additives.

Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters

For the disposal of the engine oil and filters,

tact the appropriate body to determine local

regulations.

NOTE:

Used engine oil disposed of incorrectly may seri-

ously harm the environment.

ENGINE OIL FILTER

Replacing the Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter must be replaced each time

the

engine oil is changed. It is advised to replace

it with a genuine spare part, specifically designed

for this vehicle.

AIR FILTER

Replacing the Air Cleaner

See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correct

servicing intervals. It is advised to replace it with

a genuine spare part, specifically designed for

this vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

222

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

AINTENANCE

To ensure the best possible performance, the air

conditioning system must be checked and

undergo maintenance at an authorized dealer at

the beginning of the summer.

Replace The Cabin Air Filter

See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correct

rvicing intervals. For cleaner replacement,

contact an authorized dealer.

LUBRICATING MOVING PARTS OF THE

ODYWORK

Ensure that the locks and bodywork junction

points, including components such as the seat

guides, door hinges (and rollers), liftgate and

hood are periodically lubricated with

lithium-based grease to ensure correct, silent

operation and to protect them from rust and

wear.

Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating

eve

ry trace of dirt and dust. After lubricating,

eliminate excess oil and grease. Also pay

particular attention to the hood closing devices,

to ensure correct operation. During operations on

the hood, to be carried out with the engine cold,

also remember to check, clean and lubricate the

locking, release and safety devices.

Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year.

ply a small amount of high-quality lubricant

directly into the lock barrel.

If necessary, contact an authorized dealer as

on as possible.

WINDSHIELD WIPER

Periodically clean the windshield and rear

window and rubber profile of the windshield wiper

blades, using a sponge or a soft cloth and a

non-abrasive detergent. This eliminates the salt

or impurities accumulated when driving.

Prolonged operation of the windshield window

pers with dry glass may cause the deterioration

of the blades, in addition to abrasion of the

surface of the glass. To eliminate the impurities

on the dry glass, always operate the windshield

washers.

In the event of very low outdoor temperatures,

low 0°F (-17.8°C) , ensure that the movement

of the rubber part in contact with the glass is not

obstructed. Use a suitable deicing product to

release it if required.

Avoid using the windshield wipers to remove frost

ice.

Also avoid contact of the rubber profile of the

ades with petroleum derivatives such as engine

oil, gas, etc.

NOTE:

The life of the windshield wiper blades varies

cording to the usage frequency. In any case, it

is advised to replace the blades approximately

once a year. When the blades are worn, noise,

marks on the glass or streaks of water may be

noticed. In the presence of these conditions,

clean the windshield wiper blades or, if neces

sary, replace them.

Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades

(“Service Position” Function)

The “service position” function allows the driver

replace the windshield wiper blades more

easily. It is also recommended to activate this

function when it is snowing and to make it easier

to remove any dirt deposits in the area where the

blades are normally positioned, when washing.

NOTE:

If the windshield wipers are raised while not in

the

“service position,” it is possible to damage

the hood.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemicals to clean the air

conditioning system, since the internal

components may be damaged. This kind of

damage is not covered by warranty.

WARNING!

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-

cants approved by the manufacturer for your

r conditioning system. Some unapproved

refrigerants are flammable and can explode,

injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or

lubricants can cause the system to fail, requir

ing costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Informa-

tion Book, located in your owner’s information

t, for further warranty information.

WARNING!

Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is a

serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in

bad weather conditions.

223

Activation Of The Function

To activate this function, disable the windshield

wiper before placing the ignition in the OFF

position.

This function can only be activated within two

min

utes of placing the ignition in the OFF

position.

To activate this function, move the lever upward

for a

t least three seconds.

Windshield Wiper Stalk

Function Deactivation

The function is deactivated if:

 More than two minutes passes before placing

the ignition in the OFF position after having

raised the lever and putting the wipers into

service position.

 The ignition is placed in the ACC position and

the windshield wiper control is used.

If, after using the function, the ignition is set back

ACC with the blades in a position other than

rest position (at the base of the windshield), they

will only return to rest position following a

command given using the stalk (stalk upwards,

into unstable position) or when a speed of 3

mph

m/h) is exceeded.

Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades

Proceed as follows:

1. R

aise the wiper arm, push tab of the attach-

nt spring and remove the blade from the

arm.

iper Release Tab

Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in the

dicated housing in the arm and checking

that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto the windshield.

NOTE:

Do not operate the windshield wiper with the

bla

des lifted from the windshield.

Front/Rear Windshield Washers

The window washer nozzles are fixed. If there is

jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid in the

reservoir. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this

chapter for the reservoir location.

Front Windshield Washers

ar Windshield Washer

The

n, check that the nozzle holes are not clogged;

use

a needle to unblock them if necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

224

(Continued)

EXHAUST SYSTEM

Adequate maintenance of the engine exhaust

system represents the best protection against

leaks of carbon monoxide into the passenger

compartment.

If an unusual noise from the exhaust or the

pre

sence of smoke in the passenger

compartment is identified, or if the underbody or

rear section of the vehicle have been damaged,

have the entire exhaust system and adjoining

bodywork areas checked at an authorized dealer

to identify any components which are broken,

damaged, worn or have moved from their correct

fitting position.

Open welding or loose connections may permit

haust gas to enter the passenger

compartment.

Have the exhaust system checked every time the

vehi

cle is raised. Replace the components where

necessary (for these operations, contact an

authorized dealer).

In normal operating conditions, the catalytic

nverter does not require maintenance. To

ensure that it operates correctly, however, and

prevent it from getting damaged, it is extremely

important that the engine operates perfectly.

To minimize the risk of damaging the catalytic

nverter, proceed as follows:

 Do not stop the engine or deactivate the

ignition with gear engaged and vehicle in

motion.

 Do not attempt to start the engine by bump

starting.

 Do not persist in using the vehicle if idling is

very irregular or the operating conditions are

very notably irregular.

COOLING SYSTEM

Coolant Check

Your vehicle has two cooling systems and they

th need to be checked to ensure they are at

proper fill levels. Refer to the “Engine

Compartment” section for the locations.

Check the engine coolant and intercooler coolant

vel every oil change or before long trips.

If there are impurities in the engine coolant, the

stem must be drained, flushed and refilled:

contact an authorized dealer.

Check the front part of the condenser to check for

y build-up of insects, leaves or other debris.

Should it be dirty, clean it by spraying delicately

with water.

Check the hoses of the engine/intercooler

oling system to ensure that the rubber has not

deteriorated and that there are no cracks, tears,

cuts or obstructions in the expansion tank side

and radiator side connectors. Should there be

any doubt regarding leaks from the system (e.g. if

frequent top ups are required), have the seal

checked at an authorized dealer.

With the engine off and at normal operating

mperature, check that the cooling system

radiator cap is closed properly.

WARNING!

 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you

unconscious and can eventually poison you.

 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you

park over materials that can burn. Such

materials might be grass or leaves coming

into contact with your exhaust system. Do not

park or operate your vehicle in areas where

your exhaust system can contact anything

that can burn.

WARNING!

 You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open the

hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never open a cooling system pressure cap

when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away

from the radiator cooling fan when the hood

is raised. The fan starts automatically and

may start at any time, whether the engine is

running or not.

 When working near the radiator cooling fan,

disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the

ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is

temperature controlled and can start at any

time the ignition is in the ON mode.

WARNING!

 Do not open hot engine cooling system.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when

the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or

remove the cap to cool an overheated

engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in

the cooling system. To prevent scalding or

injury, do not remove the pressure cap while

the system is hot or under pressure.

225

(Continued)

NOTE:

Before removing the coolant reservoir cap, wait

for

the system to cool down.

Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The Engine/

tercooler Coolant

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, have

eaning and flushing carried out at an authorized

dealer.

See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correct

rvicing intervals.

NOTE:

 For topping up, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”

in “Technical Specifications” for proper coolant

specifications.

 Do not use pure water, alcohol-based coolants,

corrosions inhibitors or additional anti-rust

products because they may be incompatible

with the engine coolant and cause the clogging

of the radiator. The use of propylene

glycol-based coolant is also not recommended.

Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap

To prevent loss of engine coolant, make sure that

the

expansion tank cap is closed. If it is open,

screw it completely until you reach/hear the click.

Periodically check the cap and clean it from any

fore

ign bodies that may have deposited on the

external surface.

Disposal of Used Coolant

Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is subject

legal requirements. Contact the appropriate

body to determine local regulations.

NOTE:

 To prevent the fluid from being ingested by

children or animals, do not keep it in open

containers or pour it on the ground. If ingested,

contact a doctor immediately. Eliminate any

traces of fluid from the ground immediately.

 When the vehicle stops after a short trip,

steam may be seen coming out from front of

the hood. This is a normal phenomenon which

is due to the presence of rain, snow or a lot of

moisture on the surface of the radiator.

 With engine and system cold, do not top up

with coolant beyond the maximum level

indicated on the reservoir in the engine

compartment.

BRAKING SYSTEM

In order to guarantee the efficiency of the braking

system, periodically check its components; for

this operation, contact an authorized dealer.

See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correct

rvicing intervals.

NOTE:

Driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal

y compromise its efficiency, increasing the risk

of accidents. When driving, never keep your foot

on the brake pedal and don’t put unnecessary

strain on it to prevent the brakes from over

heating. Excess pad wear may cause damage to

the

braking system.

 When an insufficient oil level is detected,

contact an authorized dealer to have the

system checked.

 Always keep the cap of the brake fluid reservoir

(in the engine compartment) completely

closed.

 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or

engine damage may result.

WARNING!

 Never add coolant with the engine hot or

overheated.

 Do not attempt to cool an overheated engine

by loosening or removing the cap. The heat

causes a considerable increase in pressure

in the cooling system.

 To prevent damage to the engine, only use

the engine cooling circuit caps provided.

WARNING!

 Use only manufacturer's recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”

in “Technical Specifications” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake

fluid can severely damage your brake system

and/or impair its performance. The proper

type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also

identified on the original factory installed

hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

226

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Use only a transmission oil with the character-

istics indicated in “Fluids and Lubricants” in

“T

echnical Specifications”.

Special Additives

Do not use any type of additive with the

tomatic transmission oil. The automatic

transmission oil is a product designed especially

for this vehicle and its performance may be

compromised through the use of further

additives.

Frequency of Oil Changes

In normal vehicle operating conditions, it is not

cessary to change the transmission oil.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

If necessary, replace the battery with another

battery with the same specifications. It is advised

to contact an authorized dealer for replacement.

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for

intenance.

RAISING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an authorized

dealer which is equipped with shop jacks or jack

arms.

The vehicle lifting points are marked on the side

irts with the symbols.

Vehicle Lift Point Locations

 To avoid contamination from foreign matter

or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid

that has been in a tightly closed container.

Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap

secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open

container absorbs moisture from the air

resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or

prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake

failure. This could result in a collision.

 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result

in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,

causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake

fluid can also damage painted and vinyl

surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its

contact with these surfaces.

 Do not allow petroleum based fluid to

contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal

components could be damaged, causing

partial or complete brake failure. This could

result in a collision.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your

transmission as the chemicals can damage

your transmission components. Such damage

is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an

authorized dealer immediately. Severe

transmission damage may occur. An

authorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

227

TIRES

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the

following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identifi-

cation Numbers, Tire Terminology and

finitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on

US design standards. P-Metric tires have the

letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding

the size designation. Example: P215/65R15

95H.

 European — Metric tire sizing is based on

European design standards. Tires designed to

this standard have the tire size molded into the

sidewall beginning with the section width. The

letter "P" is absent from this tire size

designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on

US design standards. The size designation for

LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires

except for the letters “LT” that are molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation.

Example: LT235/85R16.

 Temporary spare tires are designed for

temporary emergency use only. Temporary

high pressure compact spare tires have the

letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

 High flotation tire sizing is based on US design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter

molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5

R15 LT.

1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

mperature Grades

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

228

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." =

Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

15, 235, 145 =

Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

 "R" means radial construction, or

 "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

ervice Description:

95 = Load Index

 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle

loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

 LL = Light load tire or

 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

229

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,

including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle.

If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

CD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

 01 means the year 2001

 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.

Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been

drive

n for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a

imum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

230

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the

driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire,

inc

luding the spare tire (if equipped), at least

monthly and inflate to the recommended

pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

ample Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

re And Loading Information Placard

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Thi

s placard tells you important information

abo

ut the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the

vehi

cle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

Tire size designed for your vehicle.

old tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,

d spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not

exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on

your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load

carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading

conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation

pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the

“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gros

s axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front

and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further

information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and

trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the

“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure

r t

his tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire

pla

card.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the

orig

inal equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Term Definition

231

To determine the maximum loading conditions of

your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading

Information placard. The combined weight of

occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue

weight (if applicable) should never exceed the

weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The

com

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of

the

driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the

dri

ver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

ava

ilable amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of

lug

gage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

loa

d from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and

will be five 68 kg passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68)

= 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from

your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.

The following table shows examples on how to

calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing

capacities of your vehicle with varying seating

configurations and number and size of

occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the

seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

 For the following example, the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never

exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

232

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

233

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the

safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.

Four primary areas are affected by improper tire

pressure:

 Safety

 Fuel Economy

 Tread Wear

 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Safety

Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

ability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling

of sluggish response or over responsiveness in

the steering.

NOTE:

 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may

cause erratic and unpredictable steering

response.

 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may

cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling

res

istance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause

normal wear patterns and reduced tread life,

resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable

e. Overinflation produces a jarring and

uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the

driver's side door.

At least once a month:

 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good

quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not

make a visual judgement when determining

proper inflation. Tires may look properly

inflated even when they are under-inflated.

 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible

damage.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are

ways “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire

inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure

after the vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km)

aft

er sitting for a minimum of three hours. The

cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire

sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a

de range of outdoor temperatures, as tire

pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature

nge. Keep this in mind when checking tire

pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)

d the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then

the cold tire inflation pressure should be

increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi

(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside

mperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to

kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this

normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will

be too low.

WARNING!

 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and

can cause collisions.

 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can

result in overheating and tire failure.

 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road and

chuckholes can cause damage that result in

tire failure.

 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,

resulting in loss of vehicle control.

 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering

problems. You could lose control of your

vehicle.

 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the

vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to

drift to the right or left.

 Always drive with each tire inflated to the

recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the

valve stem, which could damage the valve

stem.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

234

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe

speeds and within posted speed limits. Where

speed limits or conditions are such that the

vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining

correct tire inflation pressure is very important.

Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle

operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or

original equipment vehicle dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures

For vehicle speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h),

rec

ommended cold tire inflation pressures are

listed on the Tire And Loading Information

Placard located on driver’s side B-Pillar or the

rear edge of the driver's side door.

When driving at speeds 100 mph (160 km/h)

d above, increased tire pressures and reduced

vehicle loading are required for high-speed

vehicle operation.

For driving speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h)

rec

ommended cold tire inflation pressures are

listed below under "High Speed Tire Inflation

Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must not

exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + three

passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) luggage).

2.0L Engine

NOTE:

Using tires of a different size, type, brand or design on the front and rear may adversely affect vehicle drive-ability. We recommend using only tires approved

the manufacturer. The manufacturer cannot determine if unapproved tires are suitable for use and therefore cannot guarantee vehicle safety in those

conditions.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under max -

imum load is dangerous. The added strain on

r tires could cause them to fail. You could

have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle

loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous

speeds above 75

mph (120 km/h).

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under

maximum load is dangerous. The added strain

on your tires could cause them to fail. You

could have a serious collision.

Tires Wheel

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear

235/60 R18 103V 18x8J 30 psi / 210 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 38 psi / 260 kPa

235/55 R19 101V & 105V 19x8J 30 psi / 210 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 33 psi / 230 kPa 38 psi / 260 kPa

255/45 R20 101H 20x8.5J 33 psi / 230 kPa 36 psi / 250 kPa 35 psi / 240 kPa 39 psi / 270 kPa

195/75 R18 106P

ompact Spare Tire)

– 43 psi / 300 kPa

235

2.9L Engine

Radial Ply Tires

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired

it meets the following criteria:

 The tire has not been driven on when flat.

 The damage is only on the tread section of your

tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).

 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch

mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs

d additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that

have

experienced a loss of pressure should be

replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire

of identical size and service description (Load

Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire

pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be

reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive

50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a

rap

id loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of

inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A

Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has

limited driving capabilities and needs to be

replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not

repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after

driving with underinflated tire condition, please

replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be

reused when driven under run flat mode 14 psi

(96 kPa) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the

vehi

cle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at

ful

l capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the

run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more

formation.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,

do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30

mph

(

8 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds contin-

uously without stopping.

Tires Wheel

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear

255/45R20 101Y

(Original Equipment)

20x9J 36 psi / 250 kPa – 39 psi / 270 kPa –

285/40R20 104Y

(

riginal Equipment)

20x10J – 39 psi / 270 kPa – 42 psi / 290 kPa

255/45R20 M+S

(

now Tires)

20x9J 36 psi / 250 kPa – 39 psi / 270 kPa –

255/45R20 M+S

(

now Tires)

20x9J – 39 psi / 270 kPa – 42 psi / 290 kPa

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of

tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to

handle poorly. The instability could cause a

collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of

four. Never combine them with other types of

tires.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

236

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original

equipment tires to help you in determining when

your tires should be replaced.

Tire Tread

The

se indicators are molded into the bottom of

the

tread grooves. They will appear as bands

when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch

(1.6

mm). When the tread is worn to the tread

wea

r indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

furthe

r information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon

varying factors including, but not limited to:

 Driving style.

 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation

pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to

develop across the tire tread. These abnormal

wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in

the need for earlier tire replacement.

 Distance driven.

 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of

V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a

reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per

the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly

recommended.

NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when

ins

talling new tires due to wear and tear in

existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as

lit

tle exposure to light as possible. Protect tires

from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of

many characteristics. They should be inspected

regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation

pressures. The manufacturer strongly

recommends that you use tires equivalent to the

originals in size, quality and performance when

replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph

on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the

Vehicle Certification Label for the size

designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the

original equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the

“Ti

re Safety Information” section of this manual

for more information relating to the Load Index

and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires

or t

wo rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire

can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you

ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s

specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire

dea

ler or original equipment dealer with any

questions you may have on tire specifications or

capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement

tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,

and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces

generated by excessive wheel speeds may

cause tire damage or failure. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your

vehicle's wheels faster than 30

mph (48 km/h)

for more than 30 seconds continuously when

you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a

spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced

after six years, regardless of the remaining

tread. Failure to follow this warning can result

in sudden tire failure. You could lose control

and have a collision resulting in serious injury

or death.

237

SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

ins

tead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire

Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped

Tire And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire

and wheel equivalent in look and function to the

original equipment tire and wheel found on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire

may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If

your vehicle has this option, refer to an

authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire

rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency

use only. You can identify if your vehicle is

equipped with a compact spare by looking at the

spare tire description on the Tire and Loading

Information Placard located on the driver’s side

door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the

letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original

ipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)

and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first

opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount

a c

onventional tire on the compact spare wheel,

since the wheel is designed specifically for the

compact spare tire. Do not install more than one

compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at

any given time.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire may look like the originally

equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have

limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the

same as your original equipment tire, replace (or

repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on

the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or

speed rating other than that specified for

your vehicle. Some combinations of

unapproved tires and wheels may change

suspension dimensions and performance

characteristics, resulting in changes to

steering, handling, and braking of your

vehicle. This can cause unpredictable

handling and stress to steering and

suspension components. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death. Use only the tire and

wheel sizes with load ratings approved for

your vehicle.

 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally

equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a

smaller load index could result in tire

overloading and failure. You could lose

control and have a collision.

 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in

sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle

control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different

size may result in false speedometer and

odometer readings.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do

not take your vehicle through an automatic car

wash with a compact or limited use temporary

spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may

result.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for

temporary emergency use only. With these

spares, do not drive more than 50

mph

(80

km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

d life. When the tread is worn to the tread

wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire

needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the

warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to

do so could result in spare tire failure and loss

of vehicle control.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

238

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary

emergency use only. This tire is identified by a

label located on the limited use spare wheel. This

label contains the driving limitations for this

spare. This tire may look like the original

equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited

use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is

not the same as your original equipment tire,

replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and

reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum

and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned

regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water

to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.

Wash wheels with the same soap solution

recommended for the body of the vehicle and

remember to always wash when the surfaces are

not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration

used by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium

chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road

chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt

roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap

to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh

chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the

wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them

from corroding and tarnishing.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including

cessive brake dust, care must be taken in the

selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals

and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.

Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for

aluminum or chrome wheels.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an

tended period after cleaning the wheels with

wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the

brakes to remove the water droplets from the

brake components. This activity will remove the

red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle

vibration when braking.

Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels

TIRE TYPES

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons

(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction

levels may vary between different all season

tires. All season tires can be identified by the

M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire

sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety

and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited use spare tire

affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not

drive more than the speed listed on the limited

use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire

inflation pressures listed on your Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire at the first opportunity

and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so

could result in loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that

use acidic solutions or strong alkaline

additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket

wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may

damage the wheel's protective finish. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap is

recommended.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle

brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel's protective

finish. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap

is recommended.

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty

wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will

permanently damage this finish and such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.

Used on a regular basis; this is all that is

required to maintain this finish.

239

Summer Or Three Season Tires —

If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in

snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with

Summer tires, be aware these tires are not

designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.

Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient

temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads

are covered with ice or snow. For more

information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season

signation or mountain/snowflake symbol on

the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of

four; failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of

snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be

identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on

the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the

ori

ginal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings

tha

n what was originally equipped with your

vehicle and should not be operated at sustained

speeds over 75

mph (120 km/h). For speeds

ove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original

uipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice,

id and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces

may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.

Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore,

local laws should be checked before using these

tire types.

TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES

It is possible to fit 13 mm chains on all the tires

except for R20.

Use of traction devices require sufficient

re-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-

dations to guard against damage.

NOTE:

 Traction device must be of proper size for the

tire, as recommended by the traction device

manufacturer.

 Use on rear tires only.

 Check the tension of the snow chains after the

first few meters have been driven.

 Using snow chains with tires with non-original

dimensions may damage the vehicle.

 Using different tires sizes or types (M+S, snow,

etc.) between the front and rear axles may

adversely affect vehicle drivability, with the risk

of losing control of the vehicle and resulting

accidents.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice

conditions. You could lose vehicle control,

resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too

fast for conditions also creates the possibility

of loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

 Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other

suspension components, it is important that

only traction devices in good condition are

used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if

noise occurs that could indicate device

breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the

device before further use.

 Install device as tightly as possible and then

retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and

large bumps, especially with a loaded

vehicle.

 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry

pavement.

 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s

instructions on the method of installation,

operating speed, and conditions for use.

Always use the suggested operating speed of

the device manufacturer’s if it is less than

mph (48 km/h).

 Do not use traction devices on a compact

spare tire.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

240

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles

operate at different loads and perform different

steering, driving, and braking functions. For these

reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These

effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

Rotation will increase tread life, maintain traction

levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

To resolve this problem, tires should be rotated at

ch service interval (approximately every

10,000

miles [16,000km]). More frequent

rot

ation is permissible if desired. The reasons for

any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected

prior to rotation being performed.

Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If Equipped

Due to different size tires and wheels on front and

rea

r axles tire rotation is not possible for:

2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a different front

d rear tire size.

Tire rotation contributes to the preservation of

the

grip and traction performance on wet, muddy

or snowy roads, guaranteeing optimal drivability

of the vehicle.

In the case of irregular wear of the tires identify

the

cause and correct it as soon as possible, by

contacting an authorized dealer.

The rotational direction of the tire must be taken

to consideration when rotating the tires. The

recommended rotation pattern for directional

tires is shown below.

Tire Rotation

t is recommended to avoid situations with a large

fference in wear between the front and rear

tires and to strictly use winter tires of the sizes

given on the tire placard.

The AWD system and the original tires are

veloped together to ensure the vehicle’s best

performance. When changing the tires, it is

recommended to us the same “AR” marked tires,

to maintain the same level of performance and

component life.

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES

The following tire grading categories

were established by the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration.

The specific grade rating assigned by

the tire's manufacturer in each

category is shown on the sidewall of the

tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must

nform to Federal safety

requirements in addition to these

grades.

TREADWEAR

The Treadwear grade is a comparative

rating, based on the wear rate of the

tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government

test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half times

as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices, and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION GRADES

The Traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These

grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement, as measured

under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if different

front and rear tire sizes are rotated

241

TEMPERATURE GRADES

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of

the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can

lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance,

which all passenger vehicle tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and

A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by

law.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than a

month, the following precautions should be

observed:

 Park the vehicle in an area that is covered and

dry, and well-ventilated if possible. Slightly

open the windows.

 Check that the electric park brake is not

activated.

 Carry out the “Liftgate Emergency Opening”

procedure described in the “Power Liftgate”

section of “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.

 Disconnect the negative battery terminal and

check the battery charge. Repeat this check

once every three months during storage.

 If the battery is not disconnected from the

electrical system, check its state of charge

every thirty days.

 Clean and protect the painted parts using

protective wax.

 Clean and protect the shiny metal parts using

special compounds available commercially.

 Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield

wiper rubber blades, and lift them off the glass.

 Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated

plastic sheet, paying particular care not to

damage the painted surface by dragging any

dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not

use compact plastic sheets, as they do not

allow humidity to evaporate from the surface

of the vehicle.

 Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) above the

standard prescribed pressure and check it

periodically.

 Do not drain the engine cooling system.

 Any time the vehicle is left inactive for two

weeks or more, operate the air conditioning

system with engine idling for at least five

minutes, setting external air and with fan set to

maximum speed. This operation will ensure

appropriate lubrication for the system, thus

minimizing the possibility of damage to the

compressor when the system is operated

again.

NOTE:

After cycling the ignition to STOP and having

osed the driver side door, wait at least one

minute before disconnecting the electrical supply

from the battery. When reconnecting the elec

trical supply to the battery, make sure that the

nition is in the STOP position and the driver’s

side door is closed.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

242

BODYWORK

PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC

GENTS

The vehicle is equipped with the best available

technological solutions to protect the bodywork

against corrosion.

These include:

 Painting products and systems which give the

vehicle resistance to corrosion and abrasion.

 Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steel sheets,

with high resistance to corrosion.

 Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective

function in the more exposed points:

underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.

 Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent

condensation and pockets of moisture which

could favor the formation of rust inside.

 Use of special films to protect against abrasion

in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).

CORROSION WARRANTY

Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion Warranty

against perforation due to rust of any original

element of the structure or bodywork. For the

general terms of this warranty, refer to the

Warranty Booklet.

PRESERVING THE BODYWORK

Paint

Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately

prevent the formation of rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing

the

vehicle: the frequency depends on the

conditions and environment where the vehicle is

used. For example, it is advisable to wash the

vehicle more often in areas with high levels of

atmospheric pollution or salted roads.

Some parts of the vehicle may be covered with a

tte paint which, in order to be maintained

intact, requires special care.

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow these

structions:

 If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to

wash the vehicle, keep a distance of at least

inches (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid

mage or alteration. Build up of water could

cause damage to the vehicle in the long term.

 To make it easier to remove any dirt deposits

in the area where the blades are normally

located it is recommended to position the

windshield wipers vertically (service position),

for more information, refer to “Dealer Service”

in this chapter.

 Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of

water if possible.

 Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution

over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the

sponge.

 Rinse well with water and dry with a leather

chamois.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames, hood,

hea

dlight frames, etc.) with special care, as water

may stagnate more easily in these areas. Do not

wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun

or with the hood hot: this may alter the shine of

the paintwork.

NOTE:

Avoid parking under trees; the resin dropped by

tre

es makes the paintwork go opaque and

increases the possibility of corrosion.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the

me way as the rest of the vehicle.

If washing the vehicle in a service that moves the

vehi

cle, for vehicles with automatic

transmissions, proceed with the following

directions:

 Ensure that the vehicle is on a flat surface

 Disable the automatic engagement of the

parking brake (refer to the “Electric Park

Brake” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information).

 With the vehicle stationary, the gear in

NEUTRAL (N) and the brake pedal depressed,

push the START button.

NOTE:

The vehicle will remain in NEUTRAL (N) for

minutes before PARK (P) will be engaged

tomatically.

243

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean cloths to

prevent scratching or altering the transparency.

Front Headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for

shing vehicles.

NOTE:

 Never use aromatic substances (e.g. gasoline)

or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the

plastic lenses of the headlights.

 When cleaning with a pressure washer, keep

the pressure washer at least eight inches

(20 cm) away from the headlights.

Engine Compartment

At the end of every Winter, wash the engine

mpartment thoroughly, taking care not to aim

the jet of water directly at the electronic control

units or at the windshield wiper motors. Have this

operation performed at a specialized workshop.

Refer to “Pressure Washing” in “Engine

Compartment” for further information.

NOTE:

The washing should take place with the engine

ld and the ignition device in the STOP position.

After the washing operation, make sure that the

various protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards)

have not been removed or damaged.

INTERIORS

Periodically check the cleanliness of the interior,

beneath the mats, which could cause oxidation of

the sheet metal.

SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum

cleaner. It is advised to use a moist brush on

velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge

moistened with a solution of water and neutral

detergent.

Cleaning heat press images on seats — if

uipped:

Due to the color, opacity and wear-resistant

pro

tection with which the heat press images on

some seats are made, they may be subject to

temporary scratching if they are touched by finger

nails, keys, or other hard objects. In such cases,

the visible signs do not impair the profiled

images, and can easily be removed by wiping the

affected area with a microfiber cloth moistened

with water (not dry) to restore the seat to its

original condition. The microfiber cloth must not

have been previously soaked in other substances

or detergents.

LEATHER SEATS

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or slightly

damp cloth, without exerting too much pressure.

Remove any liquid or grease stains using an

sorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Then clean

with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth dampened with

water and mild soap. If the stain persists, use

specific products and observe the instructions

carefully.

NOTE:

Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning

pro

ducts used contain no alcohol or alcohol deriv-

atives, even in small quantities.

PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if

possible made from microfiber), and a solution of

water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific

pro

ducts free from solvents and designed to

maintain the original appearance and color of the

components.

Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if

cessary moistened with water. The use of

paper tissues is not recommended as these may

leave residues.

GENUINE LEATHER PARTS

Use only water and mild soap to clean these

parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based

products.

Before using a specific product for cleaning

teriors, make sure that it does not contain

alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.

CARBON FIBER PARTS

To eliminate small scratches and marks on the

carbon, contact an authorized dealer. An

improperly performed operation may irreparably

damage the carbon.

CAUTION!

Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth

following the direction of the filaments to avoid

damaging the heating device.

244

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or those who

just want to know every detail of their vehicle,

useful information on understanding how your

vehicle works is contained in this chapter and

illustrated with data, tables, and graphics.

IDENTIFICATION DATA

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is

stamped on a plate on the front left corner of the

dashboard trim, which can be seen from outside

the vehicle, through the windshield.

Windshield VIN Location

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

LATE

The plates are located on the left side A pillar and

contain the data about:

 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

 Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).

 Color code.

 Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and

Mexico only).

 Vehicle manufacturing date.

 Maximum permitted weights.

 Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA and

Canada only).

ENGINE

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 280 HP

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 inline

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 90

Total displacement (cm³) 1,995

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 206

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 5,200

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 400

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 3,300 - 4,400

Fuel

87 Octane Minimum (R+M)/2 Method, 91 Recommended, ethanol

perce

ntage is 0–15%.

245

POWER SUPPLY

TRANSMISSION

2.9L V6 Engine

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 6 / V

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82

Total displacement (cm³) 2,891

Compression ratio 9.3:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505

Maximum power (kW) 375

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 6,500

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 443

Maximum torque (Nm) 600

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 2,500

Fuel

87 Octane Minimum (R+M)/2 Method, 91 Recommended, ethanol

rcentage is 0–15%.

Power supply

2.0L T4 MAir engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control

2.9L V6 Engine

Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable

take valve actuation

Version Transmission Traction

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse Rear-Wheel Drive

2.9L V6 Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

246

BRAKES

SUSPENSION

STEERING

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

2.9L V6 Engine

Disc

Carbon Ceramic Disc

Disc

Carbon Ceramic Disc

Electric

CAUTION!

 Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

 To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to

avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

Version Front Rear

2.0L T4 MAir Engine

Independent wheel

uble-wishbone suspension

Independent wheel with multilink

system

2.9L V6 Engine

Independent wheel

uble-wishbone suspension

Independent wheel with multilink

system

Version Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 38.55 ft (11.75 m)

Rack and pinion with electric power

eering

2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m)

Rack and pinion with electric power

eering

247

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

Front

Overhang

Wheelbase

Rear

Overhang

Overall

Length

Overall

Height

Front Track

Rear Track

Overall Width

(Incl. Mirrors)

Overall Width

(Excl. Mirrors)

33.9 inches

(862 mm)

111 inches

(2,818 mm)

39.7 inches

(1,008 mm)

184.6 inches

(4,688 mm)

66 inches

(1,677 mm)

63.5 inches

(1,612 mm)

65 inches

(1,650 mm)

85.2 inches

(2,163 mm)

74.9 inches

(1,903 mm)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

248

Quadrifoglio Model

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT VOLUME

Capacity (VDA standards)

Rear seats not folded

Vehicle unladen: 18.54 cubic feet (525 liters)

A B C D E F G H I

31.3 inches

(795 mm)

111 inches

(2,818 mm)

40.3 inches

(1,023.6 mm)

182.6 inches

(4,638 mm)

56.1 inches

(1,424.9 mm)

61.2 inches

(1,554.5 mm)

63.3 inches

(1,607.8 mm)

79.7 inches

(2,024.4 mm)

73.7 inches

(1,872 mm)

249

WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.0L T4 MAir Engine AWD 2.0L T4 MAir Engine RWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional

equipment)

4,007 3,901

Payload including the driver

1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

992 992

Maximum permitted loads

2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

242 242

Front axle 2,491 2,403

Rear axle 2,976 2,932

Total 5,247 5,115

Towable loads - -

Braked trailer 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)

Unbraked trailer 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 1,000 lbs (454 kg)

Maximum load on roof 165 lbs (75 kg) 165 lbs (75 kg)

Maximum load on tow hitch (braked trailer) 300 lbs (136 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Weights (lbs) 2.9L V6 engine

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional

equipment)

4,313

Payload including the driver

1. If special equipment is fitted the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

992

Maximum permitted loads

2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

242

– Front axle 2,579

– Rear axle 2,976

– Total 5,423

Maximum load on roof 165 lbs (75 kg)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

250

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This engine is designed to meet all

emission regulations, and provide

tisfactory fuel economy and

performance when using high-quality

unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted

octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/

method. For optimal performance the use of

91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is

ommended in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with the required

tane number, hearing a light knocking sound

from the engine is not a cause for concern.

However, if the engine is heard making a heavy

knocking sound, see an authorized dealer

immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than

recommended octane number can cause engine

failure and may void or not be covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you

experience these symptoms, try another brand of

gasoline before considering service for the

vehicle.

REFORMULATED GASOLINE

Many areas of the country require the use of

cleaner burning gasoline referred to as

“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline

contains oxygenates and are specifically blended

to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air

quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is

rec

ommended. Properly blended reformulated

gasoline will provide improved performance and

durability of engine and fuel system components.

GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline

with oxygenates such as ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline

ntaining more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or

gasoline containing methanol are not the respon

sibility of the manufacturer and may void or not

covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM

ODIFICATIONS

Modifications that allow the engine to run on

Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid

Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine,

emissions, and fuel system components.

Problems that result from running CNG or LP are

not the responsibility of the manufacturer and

may void or not be covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT IN GASOLINE

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic

additive that is blended into some gasoline to

increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT

provides no performance advantage beyond

gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark

plug life and reduces emissions system

performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer

recommends that gasoline without MMT be used

in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may

not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore,

you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the

gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in

Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper

octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,

corrosion and stability additives are

recommended. Using gasolines that have these

additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce

emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline contains a higher level of

tergents to further aide in

minimizing engine and fuel system

deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit

www.toptiergas.com

for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents

uld be avoided. Many of these materials

intended for gum and varnish removal may

contain active solvents or similar ingredients.

These can harm fuel system gasket and

diaphragm materials.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha-

nol, or gasoline containing more than 15%

hanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result

in starting and drivability problems, damage

critical fuel system components, cause emis

sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/

cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu

minate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains

greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

251

FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

FLUID CAPACITIES

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control

system.

 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some

light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.

 The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of

methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

2.0 T4 MAir Engine

US Metric

Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.3 Gallons 8.8 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.25 Liters

Engine oil sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters

RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.3 Liters

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

252

RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD System Transfer Case 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

2.9 V6 Engine

US Metric

Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.5 Gallons 5.75 Liters

Engine oil sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV

Main body: 0.8 Quarts

Left TV: 0.64 Quarts

Right TV: 0.72 Quarts

Main body: 0.8 Liters

Left TV: 0.61 Liters

Right TV: 0.68 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.48 Quarts 0.45 Liters

AWD System Transfer Case 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

2.0 T4 MAir Engine

US Metric

253

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing

Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine

operation and durability.

ENGINE LUBRICATION

If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used to top up; in this case optimal

performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Engine Features Specification Replacement interval

2.0L

Mopar API SN

PLUS Certified

SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil

FCA Material Standards MS-13340 According To Maintenance Plan

CAUTION!

Using lubricants that do not meet

recommended SN PLUS or

equivalent oil specifications can

cause engine damage not covered

by the vehicle warranty.

2.9L 5W-40 ACEA C3 API SN FPT 9.55535-GH2 MS-12991 According To Maintenance Plan

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

ZF 8HP 50 – Synthetic ATF - Automatic transmission - 2.0L/2.9L

SAE 75W-85 Synthetic ATF FPW9.55550–DA9

Differential RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD;

U 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD/

2.0L engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic

bricant

FPW9.55550–DA10

AWD System FAD transfer cas/2.0L

fferential and reduction units RDU

230-TV/2.9L

SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA11 AWD System transfer case

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

254

PERFORMANCE

Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

* Based on manufacturer testing.

Engine coolant

CUNA NC956–16

ASTMD3306

MS.90032

Mix a minimum solution of 50%

ine coolant. Not mixable with

different formulation products.

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043

To be used diluted or undiluted in

win

dshield washer/wiper systems.

HVAC

R1234yf or R134a

(de

pending on the market)

– –

1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

Use Features Specification Applications

CAUTION!

The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the warranty.

Engine Top speed mph / (km/h)

Acceleration from 0-60 mph /

(0-100 km/h) sec.

2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP AWD Engine 143 / (230) * 5.4 *

2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP RWD Engine 143 / (230) * 5.5 *

2.9L V6 Engine 176 (283) * 3.6 *

255

SUGGESTIONS FOR

OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to

bring the right papers with you, as well as your

warranty folder. All work to be performed may not

be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional

charges with the service manager. Keep a

maintenance log of your vehicle's service history,

as this can often provide a clue to the current

problem.

PREPARE A LIST

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or

the specific work you want done. If you've had an

accident or work done that is not on your

maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS

If you list a number of items and you must have

your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the

situation with the service advisor and list the

items in order of priority. At many authorized

dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a

minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is

advisable to make these arrangements when you

call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are

vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you

to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized

dea

ler. We strongly recommend that you take the

vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your

vehicle the best, and are most concerned that

you get prompt and high quality service. The

manufacturer's authorized dealers have the

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special

tools, and the latest information to ensure the

vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an

aut

horized dealer service manager first. Most

matters can be resolved with this process.

 If for some reason you are still not satisfied,

talk to the general manager or owner of the

authorized dealer. They want to know if you

need assistance.

 If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the

concern, you may contact the manufacturer's

customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's

cus

tomer center should include the following

information:

 Owner's name and address

 Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and

office)

 Authorized dealer name

 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

 Vehicle delivery date and mileage

ALFA ROMEO CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

ALFA ROMEO CUSTOMER CARE

ANADA)

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English)

Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French)

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE

EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED

(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,

the manufacturer has installed special Telecom

munication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment

its customer center. Any hearing or speech

impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a

conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United

States, can communicate with the manufacturer

by dialing 1-800-380-2479.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that

require assistance can use the special needs

relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY

teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice

callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a

Bell Relay Service operator.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

256

SERVICE CONTRACT

You may have purchased a service contract for a

vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of

unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar

Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle

extended protection plans authorized, endorsed

and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional

protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you

purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you

will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identi

fication Card in the mail within three weeks of the

hic

le delivery date. If you have any questions

about the service contract, call the FCA US LLC’s

Service Contract National Customer Hotline at

1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service

con

tract you may have purchased from another

manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA

US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,

please refer to the contract documents, and

contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major

inve

stment when you purchased the vehicle. An

authorized dealer has also made a major

investment in facilities, tools, and training to

assure that you are absolutely delighted with the

ownership experience.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information for the terms and

provisions of FCA US LLC and FCA Canada Inc.

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS

IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND

ASHINGTON, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect that could cause a crash or

cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US

LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may

open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Veh

icle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to

http://

www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey

Ave

nue, SE., West Building,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from

http://

www.safercar.gov

IN CANADA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

safety defect, you should contact the

Customer Service Department

immediately. Canadian customers who

wish to report a safety defect to the

Canadian government should contact

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle

Defect Investigations and Recalls at

1-800-333-0510 or go to

http://

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines

only), some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit,

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects, or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain, or emit, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive

harm.

257

PUBLICATION ORDER

FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use

either the website or the phone numbers listed

below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a

mplete working knowledge of the vehicle,

system, and/or components and is written in

straightforward language with illustrations,

diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with

agrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These

manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on

computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and

correct problems, using step-by-step trouble

shooting and drivability procedures, proven

agnostic tests and a complete list of all tools

and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with

the

assistance of service and engineering

specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US

LLC vehicles.

To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om

To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Information,

it:



www.techauthority.com

(US)

Call Tech Authority toll free at:

 1-800-890-4038 (US)

 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

258

INDEX

Accessories Purchased By The Owner.......... 4

Active Blind Spot Assist ...

............................96

Active Safety Systems...

............................... 90

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System ...

.....90

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise

Control) .

......................................................149

f ...........................................................150

............................................................150

Add

itives, Fuel ...

.........................................250

Air Bag.........................................................113

Air

Bag Operation...

................................114

Air Bag Warning Light ...

.........................112

Driver Knee Air Bag...

.............................115

Enhanced Accident Response ...

..118, 210

Event Data Recorder (EDR)...

................210

Front Air Bag...

........................................113

If Deployment Occurs ...

.........................117

Knee Impact Bolsters ...

.........................115

Maintaining Your Air Bag System...

.......120

Maintenance ...

.......................................120

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light...

......113

Side Air Bags ...

.......................................115

Transporting Pets...

................................128

Air Bag Light ...

...................................112, 129

Air Pressure

Tires .

.......................................................233

Alf

a Active Suspension (AAS)...

..................144

Alfa DNA System ...

.....................................141

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...

....................251

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System...

............... 90

Assistance Towing...

...................................188

Automatic Climate Controls...

...................... 43

Automatic Dimming Mirror...

........................33

Automatic Headlights...

................................34

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...

.....43

Automatic Transmission ...

........................ 136

Auxiliary Driving Systems ...

..........................94

Auxiliary Power Outlet ...

...............................61

Battery........................................................ 219

yless Key Fob Replacement...

.............15

Battery Recharging...

................................. 220

Belts, Seat.................................................. 129

ind Spot Monitoring ...

...............................94

Bodywork (Cleaning And Maintenance)...

242

B-Pillar Location...

...................................... 230

Brakes ........................................................ 246

ake Fluid Level...

................................ 219

Brightness, Interior Lights...

.........................39

Bulbs, Light ...

............................................. 130

Camera, Rear...

.......................................... 175

Capacities, Fluid ...

..................................... 251

Carbon Monoxide Warning ...

.................... 129

Certification Label ...

.................................. 178

Changing A Flat Tire ...

............................... 226

Chart, Tire Sizing...

..................................... 228

Check Engine Light (Malfunction

Indicator Light).

...........................................88

Checking Levels...

............................. 216, 217

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety...

.......... 129

Checks, Safety ...

........................................ 129

Child Restraint ...

........................................ 120

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ...

..................................... 122

Child Seat Installation ...

........................127

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat

Belt .

.................................................... 126

fant And Child Restraints...

................ 121

LATCH Positions...

..................................123

Lower Anchors And Tethers For

Children.

............................................. 123

der Children And Child Restraints...

.. 122

Seating Positions...

................................123

Clean Air Gasoline ...

..................................250

Cleaning

Wheels.

................................................... 238

imate Control ...

......................................... 42

Automatic................................................. 43

mpact Spare Tire ...

................................237

Contract, Service...

..................................... 256

Cooling System

Cooling Capacity .

.................................251

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...

......251

Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...

..... 147, 149

Cupholders ...

................................................ 60

Customer Assistance...

.............................. 255

Daytime Running Lights ...

........................... 34

Defroster, Windshield...

............................. 129

Dimensions ...

.............................................247

Disabled Vehicle Towing................... 188

, 208

Door Locks ...

................................................ 25

Door Opener, Garage...

................................ 56

Doors ............................................................ 20

259

Drive Train Control (DTC) System................91

Driving Modes ............................................142

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System...

.. 91

Electric Park Brake...

..................................134

Electric Remote Mirrors...

............................33

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise

Control) .

......................................................147

ectronic Stability Control (ESC) System...

Emergency

In Case Of .

............................188, 20

1, 226

SOS Emergency Call ...

...........................188

Emergency, In Case Of

Jump Starting .

......................................204

Overheating...

.........................................207

Towing............................................188, 20

Emission Control System Maintenance...

... 88

Engine .........................................................244

ock Heater...

........................................133

Engine Coolant Level ...

..........................218

Exhaust Gas Caution ...

..........................129

Fuel Requirements ...

.............................250

Jump Starting ...

......................................206

Oil............................................................251

l Selection ...

........................................251

Overheating...

.........................................207

Starting ...................................................207

gine Compartment...

..............................216

Engine Compartment (Washing) ...

............242

Engine Oil

Level Check .

.........................................217

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature.

..............................................118, 21

Ethanol........................................................250

Exh

aust Gas Cautions ...

............................ 129

Exhaust System ...

...................................... 129

Exterior Lighting...

..................................34, 35

Exterior Lights...

...................................34, 130

Flashers

Hazard Warning...

.................................. 188

Turn Signals...

..................................36, 130

Fluid Capacities ...

...................................... 251

Fluid Leaks...

.............................................. 130

Fluids And Lubricants...

............................. 253

Forward Collision Warning ...

........................99

Fuel

Additives .

............................................... 250

ean Air................................................. 250

hanol................................................... 250

terials Added ...

................................. 250

Methanol................................................ 250

nk Capacity ...

..................................... 251

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)...

.............56

Gasoline, Clean Air ...

................................. 250

Gasoline, Reformulated ...

......................... 250

Gross Axle Weight Rating...

....................... 180

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating...

.................. 180

GVWR ......................................................... 179

zard Warning Flashers...

....................... 188

Head Restraints...

.........................................30

Head Rests ...

................................................30

Headlights

Switch.

................................................34, 35

eadlights (Cleaning) ...

............................. 242

Heated Mirrors...

.......................................... 34

Heated Steering Wheel ...

............................ 32

Heater, Engine Block ...

.............................. 133

Hill Decent Control (HDC) System...

............ 92

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System ...

.................. 93

Hitches

Trailer Towing.

......................................181

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...

............ 56

Hood

Closing.

..................................................... 51

ening .................................................... 51

entification Data ...

..................................244

Ignition.......................................................... 16

itch....................................................... 16

mobilizer (Sentry Key) ...

.......................... 18

In Case Of Emergency ...

............................ 188

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices...

......4

Instrument Cluster...

.................................... 63

Display...................................................... 65

strument Panel

Features .

.................................................. 63

terior Lights ...

............................................ 36

Interiors (Cleaning) ...

.................................243

Jack Operation ...

........................................226

Jump Starting...

.......................................... 204

Keyless Enter-N-Go...

................................... 21

Passive Entry...

......................................... 21

Keys .............................................................. 14

260

INDEX

Lane Change And Turn Signals ................... 36

LaneSense...

...............................................170

Lap/Shoulder Belts...

.................................108

Latches .......................................................130

aks, Fluid ...

.............................................130

Life Of Tires...

..............................................236

Liftgate..........................................................52

fting The Vehicle...

...................................226

Light Bulbs...

...............................................130

Types Of Bulbs ...

....................................191

Lights ..........................................................130

Air

Bag ...........................................112, 12

Automatic Headlights ...

...........................34

Courtesy/Reading...

....................36, 37, 38

Daytime Running ...

..................................34

Exterior ...................................................130

adlight Switch ...

............................ 34, 35

Headlights ......................................... 34, 35

igh Beam................................................ 35

strument Cluster...

......................... 34, 35

Intensity Control...

.................................... 39

Interior ............................................... 37, 38

ap........................................................... 36

rk........................................................... 35

ading .................................................... 36

rn Signals...

.................................. 36, 130

Loading Vehicle ...

.......................................178

Tires ........................................................230

cks

Child Protection.

..................................... 25

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine) .

.........................................................88

nual

Service .

.................................................. 257

thanol.................................................... 250

rrors...........................................................33

Aut

omatic Dimming...

...............................33

Electric Powered...

....................................33

Electric Remote ...

.....................................33

Heated ......................................................34

cupant Restraints...

............................... 107

Oil, Engine

Capacity .

................................................ 251

commendation...

............................... 251

Viscosity ................................................. 251

ener, Garage Door (Homelink) ...

.............56

Operator Manual

Owner's Manual.

.................................. 257

Outlet

Power .

.......................................................61

erheating, Engine ...

............................... 207

Paintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance)...

242

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ...

.............93

Park Assist ...

.............................................. 166

ParkSense System ...

................................. 166

Passive Entry ...

.............................................21

Performance (Top Speed)...

...................... 254

Pets ............................................................ 128

acard, Tire And Loading Information...

.. 230

Power

Mirrors.

..................................................... 33

tlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)...

........ 61

Seats ........................................................ 26

nroof..................................................... 49

wer Supply...

........................................... 245

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...

.......... 111

Pretensioners

Seat Belts.

.............................................. 111

olonged Vehicle Inactivity ...

...................241

Radial Ply Tires...

........................................235

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones...

.....4

Rear Camera ...

........................................... 175

Rear Cross Path ...

........................................ 94

Reformulated Gasoline ...

..........................250

Refueling Procedure...

...............................177

Refueling The Vehicle...

............................. 176

Reminder, Seat Belt ...

...............................108

Remote Keyless Entry ...

.............................. 14

Remote Starting System ...

........................131

Replacement Tires...

..................................236

Reporting Safety Defects ...

....................... 256

Restraints, Child...

......................................120

Restraints, Head ...

....................................... 30

Rims And Tires ...

........................................227

Roll Over Warning ...

........................................3

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...

.................129

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...

.............. 130

Safety Defects, Reporting ...

...................... 256

Safety Information, Tire...

..........................227

Safety Tips.................................................. 129

261

Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................129

Saving Fuel .................................................185

Scheduled Servicing ...

...............................211

Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.0L T4 MAir Engine Versions).

..............212

Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.9L V6 Gasoline Engine Versions) .

......214

Seat Belts ..........................................108, 12

Adjustable Shoulder Belt...

....................110

Adjustable Upper Shoulder

Anchorage .

.........................................110

Adj

ustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage .

.........................................110

ild Restraints...

...................................120

Energy Management Feature ...

............111

Front Seat...............................................108

spection...............................................129

p/Shoulder Belt Untwisting...

............110

Lap/Shoulder Belts...

.............................108

Pregnant Women ...

................................111

Pretensioners...

......................................111

Rear Seat................................................108

minder................................................108

at Belt Pretensioner ...

.......................111

Untwisting Procedure ...

.........................110

Seats ............................................................. 26

Adj

ustment ...

............................................ 27

Head Restraints ...

.................................... 30

Height Adjustment ...

................................26

Power........................................................ 26

lting ........................................................ 26

curity Alarm ...

........................................... 19

Service Assistance ...

..................................255

Service Contract ...

..................................... 256

Service Manuals...

..................................... 257

Servicing Procedures ...

............................. 221

Shoulder Belts ...

........................................ 108

Signals, Turn ...

.....................................36, 130

Snow Chains ...

........................................... 239

Snow Tires.................................................. 239

are Tires...

..................................... 237, 238

Speed Control

Accel/Decel .

........................................ 148

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...

...................... 151

Cancel ........................................... 149, 15

Distance Setting (ACC Only)...

............... 152

Resume.................................................. 149

t .......................................................... 148

eed Control (Cruise Control)...

.............. 147

Starting....................................................... 207

tton .......................................................16

ld Weather...

...................................... 132

Starting And Operating...

........................... 207

Starting Procedures ...

............................... 207

Starting The Engine ...

................................ 131

Steering...................................................... 246

eel Locking ...

.......................................17

Wheel, Heated...

.......................................32

Wheel, Tilt .................................................32

op/Start System...

.................................. 144

Suggestions For Driving ...

......................... 185

Sun Roof .......................................................49

pplemental Restraint System –

Air Bag .

....................................................... 113

spension ...

............................................. 246

Symbols........................................................... 6

lescoping Steering Column ...

.................. 32

Tilt Steering Column ...

................................. 32

Tire And Loading Information Placard...

... 230

Tire Markings ...

.......................................... 227

Tire Safety Information...

...........................227

Tire Service Kit...

........................................201

Tires ................................. 130, 23

3, 237, 240

Aging (Life Of Tires) ...

............................ 236

Air Pressure...

.........................................233

Changing ................................................ 201

mpact Spare ...

................................... 237

General Information ...

..................233, 237

High Speed...

.......................................... 234

Inflation Pressure ...

...............................233

Jacking ...................................................226

fe Of Tires...

.........................................236

Load Capacity ...

..................................... 230

Quality Grading ...

................................... 240

Radial ..................................................... 235

placement...

.......................................236

Safety ............................................ 227, 23

Sizes ....................................................... 228

ow Tires.............................................. 239

are Tires...

................................. 237, 238

Spinning ................................................. 235

ailer Towing...

......................................183

Tread Wear Indicators...

........................236

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...

............... 182

Towing ...............................................179, 18

Disabled Vehicle ...

.................................208

Towing Eyes...

.............................................209

262

INDEX

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) .......................................................104

action Control System (TCS)...

..................94

Trailer Towing ...

..........................................179

Cooling System Tips...

............................184

Hitches....................................................181

nimum Requirements...

.....................182

Tips .........................................................184

ailer And Tongue Weight ...

........181, 182

Wiring......................................................183

ailer Towing Guide ...

...............................181

Trailer Weight ...

..........................................181

Transmission ...

...........................................245

Transporting Pets...

....................................128

Tread Wear Indicators ...

............................236

Turn Signals...

...............................................36

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features...

......21

Passive Entry Programming...

..................21

Uniform Tire Quality Grades...

................... 240

Universal Transmitter...

................................56

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt...

............ 110

Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...

.......................5

Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...

......................4

Vehicle Identification Number ...

............... 244

Vehicle Loading ...

............................. 178, 230

Vent Operation...

...........................................42

Warnings, Roll Over .

.....................................3

Warranty Information ...

............................. 256

Washer Fluid For Windshield/

Headlights .

................................................. 218

shers, Windshield ...

................................ 39

Weights.......................................................249

eel And Wheel Tire Care...

....................238

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...

....................238

Wheels And Tires ...

.................................... 227

Windows (Cleaning) ...

................................242

Windshield Defroster...

.............................. 129

Windshield Wiper

Replacing Blades.

................................223

Windshield Wipers ...